Online Marketing Made Easy with Amy Porterfield

By Amy Porterfield

Listen to a podcast, please open Podcast Republic app. Available on Google Play Store.


Category: Management & Marketing

Open in iTunes


Open RSS feed


Open Website


Rate for this podcast

Subscribers: 1070
Reviews: 0

Description

How do I start an online business? Grow my email list to thousands of subscribers? Sell more and grow faster? These are just some of the big questions that leading online marketing strategist, Amy Porterfield, digs into on the top-ranked Online Marketing Made Easy Podcast. In addition to mini marketing masterclasses and step-by-step guides, each episode is designed to help you take immediate action on the most important strategies for starting, scaling and automating your online business. Amy’s specialty is getting into the online trenches with you. Thinking about creating an online course? Want to promote with webinars? Need help with your Facebook ads? Discover why hundreds of thousands of online business owners turn to Amy Porterfield to generate more profits and to make sense of the online marketing space, implement the strategies that really get results, and turn that side hustle into a business that lasts.

Episode Date
#292: Student Spotlight: How This “Post Webinar Nurture Sequence” Led To Over $11,000 EXTRA In Revenue with Karida Griffith Walker
01:00:04

Let’s be honest, your launch runway and your webinars are the most exciting part of your launch! 

And if we’re being really honest, the time between your last webinar and your cart closing day, you’re most likely exhausted, and all you want to do is curl up to a good Netflix binge session -- at least I do!

And while it’s tempting to do just that, I find that this time (between your last webinar and your cart close date) is where getting scrappy and making a little post-webinar push can transform the outcome and revenue of your launch. 

One of my Digital Course Academy students, Karida Griffith Walker, decided to roll up her sleeves and get scrappy with her post-webinar nurture sequence -- despite having a cold and a household of stuffy noses!

Her commitment to showing up for her audience members who were on the fence resulted in over $11,000 extra in revenue and 20 new students in her digital course. That’s 58% of her revenue for this specific launch!

She even talks about having a coughing attack during one of her live Facebook videos, but that didn’t stop her from showing up. 

In this episode, Karida shares her post-webinar strategies and some seriously impressive numbers. Take a listen, get inspired, and start planning to use some of these post-webinar strategies for your next launch. 

Here’s a breakdown of what Karida and I chatted about…

  • [06:15]Karida was a professional dancer and Radio City Rockette for almost 5 years. She then left to pursue her passion for tap dancing, which led her to teaching tap to others.
  • [09:21] Karida got married and moved to Portland where she is raising her three kids. She wanted to combine her love of dancing and teaching and stumbled across Webinars That Convert. She knew that there was a need for tap dance teacher training, so she created her signature course The Tap Teacher Lounge.
  • [14:04] In her course, Karida uses slides, audio, and direct to camera videos of her actually showing dance moves to teach her students. She then allows them to send in videos for her feedback!
  • [18:21] In Karida's most recent launch, she had 204 people registered for her four webinars. She also did something really cool, she offered an "interested but can't attend" option for those who wanted to register. She had 105 people select this option. She had 15 people sign up during her webinars and 20 people sign up during her post-webinar efforts. Her 35 signups brought her $21,000 in revenue.
  • [23:56] If you pay attention to how your audience behaves—how they respond, what they need, what they want—you can get so many profitable ideas on how to cater to them and truly show up in a way that makes them want to buy. 
  • [24:35] After the webinar, Karida kept running Facebook lives where she tackled her customer's biggest objections and explained her tap curriculum and what her students would learn. She retargeted 240 people and spent $170 in ads -- that's it! This resulted in eight new purchases. 
  • [40:28] Karida had a totally different mindset with this launch. She got scrappy, because she wants to have a six-figure business. She was committed to her process and kept pushing all the way through the launch with her six-figure mindset!
  • [45:43] Karida touched on the importance of sending a sequence of post-webinar emails and why some people appreciate receiving them.
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Dec 05, 2019
#291: Master Live Video: How to Shift Your Mindset And Build Your Confidence
45:17

Your mindset is key. Whether you’re looking to build a business or create a life you love -- it all comes back to your mindset.

When it comes to building a successful online business, there’s no doubt that you’re going to have to get in front of the camera from time to time. But that doesn’t necessarily mean you’re going to love it! 

In fact, most people feel extremely uncomfortable in front of the camera, whether it’s for a Facebook Live or a webinar, which is why I’m sharing some of my favorite strategies for boosting your confidence in front of the camera. 

And you guys know that I haven’t always loved doing live videos. In fact, I can’t say I am jumping at the bit to do them now. 

However, I’ve definitely used these exact strategies to boost my confidence and feel much more comfortable jumping on to do a live video.

I want to challenge you to take these strategies and make them your own. Use them over and over to shift your mindset and boost your confidence so that whether you’re doing a Facebook Live, an Instagram Live, or a webinar, you feel like a pro and show up for your audience and boost your know, like, and trust factor.  

Go ahead and take these strategies to start creating real impact for your audience and for your business!

You’ll learn…

  1. The importance of creating a pre-live ritual. 
  2. How to shift your focus to what you’re offering your clients. 
  3. How you can use your audience's engagement to build your confidence and your content.
  4. Tips for prompting your audience with a cue. (Including the cues I use!)
  5. What steps to walk through to make sure you’re ready to do a live video or webinar.
  • [10:38] Create your own pre-live ritual. Create a ritual that you commit to performing each time before you go live -- this will allow you to automate your live video process and help you to become more relaxed and confident going live!
  • [14:29] You're going to have some messiness when you're first starting out and building confidence on live video. Committing to a ritual will help you feel more natural in front of the camera and rock your lives.
  • [15:54] Set an alarm 10 minutes prior to going live and get in the zone. Make sure everything is ready and then just allow yourself to settle in. Quiet your mind, look over your notes and allow yourself to find a sense of calmness.
  • [18:19] Your mindset will affect your energy for live videos. If you're distracted and don't take the time to get excited about your live video, your audience will know. Here's a tip for you: smile when you talk!
  • [20:32] Focus on what you're bringing to your audience. When you're worried about how you look on camera you're making the video about you and not your audience. Remember that you are doing live videos to support and serve your audience.
  • [29:26] Allow your audience’s engagement to build your confidence and your content. Treat every person like they are special, show up like a boss, and engage with them. However, don't worry about having a huge audience when you're live. Keep in mind that your video will live on and get views and shares.
  • [30:50] Ask your audience questions that relate to their pain point. Also, prompt them to share one takeaway or action item they are going to implement.
Nov 27, 2019
BONUS: Quadruple Your Marketing Budget Using Facebook & Instagram Ads with Rick Mulready
50:26

We all know that Facebook and Instagram ads can help get the word out about our products, help build our lists, and even sell products. Yet, many of you have unanswered questions. That's why today we are answering your 10 burning questions about Facebook and Instagram ads. Those who know me, know that I'm not an expert on this, but my Regis to my Kathy Lee, Rick Mulready is here today to answer all of those questions and more.

Today, we did our first live training in Momentum. The training ran over, and I had no buffer between that training and this call with Rick. We chatted a bit before recording, and Rick helped put me at ease. Rick has a huge heart. When he comes to my events, he ends up with a big long line of people wanting to ask him questions about ads and marketing. Even when he’s not a speaker. He opens up his computer, takes his time, and really gets into it with them. He holds court with them, and that’s what we are doing today.

This podcast is specifically for online experts or people who sell a course, product, or coaching. It’s for people who want to build their list and increase their sales, but haven't quite started using ads yet. It’s also for those who have started using ads, but maybe they aren’t working out as well as you thought they would. 

  1. [05:09] What objective do I choose to get people to register for my webinar? You have to choose between lead generation and conversion. Conversion is having people click on your ad and go to your webinar registration page. The thank you page is used as custom conversion tracking. In Facebook ads use the conversion objective not the lead generation objective. 
  2. [07:14] What's the most effective ad type? You have to test things out. Any ad can be effective. It's about testing to see what works for you. Using a Facebook Live as an ad is a great video option. Try an image, video, and carousel ad and see what works best. 
  3. [09:50] Should I target other Facebook pages or cold audiences? Warm audiences are people on our list or website visitors. Prioritize warm audiences first, and then create lookalike audiences to cold target. 
  4. [13:27] People often don't understand their target customer. You need a holistic understanding of your target customer to do well with ads. Once you know your target customer create sub segments. Don’t have one conversation for everyone. 
  5. [19:54] Why are ad costs rising? They are more advertisers than ever. More competition equals higher ad cost. It's also the holiday season. There's an election coming up. 
  6. [23:08] What's CBO or campaign budget optimization? This will be the default way to set budgets. Set the budget at the campaign level. The algorithm divides the budget by ad performance. You can still set minimums at ad set level. 
  7. [28:33] How do I know my ads are working? What's the cost per lead? You want at least 20% converting. Tools like Leadpages will tell you the conversion rate. Leads divided by landing page conversion. Focus on increasing rates and the consistency between the page and ad. 
  8. [35:25] What's the deal with video? Create ads with mobile in mind first. Create video for areas where people consume video. People who watch a certain percentage are engagement audiences. 
  9. [37:44] Why are my ads getting disapproved? This happens to everyone. Review ad policies and keep up with changes. Don't make promises or insinuate people are struggling with certain things. Speak to positivity and transformation. 
  10. [40:39] Do I need to run ads when I'm not launching? It's a better strategy to consistently run ads and build engagement and your list. Facebook rewards consistently running ads and that reduces the cost of your launch. 
  11. [43:23] Bonus tip: Mindset around testing. Keep testing until you figure it out and you will win. 

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Nov 22, 2019
#290: 5 Powerful Ways To Set Your Affiliates Up For Success
43:49

In this week’s episode, I talk all about how to boost your affiliate marketing game (and revenue) by loving up on your affiliates!

So when I'm talking about "loving up" on your affiliates, this means how you can help them to best deliver and succeed as your affiliate -- promoting your program or service.

Affiliates broaden your audience reach and because they’ve already established the know, like, and trust factor with their audience, your conversion rate will be higher than if you were to just target these audiences in cold ads.

This is why, in my most recent Digital Course Academy launch, I went above and beyond to give my affiliates a whole lot of love and attention, and let me tell you, it definitely paid off.

Today I want to share the specific ways I made my affiliates, like Jenna Kutcher, Stu McLaren, Kajabi, and Jill and Josh Stanton, feel extra special and important so that you can do the same for your upcoming launch. 

In this episode, I’m going to share 5 simple and powerful strategies to love up on your affiliates so they, in turn, go above and beyond to sell your course or service. 

You’re going to walk away from this episode with so many exciting ideas for your next launch!

Tune in to learn these 5 strategies (plus a bonus strategy!)...

  1. The top documents to create to keep your affiliates organized and in the know. 
  2. The power of using a Facebook group to inspire and connect with your affiliates. 
  3. Assigning one person on your team (or a VA) to give your affiliates extra care and attention. 
  4. Surveying your affiliates to improve your affiliate marketing strategy for your next launch. 
  5. The importance of starting out small. 
  • [08:38] We love to organize all of the information and details that our affiliates need to know into an easy to access Google Doc. This helps us make sure everything is in order before we even welcome affiliates. Having a doc like this also minimizes confusion and eliminates redundant questions.
  • [10:12] A sneak peek of all the things that we include in our Affiliate FAQ document -- from commissions to payment options and everything in between.
  • [17:17] Create a private Facebook group just for your affiliates to communicate with them before you actually open the cart, and continue communication and relationship building while the cart is open. This helps build hype and keeps affiliates in the loop.
  • [21:55] Consider assigning one person on your team to be your affiliate concierge. Assigning someone specific to the needs of your affiliates ensures that they are prioritized, heard, and treated with extra special care.
  • [25:10] Survey your affiliate partners post-launch to help you improve for your next launch, but also to make sure that you are creating solid relationships with your affiliates to ensure that they actually want to come back the next time. Getting post-launch affiliate feedback is crucial, so don't skip this step!
  • [27:57] Start out small. Take baby steps and be realistic about the number of affiliates you can manage. Having a couple of affiliates that are well taken care of is more important than having a bunch who don't sell because they don't feel special.
  • [36:53] Show gratitude and appreciation to your affiliates for their hard work -- this is essential! Don't be afraid to send them a gift or give them a call to show that you're truly grateful.
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Nov 21, 2019
#289: The Entrepreneurs Morning Routine (Including Tips to Create Your Own)
38:54

There are three kinds of people in this world. Those who have morning routines, those who don’t, and those who want to tell everyone else what their morning routine should be.

I definitely have one, and I love it. It’s a good mix of Scout, Peloton, and of course Hobie (when he’s home!).

Here’s the thing… I am not here to tell you how you should do your morning.

In fact, on today’s podcast I am giving you the inside scoop on the morning routines of some of my favorite people. When you listen, you’ll notice that no two are the same. Did I mention all of these people are very successful entrepreneurs with a lot on their plates?

As entrepreneurs, we get to design our own lives. We get to call the shots with how we spend our days and what we work on. Having a morning routine is a great way to gain focus and clarity and make sure the work for the day is the right work. 

I hope this episode inspires you to create a morning routine that works for you and your life and most importantly supports the big goals you want to achieve.

You’ll hear from…

  • [08:00] Jasmine Star needs slow mornings to facilitate creativity and productivity. She quietly does the things that her soul needs to optimize her creativity levels. She gives herself 45 minutes of utter decadence. She also gets two hours of unobstructed work time.
  • [13:18] Jennifer Allwood has four kids. Need I say more? Her mornings consist of getting kids out the door for the first two hours. And she still manages to get quiet time for the first 35 to 45 minutes of the day. She goes out to her deck with coffee. She thinks about her intentions for the day and what will actually move the needle. 
  • [17:50] James Wedmore makes sure his routine gets him excited to get up. He meditates for mental well being. For physical well being he uses an infrared sauna, the Peloton Tread, a Bellicon rebounder, and a BioCharger. Some days he just goes for a walk or swims in the ocean. 
  • [22:20] Julie Solomon began morning routines a few years ago, but made them too rigid. Now she sees her routine in a new way and it serves her far greater than before. Her routine is intentionally set up for self-care in whatever way it looks like for each day. 
  • [29:48] Stu McLaren starts with his five year old in his face asking if it’s time to get up yet. He doesn’t have a regimented routine in this season of life. His priorities are family time. His day starts and ends with his family. He takes his kids to school and gets his wife a cup of tea. He also takes his dog for a walk in the woods. 
  • [32:56] Kate Northrup has a different routine everyday, because of her two young children. She feels like her morning is not entirely within her control. She wakes up with the baby or when she is done sleeping. She takes a moment of gratitude. She has a cup of warm lemon water. Then coffee. She fits in a quick workout with her husband in the garage.

 

Nov 14, 2019
#288: How to Create a Pre-Launch Facebook Live Content Strategy
36:45

There’s one important factor that can either make or break your launch and it has nothing to do with how much money you spend on ads, how huge your list is, or whether or not your sales page copy is on point. 

One of the biggest predictors of launch success is how you show up for your audience in the 30 – 60 days before your launch. I don’t just mean writing a blog post or sending out an email every now and then. I mean putting on your planning hat and mapping out a series of Facebook Lives that both teach your audience something while also overcoming the common objections that come up when you go into launch mode. 

This pre-launch Facebook Live strategy has been a game-changer for me and I know it’ll be just as effective for you whether you’re just getting started or you’re a more advanced marketer. 

In this week’s podcast episode, I’m sharing all the behind-the-scenes details for my pre-launch Facebook Live strategy, including how to choose the topics you’ll go Live with, how often to go Live, and how to make sure that your Facebook Live viewers are primed and ready to register for your webinar and ultimately purchase your course. And by the way, I give you full permission to steal the strategy and make it your own. 

Here’s the breakdown:

  • [10:01] Once you know the topic of your course that you’ll be selling, you want to think about what you can present in your webinar that would be in alignment with and a perfect lead-in to that course. I break this down and share examples so the strategy will be super clear.  
  • [11:24] One of the best ways I’ve found to nail down a topic that would pique my ICA’s interest is to create a list of their objections, challenges, limiting beliefs and mindset blocks and then I create my Facebook Live content to counter those by presenting a solution that will help them achieve their desires and goals.
  • [13:42] To make it super actionable, I show you exactly how I take that list and turn each one into a Facebook Live topic. When you do this, you meet your customer right where they are and give them both momentum and traction — always a good thing! 
  • [25:13] These pre-launch Facebook lives are great for list building when you’re strategic with your CTAs (call-to-action). I talk about the lead magnets that did really well in my most recent pre-launch period.
  • [27:43] The key to any good strategy is to be open to tweaking and changing things up as you learn. I talk about the major tweak I’ll make with my next pre-launch content. Hint: I’ll be focusing much more on mindset. 
  • [30:35] Students often tell me they’re afraid they sound like a broken record when they repeat certain things when presenting their content. I talk about how repetition is actually a good thing because there are certain things your potential customer may need to hear more than once to make a buying decision. 

 

Nov 07, 2019
#287: How This Rocker Chick Combined a Membership and a Physical Product to Create the Perfect Experience
43:56

If you’ve been tuning in over the last few months I’ve been talking plenty about the power of membership sites, but today I’m sharing a whole new opportunity available to those of us who run a membership site to serve our audiences — adding a physical product to the mix!  

Erin Mullins Sanderson, better known online as Fit Rocker Chick, had no idea what she was building when she first started her membership site. All she knew was that she had a message to share and an audience that wanted more of that confident rocker vibe she embodies.

Erin’s story is super unique and something I think we can all learn from. She successfully launched a membership without even knowing what she’d offer, has grown that community to over 500 members, and has created a skincare line that her community went wild for. 

She’s clearly a woman of many talents, but what I adore most about her isn’t that perfect skin or her rockstar vibes — it’s her ability to take imperfect action and to really LISTEN to what her audience wants.

Today I want you to see how listening to your audience, thinking outside of the box, and doing something you’ve *always* wanted can amplify your audience experience AND help you boost your bottom line.

Here’s a sneak peek at what you’ll learn from my interview with Erin:

  • [06:47] How Erin felt a void with her group and wanted to bring them together. She ran the idea of a membership site by her list and found 100 beta testers to help flesh out her plan or lack of plan. 
  • [12:59] How Erin decided on what topics to cover each week in her membership. 
  • [14:30] Erin shares how often she goes live in the community, the type of heavyweight guest expert she features and the other fun aspects of being a member of her group (You’ll love her playlist and setlist ideas!)  
  • [17:03] How Erin’s members have become more courageous, started dreaming bigger, started new dream projects, became philanthropic, and left toxic relationships. These stories will inspire you! 
  • [24:18] How often Erin opens up her membership experience and the tools she uses to run her membership site.
  • [26:04] How the dream to create a skincare line came about.  
  • [34:32] How Erin made her community a part of the skincare product line decision-making process from the beginning. She talks about how she then launched her new product directly to her community, and it sold out right away. Her second batch also sold out in 48 hours. 

 

Oct 31, 2019
#286: How to Create a 7-Day Pop-Up Group to Boost Course Sales
50:56

I was recently in Toronto at Stu McLaren’s Tribe event and had an opportunity to record an interview with Jill Stanton of Screw the Nine to Five. Jill and Josh Stanton are two of my favorite people. Josh is hilarious, and I love talking with Jill. You know, I have so many good things to say about Facebook groups, but today is about using short pop-up groups to promote your offers. 

Jill and Josh used this method to promote one of their products and to promote my Digital Course Academy. They also threw in a fun twist by making five day challenges where they give a short challenge each day along with challenge marching orders. They also offer a prize to people who make it all the way through. 

These groups are a great way to warm up your audience or introduce them to a person or product that you would like to promote. Jill shares all of the tactics that she used along with some smart ideas to give the audience what they want and need without being pushy or overselling. This method can be used to create custom content and engagement for the right audience at the right time.

  • [07:31] You can create a timeline of four weeks, but for Jill and Josh, engagement started to drop off after a couple of weeks. They tested a two week group and the results were great. This is keeping people's attention for a shorter time and making a quick win. 
  • [10:14] Look at your offer and choose a congruent topic. Don't overwhelm people with the how-tos. Your offer is the how. You need to help them see the what and the why. Empower them to take action. 
  • [15:21] The what and why for Jill and Josh's Digital Course Academy pop-up promotion was Think Like an Expert - From Impostor Syndrome to Expert Status. They identified five core beliefs that were holding their audience back. 
  • [19:09] They ran a challenge on their last pop-up. They ran ads and spent about $42,000 and generated $293,000. They spent $10,000 to get 1200 super targeted people in the group. The one prior to that, they spent $4500 and made $43,000. 
  • [22:48] The challenges are short five minute videos that give a challenge and marching orders. The entire challenge has a prize incentive. Every day at 1:00 they would do a Facebook Live about the challenge of the day. No CTA but they are seeding the topic. 
  • [29:54] Pay attention to the objections you get when you make offers. You want to help the audience overcome their limiting beliefs. 
  • [31:04] Create content around the topic of your pop-up group and have your readers or listeners opt in. You're building your list and creating anticipation around an offer. People can opt in through messenger or email.
  • [35:29] Moving people from the challenge to the offer includes seeding throughout the content. You can move into a webinar, a free video series, a Facebook Live, and the cart opens on day five. When the offer closes, the group is archived. People who did join the program still get your support. 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Oct 24, 2019
#285: 5 Crucial Lessons Learned From Creating My First Membership Experience
35:09

Some of you may remember me talking about my upcoming membership site, and how I was going to put it on hold for awhile. Well, I’ve found clarity, and Momentum will be launching in November. Tribe members and people who have listened to my episode with Stu McLaren know how valuable it is to be part of a membership site. 

Today’s episode is special, because I’m going to be talking about my own membership site, and I want to share with you some of the lessons that I’ve learned. Up until a few months ago, I had reached a point where I was really stuck in the process of creating Momentum. Since then, I have learned so much. I have had so much insight and clarity, that I wanted to share what I’ve learned and the big lessons with you. 

I think you'll get a lot of value from hearing about how we processed the information, how we went about putting things together, and if you do decide to create a membership site, you can walk away with these lessons already locked in. So, you my friend do not need to make the same mistakes that I made. Here are the five crucial lessons that I’ve learned so far. 

  • [06:48] The idea that I want to add so much new content. We want a community that is actively creating and launching courses. It's an extension of DCA to help implement the journey. We dive deeper into existing content to help implementation. We go from learning to doing. 
  • [12:17] Put a stake in the ground of who the membership site is for. By putting a stake in the ground, I had full clarity, because I knew exactly who I was doing this for. DCA alumni can grow with Momentum at a deep implementation level. 
  • [18:27] I've got to spend time with the content roadmap and revisit it. Each week something new happens. I follow the Tribe model. We have been talking about this for seven weeks. This is the first time I feel like I'm ahead of something. I have months to plan, so it feels good to revisit. 
  • [23:48] If it's not a hell yes, it's a hell no. I got to a point where it wasn't coming together, and it felt heavy. I wasn't excited about it, so I had to put it on hold. I couldn't get the content right, because I didn't know Momentum was just for my DCA alumni. Once I got clear on my ICA and got excited, I loved working on it.
  • [26:53] I come from a place of always being a student. I purchased Tribe and went through it. Our master doc is created from everything we learned from the Tribe experience. We followed everything that Tribe teaches. 
  • [31:36] When Momentum launches, I can't wait to share the new things we learn and the tweaks we make. We can make it better every month. DCA students will get an invite when their 12 weeks are over. 

This episode is sponsored by gravy. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans like I do for my online courses, you've got to listen up. One of my biggest frustrations was lost money due to failed payment plans. In fact, it used to keep me up at night. I would worry about all the people that were on a payment plan, because if they didn't finish that payment plan I was screwed. 

That's when I decided I needed to do something about it, because I hated the worry. I started to work with gravy, and I promise you I never worry about payment plans anymore.  Gravy sets up a system inside of your business where they contact your customers within hours of their failed payments, and they capture updated billing information and save the customer. 

Our failed payment recovery rate increased from 33% to over 80%.That's a whole lot of saved payments. If your revenue is currently at $250,000 or more, and you know you're losing money due to failed payment plans each month, I want to encourage you to check out Gravy.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Oct 17, 2019
#284: The Better Buzz Strategy to Boost Engagement in Your Facebook Group with Dana Malstaff
59:18

If YOU have a community (free or paid) then you know ENGAGEMENT is the #1 metric for your success. Nobody wants to show up in a room full of crickets.

My friend Dana Malstaff, founder of Boss Mom and community creator extraordinaire is the queen of creating next level group engagement. That’s why I just had to have her on the podcast this week.

Dana’s Better Buzz Strategy has helped her create one of the most engaged communities I’ve ever heard of (70% monthly engagement with 40k members, say what?!).

Here are the six types of posts you want to be sure to utilize:

  • [29:49] The first type of buzz worthy post is a decision post. That answers a simple question to help you make a decision. Give three options, but don’t use a poll. It’s easy for people to engage, and the post stays alive. Then hop on a chat with your super engagers. You should be doing one of these a week.
  • [34:47] Opinion posts where you ask people what their opinion is. What are your top podcasts or number one blog? The best ones give you information on who to collaborate with and help you gain knowledge and insight. 
  • [37:37] Permission posts are where people tell a story or the hero’s journey. It creates a sense of belonging. Tell people they aren’t alone and create an appreciation loop.
  • [41:24] Can’t help themselves post. Telling people you just landed a client and asking them to celebrate or drop a GIF. Post something interesting where people can’t help but celebrate with you. 
  • [46:43] Ask is consistently telling people what you do. Let people know what you sell and what you want to be known for. 
  • [49:04] Authority posts. The easiest way to get authority is to get featured on podcasts. Also link to the post and mention it on Facebook live. 

Dana covers so much more in the episode. The first 20 minutes alone are pure gold, so tune in now and hop to it with applying these strategies in your communities!

 

Oct 10, 2019
#283: A Week in the Life (7 Days Behind-the-Scenes with Amy)
01:40:34

I know it might sound cliché, but I made a promise this year to be more vulnerable. To show you more of the “real” me. 

So for this week’s podcast episode, I’m doing something a little different and sharing a twice daily check-in for a full 7 days.

I hope that this lets you in on a few things. For one, I want you to know what a 7-figure course creator does in a week. You’ll hear it all; what I focus on, what I struggle with, and how I handle all of it.

I can’t promise it’ll be quite as engrossing as The Bachelor but if you’re anything like me, seeing into other people’s worlds is always a treat.

If you’ve ever wondered how I set up my week and spend my days, you’ll love this #nofilter episode where I share it all, including: 

  • Honest conversations Hobie and I have had recently that have been a little tough 
  • The new piece of exercise equipment I’m obsessed with 
  • The challenge the whole team is doing to be more intentional about what we do in a day, how we use our time, create morning rituals, and make extra time for what matters most
  • Why I started having a weekly date with my mom <3  
  • What it’s like going from a team of 3 to 10 full-time employees (and the essential books every single new hire gets) 
  • How the team operates for maximum efficiency (and how I really feel about meetings)
  • The inside scoop on my weight loss journey 

Here’s where you’ll find some of the highlights

  • [02:07] Sunday evening… weekly preview using the Full Focus Planner. This is about what the upcoming week will look like and what did and didn’t work from the previous week. Be intentional about how you structure your day. 
  • [07:32] Monday morning check-in. Morning walk with Scout and fiction audiobook. I also prepared for my FB Live session tomorrow. Phone call with team member. Recorded podcast ads. Hobie’s love language is quality time, so I have coffee with him from 8:30 to 9:00.
  • [13:33] Now I’m going to work on the quiz and then a team kick-off call. This is a one hour call with the entire team about what it looks like to launch digital course academy. Theme: We are master troubleshooters. 
  • [30:36] I do video on Tuesdays. Instagram story about launch. Facebook Live as part of DCA prelaunch. I also have a DCA affiliate Facebook Live. I don’t workout on video day. I do get a blow out. 
  • [41:38] Wednesday is podcast batching day. I’m doing 3 podcasts today, and some interviews as I grow my team. I also share my hiring process and the book bundle that I send to new hires.
  • [01:10:41] Thursday evening. I’m back from acupuncture. When I make mistakes that create stress, I know it’s time to fix the system. 
  • [01:15:44] Friday… Call at 7:00 am with weight-loss coach. Today, I’m recording the outcome videos for the DCA quiz. Then I fly to Portland, Oregon.
  • [01:25:50] On Saturday I met with my friend Mike Pacchione to work on presentation content. 

I hope you enjoyed the week with me. 

 

Oct 03, 2019
#282: 10 Ways to Repurpose ONE Single Piece of Content
35:00

You are going to love this episode. I give a step-by-step strategy on how to take one single piece of content and repurpose it 10 different ways. We all know how time-consuming content creation can be. 

After all that work, we hit publish and put it out in the world, but then it just sits there in that one location. Why not leverage all of that hard work by packaging the content up in different shapes and sizes and publishing it on different platforms? 

This makes your efforts more efficient and allows your ideal audience to consume your content in a variety of different ways. 

This is so smart. Repurposing your content should be part of your content creation process. Promise me that you won't let another week go by where you create content and only put it out one time and in one location. 

  • [07:49] Sit down and record your podcast audio. Make a video recording for extra mileage. Works best for interviews. Publish your audio wherever you normally publish your podcast. 
  • [11:10] Transcribe the podcast audio. Link to the transcript from your website show notes on it's own page that opens in a new window. This is great for SEO! 
  • [12:45] Show notes are the second way to repurpose your content. 
  • [14:26] Take snippets from the outline, transcripts, or show notes and craft an email that will notify subscribers about your new podcast episode. This is a great way to share weekly content and send weekly emails. 
  • [16:57] Pull out really good quotes or stats that can be turned into graphics. 
  • [17:41] Now that you have the show notes, email copy, and great quotes and stats, pull from those to create great social media posts. If you share the post on multiple platforms, tweak it so the language matches the platform. 
  • [18:48] Select a really juicy audio clip and use Wavve to turn it into a video highlight to promote your episode on social media. 
  • [19:46] Take the content you created and format it into an article on Medium.com. Anyone can post, and if you elect to have it reviewed by Medium curators, they will share it if they think it will benefit their audience. Or guest post on other blogs or online publication. 
  • [20:51] Create a freebie. Take the content and make a checklist, worksheet, or guide. You can use it to build your list or to promote your content or both. 
  • [22:30] Use parts of your content as an answer to frequently asked questions. When the same questions come up time and time again, and you have already covered it use that existing content to add to your website or course FAQ area. 
  • [24:34] It's all about video. This can be really valuable when you make the effort. Take your transcript and highlight sections that you could do a quick video about. 
  • [27:58] Bonus twist. Pay attention to what resonates with your audience. That can become a new piece of content. 

This episode is sponsored by my Free Masterclass all about list building. If you've struggled with list building or you are not actively growing your email list, this class is for you. You know, everything in your business is easier when you have an email list. If you want to know what it takes to create a list building foundation from scratch, this step-by-step masterclass is for you. 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Sep 26, 2019
#281: How to Plan Your First (or Next) Photoshoot
46:49

I've never loved having my picture taken.

But eventually, I learned to at least get comfortable with it.

It's so important that people see the real you. That your audience can connect with you and see you. Plus, you can use professional photos in soooo many places beyond just social media.

Today, I'm taking the guesswork out of planning your next photo shoot and sharing my top tips on how to show up feeling good, even if you feel nervous about having your photo taken.

I also created an extensive photoshoot guide that you can use to plan your first or next photoshoot like a total pro. Click here to download it now!

You’ll need these images for social media, guest posts, ads, sales pages, webinars, and more. When you know how to plan and organize a photoshoot, you'll not only end up with a bunch of amazing images to use, but you'll also save time and money by not having to hunt all over the place for your next image. 

  • [10:06] I want you to show up for yourself, even when it's way out of your comfort zone -- and I'll explain how to do that. 
  • [12:27] I talk about why it's important to start an inspiration collection of photos you love that would be a good fit for your personality and brand. Put together a fun playlist to make the photoshoot process more relaxing and fun. 
  • [14:33] How to find a photographer whose work you like, and you feel good about working with. Ask for recommendations. 
  • [18:13] I tell you how to put together a photoshoot inquiry communication that you can email to potential photographers and get a price quote. Everything to include is also in the Photoshoot Planning Guide.
  • [27:14] I'll help you to decide where to do your photoshoot. Hint: Your house with natural light is the best option. 
  • [31:42] I talk about how to find and nail a good pose that fits your personality. This can be very awkward but I've got tips for you to help the process be as painless as possible. 
  • [34:12] I get into all the day-of photoshoot details. We'll talk hair and makeup and how to let those first 15 minutes of awkwardness be what they are and pass by so you can create some beautiful photos. 
  • [40:01] I'll talk about what to do when you get your photos back from your photographer. If they're good and you like who took your photos, I want you to book them to come back and do another photoshoot in the months to come. 
Sep 19, 2019
#280: How to Do a "Course Call" to Validate Your Digital Course Idea with Jamie Trull
54:47

One of the best ways to know if anyone wants to spend time and money on your digital course is to ask them. One of the best ways to ask them is to have a course validation call with your potential customer avatar. These calls are so valuable, because they not only tell you if your course will be in demand, but they tell you exactly what needs to be in the course, the best ways to set it up, and how to market it.

These calls can be intimidating and people are often reluctant to have them, but the  information gleaned is so valuable. Course validation calls are a game changer. In my The Digital Course Academy, I teach you the exact questions to ask in these calls and how to find your ideal customer avatar ICA to have the calls with. This is important, because you want to make sure you have the call with someone who really is your ICA. 

Today’s show has a fun twist, instead of me telling you how to make a course call, I actually make one and let you listen in. It’s true that I already have a course, so this is somewhat of a mock call. But the rest is real. I have a real conversation with Jaime Trull about whether she would be a good candidate for the Digital Course Academy. 

It’s also true that I have never met Jaime before. I do know that she has an online business where she serves female CEOs and entrepreneurs in accounting, bookkeeping, and financials. She is a certified CPA, and she is thinking about creating a digital course. 

You have two goals during the call. Goal #1 is to uncover insights, fears, concerns, challenges, wants, and needs of your ICA. Goal #2 is to determine if your idea is on the right track. During the call, I actually learned some things that I wasn’t expecting. I also ended up giving Jaime a challenge, so this won’t be the last time you hear from her. 

  • [13:52] It's good to know about the background of the person that you are interviewing. Amy asks Jaime to tell her a little bit about her business? Jaime started Balance CFO to have more balance in life. She first helped friends with accounting, now she is focusing on virtual CFO work and financial literacy. Her problem is that one-on-one business is trading dollars for time. 
  • [17:35] Amy zeros in on the problem and asks about how many clients she needs to make the money she wants to make. They talk about scaling, frustrations, time, and revenue goals. Amy asks about Jaime's dream revenue model. 
  • [20:37] Jamie shares that her ideal day would be having more quality time with her kids. 
  • [21:52] Amy asks Jamie about frameworks. She does have a five step process. They also explore how Jamie could help her clients the most. 
  • [24:45] Digital courses have been on Jamie's radar. Obstacles are time and overwhelm with available resources. They also explore course ideas and niches to target.
  • [29:50] Amy asks about elements of courses that Jaime has taken and liked. She also asks about accountability. Jaime likes things broken down into doable steps. She also likes a community for motivation. 
  • [32:30] Amy digs into why Jamie hasn't already bought a course about creating courses. It's a commitment issue for Jamie. 
  • [33:23] Jaime has about 400 people on her list and a Facebook community of 1200. She built her community by going live every week and talking about things people wanted to know. 
  • [36:23] Are there any roadblocks in a course that have or would slow Jaime down? Technology is Jaime's biggest issue, and a clear roadmap with specific options would be best. 
  • [40:05] Where does Jamie spend the most social media time online and what is her focus? Her answer is Facebook, and she loves Rachel Hollis and the Rise groups and entrepreneurial groups. 

This episode is brought to you by: 

The Digital Course Academy sign up now or get on the waiting list. To find out if a digital course is right for you be sure and get The Three Behind the Scenes Secrets to Digital Course Success.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Sep 12, 2019
How Making Wreaths As a Hobby Turned into a Profitable Digital Course with Lauren Kilgore
32:57

I’m so excited to share this digital course success story with you today. 

Lauren Kilgore, a wreath maker extraordinaire and accidental Etsy marketing superstar, turned her part-time hobby into $35k in revenue.

Unbelievable, right?!

Here’s the reason I’m sharing this with you today. We are all good at something that we could teach others how to do. 

For Lauren, it was selling her crafts on Etsy. 

If there is something you’re good at, something that people consistently come to you asking for help with, guess what? You might just be able to create a course around it. 

You don’t need to have it all figured out. Lauren is proof of that.

Tune in to this special bonus episode and find out exactly how a part-time wreath making mama went from making a bit of extra cash with a fun hobby to getting 93 students into her digital course and over five figures in revenue.


Ready to create your own Digital Course success story? Learn how to build, launch and grow a thriving Digital Course business without hiring a big team, the constant overwhelm or the momentum crushing question, "What the heck do I do next?"

Click here to save your seat in my free masterclass, The 3 Behind-the-Scenes Secrets to Digital Course Success!

 
Sep 09, 2019
#279: Should I Create a Digital Course?
33:46

Today I want to help you answer a very important question. 

And that question is… should you create a digital course?

More than likely, my answer to you will be yes.  

Now I know what you’re thinking. What in the world would I create a course on? The market is saturated. There are so many people selling courses online. But I promise that no one is teaching what YOU would teach the way that YOU would teach it. 

So here’s what I want you to do:

Step 1: Listen to this episode and learn about the five main types of profitable digital courses.

Step 2: Take my free quiz and find out which of those types is best for you (or if you should hold off on creating your course for now!).

My team and I put a lot of work (and love) into creating this quiz and I hope it helps you get the clarity you need to take the next step forward. 

Already took the quiz and want to learn more about each course type? Here are the highlights:

  • [08:59] The Workshop Course. This is a two hourish training that promises instant clarity and results. 
  • [15:43] A Starter Course. A jumping-off point to get your students started in your area of expertise. 
  • [19:41] The Spotlight Course. Dives deep into one main area, you’ll help your students produce very specific results in just one area. 
  • [22:36] A Signature Course. A complete comprehensive system, the Mack Daddy of all courses. It’s specific and detailed and includes your entire framework from start to finish.
  • [29:03] The Certification Course. This is as in-depth as it gets. You are teaching others your methodology and process in such a detailed way that they’ll be able to teach it to others. 

Take the Quiz Now!

Sep 05, 2019
#278: Case Study: How an Accidental Course Creator Generated Over $200K with Just One Launch
56:39

Would you believe me if I told you that one of my star students generated well over 6 figures on her very first launch?

Would you believe me if I also told you that student was an elementary school teacher?

How about a mother of five? 

Well, friend, I’m here to tell you that Jamie Sears did just that. It all started when Jamie’s hubby listened to a podcast episode about courses and nudged his wife to have a go at creating one. 

Jamie resisted at first. At that point, she didn’t even have a solid course idea. What really lights me up about this story is that Jamie didn’t let uncertainty or lack of clarity stop her from taking action. She saw the possibilities a course would offer and she moved forward one step at a time. 

Tune and and learn all about…

  • [05:16] The grassroots origins of how Jamie created online resources for her students, and other teachers started asking her for help
  • [07:02] There were so many questions that Jamie felt like she should make a course about writing. Her husband recommended that she join the Digital Course Academy. 
  • [09:38] Jamie went where her students hung out, listened to their questions, and did Facebook Lives when her audience was still small. She kept showing up. 
  • [13:30] Jamie not only got huge results in Digital Course Academy, but she followed the framework and made it her own as she progressed.
  • [15:20] Jamie’s wall of post-its and what her kids helped her see about her course
  • [17:58] How Jamie grew her list by 7000 new subscribers during her launch (without spending a ton on ads)
  • [24:39] Jamie’s mind-blowing pricing and results
  • [27:15] How Jamie got testimonials before her launch was even through
  • [51:01] Don't try to do what everyone else does just go to where your people are already at. 
Aug 29, 2019
Everything is Figureoutable with Marie Forleo
58:06

Marie Forleo has been an inspiration, a friend, and a mentor to me ever since I left corporate and started into the world of online business.

When it comes to business she's seen it all, from humble beginnings offering life coaching for free to being on stage with Oprah (yes, that Oprah). Needless to say, she has accomplished a lot.

Marie feels strongly (and I agree!) that we need more brilliant, creative humans to believe in themselves so that they can go out and make a difference in the world. That was the inspiration that pushed her to write her brand new book, Everything Is Figureoutable.

I recently sat down with Marie to talk about the book and I picked out topics that I thought would be especially helpful for you to hear. Marie held nothing back and shared some gems that I know you're going to love. This episode will have you feeling like everything really is figureoutable.

Here’s a sneak peek of what we covered:

  • How Marie finally decided to write her book (and why she waited, even after being courted by publishers)
  • Listening to that little voice in your head (Marie tells how her mom was the first to teach her about this inner guidance system!)
  • Marie's quick test to determine whether you're acting out of fear or intuition
  • How your beliefs are shaping you (a great model that I've been following for the last year, but Marie takes it even deeper)
  • Calling out your excuses (she explains how a slight change in semantics can be a game-changer in your life and business)
  • What to do when fear creeps in (and you know it will!) 
  • Getting clarity on what you actually want (believe it or not, most people are not crystal clear on what they want to create, but there IS a way to get clear)
  • Avoiding the pitfalls of perfectionism (learn about the severity of the destructiveness of perfectionism)  

You’ve gotta get your hands on Marie’s book, Everything is Figureoutable. Pre-order it now and get the 5-day coaching experience that Marie's offering to all pre-orderers.

 

Aug 27, 2019
#277: 3 BIG Decisions I Wish I Had Made Sooner (and Why You Should Make Them Now)
24:47

Mistakes are a part of life, but in my book the fewer things you have to learn the hard way, the better.

When it comes to sharing my blunders while building an online business, I’m an open book. This is the stuff that I WISH someone would’ve shared with me when I was just getting started. 

There are a lot of mistakes that I’ve made that I’m grateful for. Mistakes that helped me learn pivotal lessons that I wouldn’t trade for the world. But lately, I’ve been reflecting on some of the big decisions that I’m making now that I wish I would have made sooner. 

Wanna know the 3 decisions I wish I’d made sooner in my business?

I’m digging into the details on this week’s podcast episode… here are the highlights:

  • [02:15] The first decision that I waited to make until I was making good money was to hire someone to help me manage it. Plus, I’ll tell you how Hobie and I picked an advisor to help us.
  • [07:00] I waited way too long to grow my team to match the big vision I have. 
  • [13:45] Think about accountability and organizing how your team moves towards your goals.
  • [15:32] I share how I had a false belief that I needed to make tons of money before I set clear boundaries or rituals in my life that would allow me to take off. Boundaries protect yourself, your sanity, and your mindset.
Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Aug 22, 2019
#276: How to Overcome the Most Common Objections When Selling Online
41:27

I’ll never forget my first webinar.

But not for the reasons you might be thinking.

There I was, confident and ready to rock it, when suddenly the objections started pouring in. I felt defeated and disappointed.

I want to save you the pain I experienced on that webinar with today’s episode.

Believe it or not, it’s absolutely not necessary to let objections get the better of you. They’re not scary when you know how to handle them.

When you know what’s holding people back from saying heck yes to your offer, you can address their hesitation head on. You don’t have to tiptoe around it — instead, you can have a conversation.

Here’s a sneak peek at what you’ll learn from this episode: 

  • [05:11] The best place to address objections (hint: it’s not necessarily on your webinar or sales page)
  • [07:32] What to do on the front end of your offer so that common objections never even make an appearance.
  • [11:20] The truth about money objections 
  • [17:11] The key differences between features and benefits
  • [19:09] How to find “tiger” time.
  • [26:35] Marie Forleo’s “I have to talk to my spouse or business partner” script.
  • [29:35] How to get to the root mindset of "I'm not good at xyz." 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Aug 15, 2019
#275: 10 Ways to Get Your Students to the Finish Line
47:22

Research shows that only 1 in 5 people who purchase online courses complete them.

As a course creator, that stat keeps me up at night and more importantly, compels me to take action.

Over the years, I’ve become obsessed with finding ways to beat those odds. And I’m sure if you’re reading this, you want every single person who buys your course to cross that finish line as well.

If you want amazing case studies and testimonials (the best marketing fuel there is), you’ve gotta do everything in your power to not just create the best course you can — but to ensure you’re helping your students get the results they signed up for. 

Now if you’re freaking out reading that, don’t panic. I’ve done a lot of the legwork for you and I’m sharing everything I’ve got today to help you get your students from point A to point B.

Haven’t created your course yet? Even better! Thinking about these strategies before you develop your course puts you ahead of the curve.

So grab your notebook and sharpen your pencil. Even if you implement just 2 or 3 of these ideas it will make such a difference for your students’ success.

  • [10:30] Emails aren’t just for marketing… a solid onboarding email sequence sets the pace and gives clear steps about what to do next. Email weekly with each module and think about where they are in the process. These emails can meet your students right where they are and get them all the way through to that finish line.
  • [16:28] Set clear expectations. Let people know how long it takes to actually implement the concepts. Ask what your students need to know.
  • [20:58] Accountability. You can pair people in your group together to be accountability partners. 
  • [23:49] Create a weekly challenge. Pick an existing area to highlight, don't add more content (aka work).
  • [25:52] Gamification or give awards for completing the challenges. Encourage good behavior and let people know you recognize them. 
  • [28:48] Allow and encourage your students to put their work in Facebook for feedback. Choose a day, once a week, so people can post and ask for feedback. 
  • [31:40] Course structure. Structure your course in a way that isn't overwhelming. Use short videos and frameworks that illustrate what you're teaching. 
  • [35:07] Real time check-ins. Jump on Facebook live or use other resources and give clarity about those places where people are getting stuck. 
  • [37:46] Have weekly Q and A's. As a course creator, you get to decide the length and frequency of your Q and A's. 
  • [39:46] Manage the mindset of your students. Great content isn't enough. Your student's mindset, roadblocks, fears, and negativity need to be addressed. 
  • [43:29] Bonus Strategy - create a bonus that helps students recoup the cost of the course or gets them organized or helps them find the right mindset. 

Here are the basics of our accountability cheat sheet:

  • Meet once a week, same time, same place, online using something like Zoom.
  • Outline three action items you can commit to doing over the next week.
  • Check in on whether or not you did what you said you would do the previous week. 
  • If not, what were the challenges?
  • What’s your game plan to overcome these challenges next week?
  • What do you commit to accomplishing for the next week?

This episode is brought to you by Gravy. If you have a subscription-model business or offer payment plans, like I do for my online courses, Gravy can really cut down on frustration and lost income. After I started working with Gravy I stopped worrying about payment plans. They contact your customers within hours of their failed payments, and they capture updated billing information and save the customer.

Our failed-payment recovery rate increased from 33 percent, when we were trying to do it internally, to over 80 percent, collecting on failed payments. That's a whole lot of saved payments. So if your revenue is currently at $250,000 or more, and you know you're losing money due to failed payment plans each month, I want to encourage you to check out Gravy. The cool thing is Gravy is waiving the setup fee for all of my listeners. 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Aug 08, 2019
#274: 3 The Pre-Launch Facebook Ad Strategy, with Rick Mulready
48:16

On this week’s podcast episode we’re digging into 3 powerful (and surprisingly simple) FB ad strategies designed to fuel your pre-launch fire.  

The pre-launch phase is that crucial 60-90 day period leading UP to your launch that can make a world of difference when it comes to increasing your reach and revenue. If you play your cards right, you’ll find out that launching doesn’t have to be hard, stressful, or time-consuming.

I’m joined by the Regis to my Kathy Lee —  my dear friend and our resident FB and IG ads expert, the one and only Rick Mulready. 

Rick’s been on the podcast before, but today he’s sharing his favorite paid traffic pre-launch tips, including: 

  • How to use FB ads even when you’re on a tight budget and why you SHOULDN’T hire out your ads right away.
  • The power of crafting content around objections and how to do it.
  • The strategy that ensures by the time you open the doors to your webinar, your people are READY to learn from you and hear your offer.

And so much more. Make sure you have your notebook ready!

  • [08:32] What exactly IS the pre-launch period and why it’s so important
  • [12:22] Using video to create value and overcome objections and how best to optimize your ads 
  • [21:30] You can also use video to test target audiences. Right now the more fun and sometimes the sillier or less polished the videos are the better they do. Just make sure to have good sound and lighting. 
  • [25:16] Create a lead magnet that aligns with the launch, provides a quick win, and adds value. This builds trust and rapport. 
  • [28:13] Try for a 90-day or at least 60-day pre-launch where you are building a list of your target audience. Run ads and get people to sign up for your lead magnet before your webinar registration. You can also create a look-alike list of your target audience to run your ad to. 
  • [30:33] Why and when to use pop-up Facebook groups to create engagement and attract an audience for your launch. 
  •  [38:02] How running ads consistently throughout the year will save on your launch costs 
  • [40:11] Bonus strategy: Running a quiz with ads. This gives people a quick win and it's great for segmenting people to attract your ideal audience. Have a well written quiz with a really good ad strategy to go with it. 

This episode is officially sponsored by Rick's program Foundations, which is about getting started with Facebook ads and Instagram ads. It's a really great program. He teaches how to create ad campaigns in both Facebook and Instagram that will build traction and get your launch or list or group off the ground.  

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Aug 01, 2019
#273: How to Build a Self-Managed Team with Theresa Loe
43:17

I never imagined myself having the team I do now. I also can’t imagine subscribing to the old idea of what it means to be a “boss”. 

I've learned a lot about what works and what doesn't when it comes to working with a team, especially with all of the hiring we've been doing over the past few months.

That's why I was so excited to sit down with Team Building and Leadership Coach, Theresa Loe to talk about building a self-managed team.

I truly believe that building a team that’s aligned with your values is one of the secrets to not just building more revenue or success, but to enjoying the process.

If you’re thinking “Amy, I’m so not even close to ready to build a team” — hey, that’s okay! 

But when you are ready (and trust me, one day you will be and it might come sooner than you think) this is the kind of insight I want you to have so you can save yourself from making painful hiring mistakes (trust me, I’ve been there). 

Theresa has cracked the code on how to find, grow, and lead a self-managed team, and she is sharing her best insights today:

  • [11:17] Having a self-managed team means putting yourself in the CEO position and having people under you who are all responsible for their own projects. When you have a great idea the team can execute and make it happen.
  • [13:58] Mindset is the number one strategy for building a self-managed team. Think about what you want your day to look like, and then slowly reverse engineer how to take everything else off of your plate.
  • [18:01] Hire based on attributes. Make sure they are aligned with you, your vision, and your core values. People can be trained on tools but not on character. Write down the attributes that you want then put up a gauntlet to see if applicants have these attributes.
  • [26:43] Hand off responsibilities, not tasks. Make everything a project. Instead of a one-off blog post, make them responsible for content management including scheduling, analytics, and reporting.
  • [29:39] Communication is key. Have a clear description of what "done" means. Be very clear about expectations but nurture your team to make decisions for themselves.
  • [33:18] You can create a feedback loop by recording any changes that you had to make to a project. Empower your team with resources.
  • [35:20] You can start small and hire someone for a few hours a week. You need to look at those freed up hours as gold and use them for money-making activities to free up cash to add more free hours.

This episode is sponsored by my Free Masterclass all about kick-starting your list building efforts. You need to grow your email list every day to have a healthy business. All of the social media posts in the world can't do for you what a viable email list can. 

Jul 25, 2019
#272: My Biggest Regret After 10 Years of Building My Business
50:51

This is one of those super uncomfortable moments when I have to admit…I don’t have it ALL figured out.

Recently, I was at the EntreLeadership live event and Dave Ramsey’s words cut right to my soul. He said, “Organizations are never limited by their opportunity or their team, they are limited by their leader.

And the honest truth is, I regret not putting more focus on being a better leader for my team much sooner than I did.

No one is born with amazing leadership skills. They take years to develop and the earlier you start, the better off you’ll be. 

Because here’s the truth: you can’t build an empire by yourself. 

Eventually, you’ll need to bring people on who stand behind your vision and are just as motivated as you are to achieve it. 

As my business grows and scales, my job is to be a visionary and show up for my team as a leader in a stronger way. I’ve always thought of my students and my business, but now it’s time to focus on creating a bigger stronger team of people who are empowered to make decisions, come up with ideas, and grow with my business.

EntreLeadership was one of the best events I’ve attended. It blew my mind. After it lit a fire under my chair to become a better leader, I knew I had to share my biggest takeaways with you.

I hope you learn from these and implement them into your business right away. Do not pass go, just do it. I promise you won’t regret it.

Here are the main takeaways:

  • [15:00] There’s always room for improvement, no matter how ‘big’ your organization is.
  • [16:12] Takeaway #1: Dave Ramsey shared how organizations are never limited by their team. They are limited by their leader. (This one really hit me in the gut!)
  • [19:38] Takeaway #2: Henry Cloud asked, “Does your team know how you are going to win?” It’s important to define what winning looks like for yourself and then share it with your team. 
  • [23:39] Takeaway #3: Patrick Lencioni dropped a major value bomb when he said that fear of conflict will stifle productivity and keep you playing small. He explained that you’re cutting yourself short if you’re not encouraging your team to show their opinions even when they are challenging. 
  • [32:43] Takeaway #4: Patrick Lencioni also talked about hiring people that are humble, hungry, and smart. He explained that these type of people lack excessive ego, are self-motivated, and use good judgment with people. 
  • [39:32] Takeaway #5: Jesse Itzler shared his motto of “remember tomorrow.” He encourages you to ask yourself how you will feel tomorrow about any decisions that you make today. Listen to learn how I’ve implemented the Full Focus Planner with my team.
  • [43:41] Takeaway #6: Sara Blakely, the creator of Spanx, told the story of her early days in the business where she went above and beyond to educate customers on her product — she would go to the department store and talk to customers. She’s such a good example of never being too proud to get in there and do the work and get your hands dirty. 
  • [48:13] Extra Credit: Write down three things that you would love your team, or your team of the future, to say about your leadership style. I’m doing this exercise too and I wish I would have asked myself this question years ago. Don’t wait. 

Links mentioned in this episode:

 
Jul 18, 2019
#271: How to Create a Profit-Driven Lead Magnet to Boost Sales
40:09

If you’ve been around for a bit, then you know my motto is always be list building. Now, while there are all kinds of list-building strategies, there’s one that's by far the easiest way to grow your email list, and that's by offering a lead magnet.

Through all of my endless list building experiments, I’ve learned how to create incredibly valuable pieces of content, like cheat sheets, guides, and mini-trainings.

But do you know what kind of lead magnet is the best, hands down?

A profit-driven lead magnet.

Now, I know what you're thinking... "Amy, a lead magnet is something I give away for free. What the heck are you talking about when you say 'profit-driven'?"

Here's the deal. Most of the time, when somebody signs up for your email list, they are just not quite ready to buy from you yet. When you create a profit-driven lead magnet, you are creating a tool that leads your new subscriber to a buying decision while also providing incredible value.

With this very intentional strategy, you will be generating revenue faster than you ever thought possible!

In today's episode, I talked about the three main questions you must ask yourself before you create your profit-driven lead magnet, and they are:

  1. What do you currently sell or plan to sell in the future?
  2. What does your ideal customer avatar need to understand, be aware of, or believe in order to want or need your product, program, or service?
  3. What type of lead magnet could I create that will compliment or align with the product, program, or service I currently sell or plan to sell?

I love a good example that illustrates what I'm talking about and I've included the two examples of profit-driven lead magnets that I talked about on the show below.  I hope those will get your creative juices flowing!

Example #1: My Own Lead Magnet, "20 Smart Strategies to Rapidly Grow Your Email List"

Why Example #1 Works:

  • It inspires.
  • It's actionable.
  • The cheat-sheet gives the what, and my course gives the how.

My ideal customer avatar and I are now in a conversation about how I can help them. Now, each week, I can continue the conversation with my ongoing weekly content.

Example #2: Corinne Crabtree's Free Course, "THREE Things You Must Know to Lose Weight"

Why Example #2 Works:

  • She makes it doable.
  • It gets people results (for free).
  • It attracts the right audience.

Corinne meets people right where they're at in their journey. Her course name is simple, clear, and to the point. Right away on the thank you page, she shares her journey in a video (and still directs her audience to check their email for more).

Episode highlights:
  • [06:49] 99% of the people who give you their email address aren't ready to buy. It’s up to you to walk them down that path. Create your lead magnet with your end goal in mind, and your end goal is to attract paying customers.
  • [14:04] Example #1 my lead magnet for List Builder's Society (see image example below).
  • [21:13] Make sure your lead magnet meets the customer/buyer where they are at. Profit-driven lead magnets are very intentional, specific, and sometimes only used for launches. There is a difference between a really good lead magnet and a profit-driven lead magnet.
  • [26:44] Example #2 from Corinne Crabtree (see image example below).

 

Jul 11, 2019
#270: Behind the Scenes with My Better Half, Hobie Porterfield
46:19

Ring the fire alarm because my better half, Mr. Hobie Porterfield, is lighting this place up! I’m super excited to have him back on the show, because I love sharing this side of my life. It may not always be unicorns and rainbows, but it’s pretty special.

Hobie puts fires out for a living, but he also helps me put fires out in my business. If it weren’t for his emotional support, I can’t say I’d be where I am today. He’s my biggest cheerleader, my biggest supporter, and he picks me up when I’m down.

We have learned and grown so much together. I just love having him on the show to share how we juggle laundry, launches, and everything in between as a team. This is an inside look at how we communicate about our needs, managing time and money, and our big goals.

You sent in some amazing questions. We’ll try to answer them, and hopefully, some of the things that we’ve learned and shared will help you not only in your business, but in your relationships as well.

  • [03:15] Hobie does more of the housework, and he likes to rub it in 😉remind me of that.
  • [06:26] Hobie doesn’t mind listening to me talk about my work, because it gives him a connection into my world.
  • [09:25] We sit down multiple times throughout the year and schedule everything
  • [13:39] When it comes to money and investing – getting a financial planner is one of the smartest things you can do.
  • [18:53] Why Hobie doesn’t go to conferences with me
  • [23:52] What would happen if we swapped roles for a day.
  • [25:49] Hobie talks about how he feels about me making more money than him
  • [29:28] How my weight loss has changed how we spend our time
  • [37:47] Hobie shares his amazing proposal plan that didn’t quite work out as planned. We also get a little personal with what annoys each other and how much fun we have.

 

 

Links mentioned in this episode:

 
Jul 04, 2019
#269: Small List Superhero: How To Have A Profitable Launch Without A Big List with Tarzan Kay
45:39
  • “Amy, can I still launch my course if I only have 500 people on my email list?” 

    Ambitious course creators ask me variations of that question at least once a week.

    It’s easy for the size of your list to become one more excuse not to launch.

    My guest today is someone who had a successful launch with a list of 750 subscribers. Tarzan Kay has had not just one but three successful launches with a small list. In this episode, she shares her tips and strategies and walks us through her inspiring launch success.

    Tarzan is a launch strategist and email copywriting expert for online entrepreneurs and digital-course creators. Her specialty is fun-to-read, more-addictive-than-Game-of-Thrones copy for digital-course launches. 

    In her own business, she uses my special webinar framework —shout out to my Digital Course Academy members! In fact, she's used it over and over to sell her own courses, fill her private mastermind, and even had the occasional $100,000 month while working 30 hours per week and being the sole provider for her family of four. 

    I know you’re going to love this episode. Tarzan’s tips are useful for anyone who wants to deepen their relationship with their list, big or small. 

    • [14:33] Start thinking about how you can build relationships with individuals on your list, so they know that you're real and that you are going to deliver for them.
    • [15:45] Launching takes courage. Those who are successful launch through the fear and keep doing it again and again.
    • [16:23] More than revenue comes out of a launch. You get opportunities to speak, be on podcasts, build relationships, partner, and more.
    • [20:12] Tarzan uses a tool called BombBomb to send personalized videos to people who were active on her webinars. She also puts their names on her whiteboard. Email your list weekly and start a conversation. You can even hop on calls with people from your list. 
    • [26:50] Tarzan knows how to speak to the different personality types on her email list… and she breaks it down for us in Game of Thrones characters to make it easy to understand.
    • [32:17] All of your emails won't appeal to everybody, but there is definitely a way to make them appeal to more than one group at once.
    • [35:44] The number of people replying to your email is a great metric to judge whether they liked it or not.
    • [37:01] A nurture sequence comes after a new subscriber has opted in to get your freebie. Put a lot of energy into showing them your personality.

    Click here to listen now!

Jun 27, 2019
#268: LinkedIn Tips and Tricks to Attract a Bigger Audience with Viveka von Rosen
43:50

I get so many questions about LinkedIn. You’ve been asking how to use it for your audience, for list building, and what’s working right now.

I decided to bring in the big guns and invite world-renowned LinkedIn expert Viveka von Rosen on the show. Viveka is the author of LinkedIn Marketing: An Hour a Day and LinkedIn: 101 Ways To Rock Your Personal Brand: Grow your network and build your business!.

She is also a personal branding expert, LinkedIn Learning author, international keynote speaker, and has been recognized as a top LinkedIn and social media expert. She contributes to many major publications and has even been featured on two movies about social media. She is co-founder of Vengreso which provides digital sales solutions.

I’m so glad to have her here today to talk about what is currently working on LinkedIn, strategies for B2C clients, what is coming up with video and LinkedIn Live, and so much more. She even gives us actionable steps to transform our profile to sell in a non-salesy way and use content to nurture and grow relationships.

  • [06:08] Diving deeper is the strategy that worked for Viveka. She was also able to learn the platform inside and out, build relationships, and stay top of mind with her audience.
  • [14:25] You can repurpose blog posts on LinkedIn by clicking on "write an article" and pasting that article in LinkedIn Publisher. Other great ways to repurpose content is to add images to your article, create a PowerPoint presentation, and publish it as a document. Videos can be uploaded as native video or in the soon to be released LinkedIn Live.
  • [16:07] Position yourself as a thought leader. Make your background image about your product and have your summary read like a sales page (but not salesy). Who are you helping? What are their pain points? What is your solution?
  • [21:47] Selling is about being human and relationships. Know your audience and speak to your audience and don't worry about people self-selecting away from you.
  • [27:51] The secret recipe is to share something every day and create a long-form post once a week. For the long-form post use 1200 to 1400 characters and emojis to share something of value. Shoot and upload a relevant video or PDF, PowerPoint, or infographic for 10X the number of views. Use LinkedIn messaging to create a sharing fan club.
  • [33:22] A great way to get access to a B2B prospect is to interview the influencer in that company. This is how Viveca and Vengreso have been able to start the conversation for six- and seven-figure deals.

This episode is brought to you LinkedIn Marketing. If your goal is to target your customers where they're engaging every day and when they're ready to make a buying decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn.

When you advertise on LinkedIn, you're attracting potential customers and fostering relationships that often translate into high-quality leads, website traffic, and higher brand awareness. Go to LinkedIn Marketing to redeem a free $100 LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

 

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jun 20, 2019
#267: Are You Known for Something Specific in Your Biz? If Not, Here’s What to Do
28:58

If you asked your customers or fans what you were known for what would they say?

We’ve all got that special something that we want to be known for. That thing that attracts your customers to you effortlessly and grows your audience with ease.

That “it” factor, what your known for, is the foundation for your positioning.

It’s also the path to increase your profit and purpose.

Over the years I have seen so many people stop themselves from confidently staking their claim on what they want to be known for out of fear of getting put in a box.

The truth is, you can’t create a recognizable brand if you’re not known for something specific. And you can always pivot (just ask me or my girl Marie Forleo).

This episode is dedicated to helping you figure out a game plan for what you want to be known for and how you’ll share that secret sauce with the world.

Listen in to get these five specific ways to get clear on what you’re known for (and more!).

  1. [16:09] Clear messaging. Where do people start with you? Where are they at the beginning of the journey? This is a great place to start the conversation and create a lead magnet. Starting in the right place can lead subscribers down a path.
  2. [18:44] Talk about what you are known for a lot. Weave in these topics into everything that you do and always come back to it. Only talk about your area of expertise and to an audience that is a good fit.
  3. [22:05] Stick with it. You will never be known for something specific if you are constantly dabbling in a bunch of things. You can be passionate about a lot of things but narrow your business down.
  4. [23:42] Don’t be afraid to ask people to share with you what they think you are all about. Ask a couple customers or fans what you are best known for.
  5. [24:32] Consider putting together a framework, method, or blueprint that you can go back to as a foundation. This is probably something that will evolve over time. When you see people gravitating towards it, you know it’s your thing.

Alright, my friend, I hope you’ll take this info and run with it to position yourself for lasting success.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jun 13, 2019
#266: The Little Known (Easier Than You Think) Copywriting Method That Boosts Conversions
30:01

Let’s be honest here. Writing copy can be hard, but it’s an important almost mandatory skill for new business people just starting out. In fact, I wrote all of my own copy my first few years of business, and I suggest that you do the same. Become a student of copywriting. The more you do it, the easier it will become. Today, I’m talking about a technique that will help you build up that oh-so-important relationship with your ideal avatar.

This technique is by Ry Schwartz an expert copywriter who writes a lot of my copy. He also teaches copywriting and my audience loves him. This method is called Coaching the Conversion. It's all about writing copy in a way that will resonate with your ideal customer avatar at a really high level and will meet them right where they're at. It will help them feel as though they know that you see them and you hear them.

I actually think it's important that you write your own copy for the first two years of your business. You need to truly understand your ideal customer. Writing copy for your ideal customer is an intimate experience. It really should begin with you. It will make you a better entrepreneur and a better communicator overall if you take the time to perfect your expertise.

After this episode, you will walk away with golden nuggets that will help you transform your next promotion. I even share one of my best converting ads and break it all down for you step-by-step.

Coaching the Conversion Method in 4 Steps

  1. [10:34] Shift your mindset about how you feel about being a copywriter. Look at copywriting as a means to coach your ideal customer through a transformation by using words that make them feel seen and heard.
  2. [13:47] Know your ideal customer avatar like you know your best friend. Sometimes you have to read between the lines and know-your-customer intimately. Clearly understand their pain points, desires, and what makes them tick.
  3. [17:42] Use their words. It's important that you reflect back to them what they are feeling and what they are saying. Keep a running list of words and phrases that they use. These are pure gold for copywriters.
  4. [19:24] Remember that coaching the conversion walks your potential customer along the path from where they are now to where they could be or where they want to be. The first part of the path is your weekly content then you move on to coaching opportunities inside a webinar. Then send post follow-up emails.

A Concrete Example from One of My Highest Converting Facebook Ads:

How long have you been waiting to finally have the confidence to go all in on building and selling your digital course? Six months a year more. It took me a while to get started to.

I was scared I'd fail, and guess what? I pretty much did. My first course only made me $267, but I stuck with it and 7 courses, 42,000 students, and 8.7 million dollars in revenue later. I've learned a thing or two, and I want to share all that with you. Register for free here (and then I give the link).

 

 

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Jun 06, 2019
#265: What to Do When Your Life (and Biz) Are Out of Balance with Sheri Salata
42:42

Any Oprah fans out there? If you are a diehard Oprah fan like me, then you probably watched Season 25 of Oprah Behind the Scenes, and you probably remember Executive Producer Sheri Salata. She was also co-president of Harpo studios and OWN. I remember watching a scene from that special that showed Sheri waking up in the morning with her bulldogs getting ready to go to the Oprah show, and I thought how does she do it all?

It turns out Sheri has a fascinating story. She had reached the heights of her business career when she decided to reinvent herself and find more balance in her life. She woke up and realized that a career of her dreams wasn’t enough. She set out to reinvent herself with a job and life that are one and live her life to the fullest.

If you have ever felt stuck or in a rut, you will love Sheri’s story of reinvention and using happy as a compass. Sheri is the author of The Beautiful No, the owner of The Pillar Life, and co-host of The Sheri + Nancy Show. This is a powerful episode as Sheri shares her wit and wisdom in a way that only a true storyteller like Sheri can.

  • [08:16] Sheri shares what her life was like as executive producer for Oprah before day one of life after Oprah.
  • [11:13] Sheri had a great story for her book. She started in an entry level position for Oprah at the age of 35. This was the 3rd or 4th time she started over, and she reinvented herself again at age 56.
  • [13:58] You don't know your in a rut until you're out of it. Forcing yourself to jump the track and breathe new air makes life more interesting.
  • [16:28] Sheri had a dream come true career but not a dream come true life. She had to do a serious reckoning with the tenderness of hearts to get to the core of the kind of life she dreamed of.
  • [19:44] At a Shamanic ceremony in the desert, Sheri learned that to start with a fresh page you have to let go and clear the slate.
  • [24:05] Sheri and Nancy built a business around living and doing things for a better life and then reporting back about it.
  • [28:01] Sheri switched her story about working out. She is a storyteller, so she told herself a new story that inspired her using words like power, flexibility, renewal, and recovery.
  • [30:55] Awareness is everything. How not to make misery your compass. When happiness is your compass, you are keenly aware of what feels good. These are clues that your destination is lovely and wonderful.
  • [36:58] The amazing story of how Sheri landed her job at Oprah. You don't want to miss this story! It's also the basis for the title of her book The Beautiful No.

This episode is brought to you by LinkedIn:

LinkedIn is the perfect platform to market your business. Marketing your business is all about reaching the right audience at the right time and connecting with them when your message resonates the most. So, if you want to target your customers where they're engaging everyday and when they're ready to make a decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn.

In fact, four out of five customers who are on LinkedIn are decision makers at their companies. You can see some incredible traction with your LinkedIn ads. If you want to redeem a free $100 dollar LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign on LinkedIn go to LinkedIn.com/Amy.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

May 30, 2019
#264: Is this ONE EXCUSE Sneaking into Your Business and Slowing You Down? (It Might Even Be Hiding!)
26:06

Is there something holding you back in your business? Today, I’m talking about that ONE EXCUSE that may be holding you back from taking that next step that will really propel your business forward. This excuse holds many people back, and they don’t even know it. It’s kind of like a snake in the grass, where you don’t even know it’s there until it slithers up and STOPS you in your tracks.

I’m also going to show you how to identify this excuse in all its many forms and how to breakaway from this cycle with a simple technique that anyone can do. It might not be easy. It might not be comfortable, but being able to take action even when it’s not easy or comfortable is key to progress. Moving forward even when you don’t have all of the answers can get you unstuck and start the positive momentum you need to move the needle forward in your business.

  • [05:09] Not moving forward because you are stuck is an excuse that can take many forms and hold you back.
  • [09:42] The way to get past this is taking imperfect action even when it is messy and uncomfortable.
  • [10:57] How I took imperfect action with my team bonus structure. I approached it like I knew what I was doing and put together a plan to the best of my ability. I NEVER have to start from scratch again. That's what imperfect action does!
  • [16:21] You have to have something to show when you ask for feedback.
  • [18:10] You have to make a decision and produce something. The hardest place to be is starting from scratch. Get beyond this point, even when you don't have all of the answers. That's how to get stuff done!

Links mentioned in this episode:

May 23, 2019
#263: How to Tease Your Digital Course Before You’re Ready to Launch
33:30

You want people ready to buy when you launch your course, but how do you do that? This episode will explain exactly how to be intentional before your launch, so that your customers will be ready to buy when you are ready to sell. You need to start the relationship building early, because people buy from those that they know, like, and trust. I am going to share a powerful marketing strategy that you can use to seed the idea of your course before it is ever launched.

You will be priming the pump in a transparent and authentic way that makes people hungry for what you have to offer. I’m going to give you three powerful tips that you can intentionally use to get your buyers ready and excited to buy from you when you launch. This mini lesson will give you actionable ways to talk about your course in a natural way that doesn’t sound salesy and gets people excited about what you are offering.

  • [06:49] The best way to hit your goals during your launch is to be incredibly intentional before your launch. You want to position yourself as your audience's guide, so they recognize you as their go-to source. This priming period is all about how you show up for your audience.
  • [10:33] Use stories about your journey or your students journey to seed your course. This will make the struggles more real and tangible. Think about your students and where were they, what did they struggle with, what held them back, and what helped them move forward. Understand the difference between a story and a testimonial and use both of them.
  • [15:59] Talk about specific lessons, formulas, frameworks, or strategies that are in your course. I created a framework and then showed how it came to life with a step-by-step of a webinar that made me over three million dollars in one launch. Give names to your lessons and formulas.
  • [20:03] Create exclusivity. You want your non-students to want to be part of your special insider community. Shout outs are a great way to share that you have something special. When people see you talking about it, they want to be part of it. Do it in a loving mindful way.
  • [22:47] Don't be afraid to talk about your course multiple times in multiple ways. Weaving your product into the conversation naturally never sounds salesy. In order to make the seeding strategy work, you have to launch when you say you are going to launch.  

This episode is brought to you by my Free Masterclass all about list building. One of the ways that you can be incredibly intentional when you aren’t launching is to build your email list every single day.

The energy of your business is directly tied to the strength of your email list, and so that’s why you hear me talk about list building so much on my podcast, in my Facebook lives, and in my private Facebook groups and in all my courses. List building is essential to the growth of your online business. Get my Free List Building Masterclass.

Links mentioned in this episode:

May 16, 2019
#262: Feeling Frazzled and Overworked? How to Prioritize What Matters Most with Kate Northrup
53:19

I've been noticing a theme lately and it's the idea of less is more. I have been really busy this first quarter and am looking forward to a season where I can slow down. But to be honest, this scares my entrepreneurial brain. I associate slowing down with achieving less and making less money. In spite of this, I firmly believe in my core that I can do less and still make a huge impact and hit my big goals.

My friend Kate Northrup is someone who did just that. She slowed down and discovered that her earning didn’t decrease. She even discovered that by listening to her body and noticing her seasons, she could get more done by doing less. She even wrote the book Doing Less. The book goes into detail on how to do less, create a bigger impact, make more money, and create space to do those things that matter. This episode is incredibly actionable, incredibly valuable, and you will learn a lot about yourself that you didn't know.

  • [13:27] The 40 hour work week isn't evidence-based and it's not results-based. A 55 hour work week leads to a 33% increased risk in stroke and a 13% increase in risk of coronary disease. A 49 hour week is associated with poor mental health. There is a diminishing rate of return on hours put in.
  • [15:59] Men have a cyclical experience of energy based on their hormones every 24 hours. Women have a cyclical experience of energy based on their hormones every 28 days. Productivity and time management systems assume our lives are based on a 24-hour cycle. We both have the ability to get just as much done, but in slightly different ways. The four phases line up with the energy of the seasons.
  • [21:33] Very few people can be in a state of high concentration for more than 4 or 5 hours a day. Multiple things at the same time makes us miss things and make mistakes. Get clear on your goals. Set a timer for every hour and write down what you were doing. Then ask if they are connected to your result.
  • [34:03] How to map out which tasks should be done and when. Ask yourself how much energy you have as you plan your week and then have 5% to 10% of your activities based on your energy and then get done what you need to get done. Listen to your body and things will work in alignment. Our bodies are our source of energy and creativity.
  • [39:43] Simplify. Ask if things are in flow or in friction. Simplify wherever there is friction. Learn how to get results with the least amount of steps. Find what works for you.
  • [45:37] To do lists can be overwhelming. Make a weekly list instead of a daily list. This gives you grace and space to make things happen. Ask if it NEEDS to be done. Does it need to be done by ME? Does it need to be done NOW?

This episode is brought to you by LinkedIn:

LinkedIn is the perfect platform to market your business. Marketing your business is all about reaching the right audience at the right time and connecting with them when your message resonates the most. So, if you want to target your customers where they're engaging everyday and when they're ready to make a decision, I want you to consider LinkedIn. In fact, four out of five customers who are on LinkedIn are decision makers at their companies. You can see some incredible traction with your LinkedIn ads. If you want to redeem a free $100 dollar LinkedIn ad credit and launch your first campaign on LinkedIn go to LinkedIn.com/Amy.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

May 09, 2019
#261: Membership Site Inspiration: How They Did It
53:14

Have you ever thought about adding a membership site to your business model? How does the idea of recurring revenue in your business sound? Revenue coming in every single month, rain or shine, launch or no launch… Sounds good to me!  

Many of my students are course creators and the idea of adding a membership site on the backend of their course as a way for their customers to continue working with them really does seem to be the next right step in their business.

My students aren’t the only ones getting on the membership site train...In fact, I’m in the process of adding a membership site to my own business and what I’ve learned over the past year about the power of combining memberships and courses is nothing short of revolutionary.

If you tuned in last week, I spoke with the membership site guru himself, Stu McLaren, and we went through the 10 most burning questions about membership sites and boy have we heard from a lot of you of how helpful that episode was and how it has inspired many of you to take that next step.

Well, you know I love a good story, so I wanted to hear from some course creators who added a membership site to their business mix. I wanted to hear the good, the bad and the ugly, straight from their mouths, so I jumped on Facebook Live this week and interviewed three people who’ve added a membership site on the backend of their course as a way for their customers to continue working with them and to be able to receive the post-course support that is so important to their continued success.

You’re going to love hearing from these three rockstar entrepreneurs and believe me, they have the results to prove that memberships and courses go together like peanut butter and jelly.

So let me tell you a little bit about each of my guests. They’re in completely different industries but they all have one thing in common…they have successfully combined their courses with memberships.

 

Listen to your students when they tell you they want more of you...

Jamie Swanson is a busy mama of six who teaches other photographers how to work with entrepreneurs and influencers who need a steady stream of images to grow their personal brand. Her course teaches photographers how to pivot their business from whatever type of photography they’ve been doing before, maybe family portraits, weddings, etc.) to this new hot market for personal brand photography. After finishing Jamie’s course, her students were constantly asking how they could continue working with her. She knew a membership site would serve them best. Listen in as Jamie shares her biggest fears about opening up a membership site (hello, content treadmill!), how she’s embraced a simple model that her students love and her whopping conversion rate when she opened up her membership site to her existing students.  

 

Think your course is too niched for a membership site?

Think again! Jesse Mencia teaches hand-lettering to Spanish speaking women, as well as how they can turn their hobby of hand-lettering into a business by selling their beautiful products. Jesse started with a six-week course, but quickly saw the need for continued support after her students finished up her course. Once again, her students wanted more and they were willing to pay. Listen in as Jesse shares her inspiring story.    

 

From rock solid copywriting foundation to confident business building...

Belinda is a copywriter who teaches aspiring copywriters how to gain confidence in working with clients, hone their craft and build thriving copywriting businesses. Now, listen carefully because we’ve got a theme going on here...Belinda’s students, like both Jamie and Jesse, told her they wanted more from her. When they gained confidence in their copywriting from her course, the next right step was to learn how to build and scale their businesses, and that’s where her membership site came in. Listen in as Belinda shares how she runs her membership site and how she’s adding some new promotional strategies to the mix.

Each of these ladies has had great success and they all golden insights to share, such as…

  • How to batch 10 weeks of content in one four hour block
  • How to share your membership with your course students
  • How a membership site helps your best students to get greater results

If you’re curious about how you can combine a membership with your course, you won’t want to miss this episode!

And if you want more of the secrets that have helped these ladies succeed, you’ll want to sign up for my dear friend Stu McLaren’s FREE workshop, Recurring Revolution.

Sign up here!

May 02, 2019
#260: All About Membership Sites: Your Top 10 Burning Questions with Stu McLaren Email
01:15:04

So many of you have asked me questions about setting up a membership site so you could serve your audience in a bigger and deeper way. Well, I thought I better bring in someone who knows membership sites in and out, and directly ask him your burning questions, all about membership sites. I like to call Stu McLaren the Membership Man. He is, hands down, the go-to source for all things membership.     

In 2008, Stu knew something had to give. He was burning the candle at both ends providing one-on-one services to clients. While his business would be seen as successful by most because the money was there, he was trading time for dollars and this was not the answer to where he saw his future. Especially one with kids in it, like he and his wife were hoping for.   

Long story short, Stu decided he needed a new business model to take what he was already doing and share it in a more leveraged way -- a model that included recurring revenue. Upon the suggestion from a friend and business mentor, he started a membership site. Not only did he create a membership site for himself, but he saw a need for a tool for implementing a membership site, so he set out and created one.

Throughout his time working with the 70,000 clients who flocked to use WishList Member, the membership software platform Stu created, he learned a lot about what worked and what didn’t when it came to creating a membership site and he joined me on my podcast today to share all of that wisdom.

Here’s a snapshot of what we covered in our chat where I asked him the 10 most burning questions that you, my listener, asked:

We covered…

  • The difference between a membership site and a course
  • What kind of content you need to have inside your course
  • How to manage the content creation process
  • Pricing your membership site
  • Launch strategies and options for membership sites
  • Having your course as a prerequisite for you membership site
  • Launching with webinars
  • Incentivizing members to join

Bottom line, almost any business can benefit from having some type of membership site. And it doesn’t have to be a lot of work to invite members in, or to create content every month. The beauty of a membership site is that you get to leverage your knowledge with the content you provide and the recurring revenue that a membership will bring to your business.  

Here are some of the highlights from this episode:

  • [8:23] Question #1…  the main difference between a membership site and a course
  • [22:04] The Four Primary Pieces of Content you need for your membership site every month
  • [26:40] You Don’t Have to Do It Alone - What Inspired John Gallagher, founder of HerbMentor to facilitate a tribe of experts. The content does not have to fall on your shoulders.
  • [28:39] How to decide what content to release and when to your new members (and how to simplify)
  • [31:49] Pricing your membership site and the important distinctions between offering membership first or your course first
  • [37:09] What you MUST know about pricing your membership site
  • [40:22] Open or closed launching, and how Jennifer Allwood scaled her membership site from 700 members in three years to 1,200 new members in 5 DAYS
  • [47:12] The secret to the ONE and only ad that made Stu buy (and how you can apply it to your membership site)
  • [51:37] How Nicholas Wilton recruited 180 members from a single webinar before he had even created his membership site
  • [57:48] Paint Store Owners, Fitness Experts, Dog Trainers, and other surprising examples of membership site founders
  • [1:00] The misconceptions you don’t need to buy into

Stu brought so many great insights ton how to make a membership site work for you. This was truly one of my favorite episodes of the podcast.

And there’s so much more where that came from! If you’re wondering whether a membership site can work for you, or wanting to know how to grow your existing site, I highly encourage you to join Stu’s free workshop by visiting amyporterfield.com/stu.

Join us both and listen to the episode now!

This episode is brought to you by Tribe. Join the free TRIBE Workshop today and learn how to Turn What You Already Know, Love, And Do Into A Successful Membership Business.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Apr 25, 2019
#259: 7 Secrets to Talking About Your Product Like a Pro
37:23

One of the best ways to sell your product is to get out there and tell people about it. This isn’t always easy! After this episode, you’re going to be armed with strategies to confidently talk about your product like a pro.

After an exhausting launch, I found myself mindlessly flipping through channels and stumbled upon an infomercial for Bye Bye Foundation with IT Cosmetics founder Jamie Lima. This is a woman who knows how to SELL her product to the tune of millions and millions of dollars.

I noticed that Jamie talks about her product in a very specific way. The words she was using… the way she repeats herself… it was like magic! She was seamlessly talking about her product the way I’d like to talk about my own programs while on webinars and Facebook Lives.

I began studying her work and really paying attention. I discovered that she has very specific strategies for talking about her product, so I broke those down for you in this episode. I also give you some tips and tricks to apply Jamie’s expert strategies when talkinb about your own products.

Grab your free cheat sheet here!

The Seven Secrets for Talking About Your Product Like a Pro:

  • [06:51] Solidify your verbal tagline. A verbal tagline is something that you say over and over again. Create an inspirational or motivational tagline that talks about your product.
  • [10:34] Tell what it is. You’ve got to be clear on exactly what it is you’re selling. It may seem obvious to you, but it may not be to your potential customer. You want to highlight what is most important about your product, program or service through the use of very concise phrases or words.
  • [13:58] Tell what it's not. You just need one or two sentences of what your product is not. Find one or two things that you know your audience doesn't want because that allows you to then move into what it IS in an inspirational way. This contrast can be very powerful.
  • [16:08] Tell why it's unique. There are likely multiple ways your product, program or service is unique, but it’s important to highlight ONE specific way it’s very unique to set you apart from your competition.
  • [20:37] Identify a few core themes. Come up with verbal themes. Jamie uses the words “different” and “deserve” a lot as her theme words. A theme word I use when I talk about my programs is “doable”. It’s important to have some themes that are constant when talking about your product, program or service.
  • [26:09] Future pace with an intentional one-liner. Future pacing by beginning a sentence with “Imagine…” will help your potential customer look at what’s possible, or what’s ahead for them. You want them to get excited and future pacing will help them to envision a better future for themselves if they purchase your product, program or service.
  • [28:23] Choose testimonials that speak to all of the above. When getting testimonials from your customers, make sure to ask the right questions to get authentic answers that talk about your product in a way that mirrors how you talk about your product.

I've created a cheat sheet that will walk you through these seven secrets in detail but will also prompt you to create each of these snippets on your own so that you have them when you go into your next promotion. Grab the cheat sheet here!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Apr 18, 2019
#258: Achieve More While Doing Less with Michael Hyatt
54:23

As entrepreneurs, we’re driven by our passion and ideas. There is never a lack of projects and things that need to get done. Even worse, we often jump from one task to the next as we try to get caught up with our endless list.

Does it seem like you never have enough time in the day to get the important stuff done? Are you frantically trying to whittle down that endless list? We all get caught up in this cycle. That’s why I’m so excited to have Michael Hyatt back on the show.

Michael says:

“It's almost impossible to accomplish anything significant when you're racing through an endless litany of tasks and emergencies. And yet, this is how many of us spend our days, our weeks, months, years, sometimes our entire lives.”

Michael operated like this for years when he was an overworked and stressed executive at Thomas Nelson Publishers. Michael, now on the other side of this unsustainable and unhealthy work pattern, has cracked the code on a system of productivity and focus that is designed to help you avoid burnout in your business.  

Michael was tired of working harder and accomplishing less. It’s FOCUS that drives our businesses and our personal lives. In this episode, Michael shares the principles from his new book Free to Focus: A Total Productivity System to Achieve More by Doing Less, so we can accomplish what matters.  

The Free to Focus System:

  • [07:34] Productivity is really about freedom. Freedom is a BIG reason people get into business. The book covers four freedoms: The freedom to focus. We need sustained focus and concentration. The freedom to be present. This is the freedom to be 100% present with whoever you are with. The freedom to be spontaneous, and the freedom to do nothing.
  • [12:12] There are also three phases to Freedom to Focus. They are Stop, Cut, and Act. The first three chapters focus on Stop. First, you need to formulate a vision of a more productive future. Then evaluate the work you are doing using the freedom compass. And always rejuvenate and take time for self-care. Formulate, evaluate, and rejuvenate.
  • [14:22] Using the Freedom Compass:
    • True North is where passion and proficiency come together.
    • South is the drudgery zone. Things your not passionate about or proficient in.
    • East is the disinterest zone. Things you are good at but not passionate about.
    • West is the distraction zone. Things you enjoy doing but aren’t good at.
  • [18:11] Things on your freedom compass that you love and are good at are in your desire zone. This is where you should focus the bulk of your energy. Eliminate, automate, or delegate everything that's not in the desire zone.
  • [30:41] Michael plays mythbuster to the objections that entrepreneurs have about delegation. Hiring a VA enables you to repurpose time for more valuable activities.
  • [35:46] Act also has three steps. They are consolidate, designate, and activate. To consolidate avoid context switching and batch activities.
  • [38:53] Designate is designing your year by identifying three goals for your quarter, week, and each day. Imagine how powerful your days would be if you accomplish three important things on a daily basis.
  • [43:00] Activate is about managing the interruptions. Check in before going into a deep work session, so you won't be interrupted. Turn off notifications. Let technology serve you.
  • Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I’d be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Links mentioned in this episode:

Apr 11, 2019
#257: How to Sell More by Offering Less
43:06

Are you making it as easy as possible for your followers to buy from you? Is it possible to put out too much content? Many of us, myself included, struggle with thinking more is more when it comes to the products, services, and programs that we offer our potential customers.

It may seem counterintuitive, but offering MORE can actually make people click away!

Giving people too many options can cause decision fatigue and your potential customer will click away from your blog or video without signing up or purchasing from you.

We’re living in an age with options everywhere. If it takes too much brain power for someone to decide on something, they're out. It's your job to make it as easy as possible for your followers to make a decision. Your audience will be much more apt to buy if you present them with less offers that are better quality,

In this episode, I help you determine the fine line of less is more when it comes to content. Did you know that a person is less likely to buy if given too many choices? I’ve got a study to prove it to you.

I’ll also help you understand why it’s important to have flow, and a clear beginning, middle, and end. Want to become a go-to guide in your field? I’ve got that covered, too.

These three foolproof steps will help you narrow down the options that you present to your audience:

  1. Listen to your customers. Be intentional about hearing what your customers are asking for. If you listen closely, your audience will tell you exactly what they want.
  2. Carefully watch your audience's behavior. Where do conversions take place? Where can you narrow down your options?
  3. You cannot fear pivoting when necessary. Notice patterns and trends with your audience and do more of what’s working and cut out what’s not working.

Your next clear step: Have a 15-minute brainstorming session and write down what you offer. Ask these questions. Does it feel like too much? Is it clear?

Click here to listen now!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Apr 04, 2019
#256: The Forgotten Funnel: Increase Customer Value Without Selling More
50:32

“New customers are good, but existing customers are better.” - Casey Graham

Did you know it takes five times as much to attract a new customer as it does to keep an existing one? Five times!

Most businesses put a huge focus on getting NEW customers (which is important), but where they’re missing the mark is by not equally nurturing the EXISTING customers that they do have.

On today’s podcast episode I talk to Casey Graham, founder of Gravy, the company that helps entrepreneurs and business owners (including myself) solve the problem of failed payments and credit card declines in their business. Why did I bring him on? Because he’s an incredibly smart and strategic business owner who knows how to create profitable businesses - he’s built several from the ground up and is a master at growing thriving teams that wow their customers on a daily basis.

Casey says that f you were to increase keeping your existing customers who are paying you by 5%, you could increase your profits by 25-95%, depending on your type of business. That’s a game-changer, my friend!  

As a business owner, you’ve got to develop a customer-centric business and this episode is going to give you a roadmap to do just that as Casey drills down on the 5 non-negotiables of setting up a stellar system of customer care (aka the forgotten funnel) in your business.

  • Person - define who you are (the owner/leader of your organization) and who you are serving (your customers)
  • People - how is your team (or you) set up to serve your customers?
  • Process - how are you intentionally valuing your customers before you ask for more value?
  • Product - what’s your product value ladder to continue to serve customers?
  • Profit - what are you doing to reduce churn and close the back door? 

You’re going to be able to walk away today with some simple strategies that you can incorporate into your business immediately that will literally change how your customers see you and most importantly how they feel about you on a daily basis.

This episode is brought to you by Gravy, the company I trust to contact my customers within hours of a failed payment, capturing the updated billing information, and saving the customer my team and I worked so hard to acquire. If your revenue is currently at $250K or more a year and you know you’re losing money due to failed payments each month, I encourage you to check out Gravy. Click here to see how they can be an extension of your customer service and save you money.  

SUBSCRIBE & REVIEW IN ITUNES

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!  

Mar 28, 2019
#255: What's Keeping You Safe Is What's Keeping You Stuck
34:36

What’s keeping you stuck? Are you in an unfulfilling 9-5 job that you’re dying to get out of? Maybe your side hustle is not progressing along fast enough. Is the business model you created just not feeling right? Or maybe you’ve been at it for a while and your revenue numbers just aren’t where you want them to be. No matter what it is, if you’re feeling stuck in any area of your business, that needs to stop and today’s episode is going to help.  

We will explore the four areas that are likely keeping you stuck and my goal is for you to recognize what these areas are so you can formulate a plan to start moving forward in the direction you want to go.

Following are the four areas I’ll discuss in this episode to keep you moving forward:

  1. Understanding what your safety blanket is and how it’s likely holding you back. Safe can be a good thing, but that’s not always the case in your business and I’ll explain why.  
  2. Which of your own expectations are holding you back? Setting expectations for yourself are good, but you’ve got to ground those expectations in goals and processes to get you to that goal.
  3. How to get clear on the systems that are necessary to get the results you want. I’ll share an excerpt from a book I’m reading now that has totally rocked my world when it comes to goal setting. I’ll walk you through the new mindset shift I’ve created that is going to help me to reach my impossible goal.  
  4. Why it’s important to fuel your brain by doing something different. Inspiration can come in many different packages, and expanding your horizons in what you read, listen to, and watch can get you right out of the creative rut you may be in.

Are you ready to move past the feelings of being stuck or unfulfilled? Let’s do this!  Press play to listen in.  

This episode is brought to you by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan. My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm).  
If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you.

Mar 21, 2019
#254: From Crippling Excuses to Empowered Action with Rachel Holllis
57:39

Rachel Hollis is in the house!! Literally, she came to my house and we sat in my studio for this interview! I normally do my interviews via Skype or Zoom, so the in-person interview was both nerve-wracking and super fun! I think you’ll love listening to this episode.

Rachel, who in case you aren’t familiar with, is a #1 New York Times best-selling author of Girl, Wash Your Face, she’s got a new book that’s now out, Girl, Stop Apologizing. She’s a motivational speaker, a top-rated podcast host -- and, oh yeah, she’s got four kids! This woman is a powerhouse and she brought her A-game today.

During the interview, we talk about Rachel’s new book, Girl, Stop Apologizing. The book’s subtitle is A Shame-Free Plan for Embracing and Achieving Your Goals -- let me tell you, this book is super tactical when it comes to setting and achieving your goals, but the way Rachel delivers her message through her gift of story-telling, her wonderful sense of humor, and her no-nonsense belief that if you have a dream, you CAN make it happen. I just know this is going to be one of your favorite reads!

Alright, I want you to pop those earbuds in and  listen right away, but if you want a sneak peek of what we talk about during the interview, here you go:

  • I asked Rachel what she thinks about the minute she opens her eyes in the morning. I just loved her honesty: tired and anxious. She talks about the season she’s in right now and talks about how she gets herself moving and in a better state.
  • We talk about being people pleasers and worrying about what people think about us. Rachel is very much in the public eye, so she’s got really great insight on this struggle that so many of us deal with.
  • Rachel addresses two common excuses so many of us use (I hand-picked these two from the several she talks about in her book specifically for you, because I hear these same excuses from my audience all the time): “I don’t have enough time.” and “I’m not enough to succeed.”  
  • We talk about the simple 5 to Thrive model that Rachel says has literally changed her personal and professional life. It’s so simple, yet so powerful!
  • Rachel talks about why you MUST choose ONE dream to pursue in order to achieve the traction that is necessary to achieve your goals. She has the best analogy to explain why you shouldn’t be focusing your efforts on too many things at once.    
  • Some people wonder how Rachel did it. They call her an “overnight success”. She debunks that myth right off the bat and drops some truth bombs in the process.  
  • Rachel talks about how she built her following (she has over 1 million on Instagram alone!) by getting to know her Ideal Customer Avatar (ICA). She tells how this quote she heard over 10 years ago, “Follow the signs of life,” helped guide her in really getting to know her ICA and use that to monetize her business.

You guys, there is so much value, inspiration and tactical advise to living the life that you dream of AND you deserve. Don’t wait another minute, click here to listen in to my interview with the one and only, Rachel Hollis!

This episode is sponsored by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan”. My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you.

LINKS:

SUBSCRIBE & REVIEW IN ITUNES

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!  

Mar 14, 2019
#253: How to Grow Your Local Business with Online Marketing Strategies
50:00

I’m often asked if the strategies used for online marketing can be translated to the local business. Maybe you have a hair salon, a dance studio, a wine shop, a real estate agency, a pet grooming business… The question is, how can we take the information I talk about list building, lead magnets, funnels, social media strategy and all the other topics that come up and use them effectively to get more customers through your physical storefront?  

Since I’m not an expert in this area, I brought in someone who is. My guest on the podcast today is Stacy Tuschl, the creator of She’s Building Her Empire Podcast & Community where she helps female entrepreneurs automate their businesses so they can do more with less. She’s also a best-selling author AND has two dance studios in Milwaukee, WI grossing over one million dollars per year!  

You’ll love Stacy’s teaching style: she’s very specific and gives lots of examples and actionable steps for you to take right away. This interview is great for those of you with a brick and mortar business, but even if you are in the online space only, you will learn a ton.

Here’s a breakdown of what we discussed:

 

  • The most common struggle that brick and mortar businesses face and how to overcome that struggle and bring more customers in the door
  • The three funnels that convert very well (we’ve got a great freebie to walk you through these funnels, too. Just click here to grab it!)

 

  • Get them in your building Funnel
  • Education Funnel
  • Upsell Funnel

 

  • What you need to consider as far as what to include on your opt-in and thank you pages, funnel content and number of emails included in each. This can be very different from the typical online marketing funnels.
  • Tips and strategies for getting lots of honest online reviews from your customers. Stacy got 60 reviews in one week!
  • The 3 Ts of Success (These are simple strategies, but so very valuable. And these will hold true whether you’re an online marketer or brick-and-mortar.)
  • What you need to know (and not know) about your competition. Wondering if you should use Google ad words, Yelp, Facebook ads? Stacy’s got some great insight for you on this.  
  • The importance of claiming your Google listing.
  • How to leverage social media as a brick and mortar business (P.S. A small social media following is ok!)
  • And as a bonus, Stacy shares some great online tips for hiring new employees for your local business.

You guys, my chat with Stacy was 100% filled with useful strategies and tips! I can’t wait for you to listen. You’re going to walk away with specific things you can implement immediately to help grow your business.  Click here to listen in now!

This episode is brought to you by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan. My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you’re struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you. Click here to sign up!

SUBSCRIBE & REVIEW IN ITUNES

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!  

Mar 07, 2019
#252: The 3 Little Known "Personal Touchpoints" I Added to My Recent Launch
33:33

My team and I just finished up with the launch of my new course, Digital Course Academy, and I want to share some new strategies I used that really resonated with my audience and resulted in a big boost in sales conversions.

The three strategies all focus on personalization and are something that you will easily be able to replicate in your own launch.  

Live launch personalization is more important than ever, especially when people are used to canned responses and bots. Having direct communication from a human is next-level when it comes to customer service these days. When you incorporate personal touches to your launch, you are helping your prospective customers to be able to decide whether they want to purchase your program, product or service.

Here are the three personal touches that I go over in today’s episode will be game-changers for your next live launch:

Personalization #1: Recording Audio Messages Via Snagit
Learn how I used Snagit, the quick and easy screen capture and/or recorder application, to provide personalized customer service messages that really wowed my audience. I also mention how I’ve recently been introduced and have begun using Loom to handle the same task.

Personalization #2: Live Sales Page Chat With Olark
Learn how I used Olark, to provide stellar live sales page chat during my launch. This tool will allow you to answer real-time questions, in-the-moment from your potential customers when they’re making the buying decision. When handled right, these conversations will significantly increase your conversions. These prompt, “real-time” conversations are priceless. Whether it’s you in there or someone on your team that’s very familiar with your content, make sure to set up a system for live chat support during your next live launch.

Personalization #3: Recording an Off the Cuff, From the Heart, Final Video
This is a video to record in real-time and send out on the final day when you’re closing the doors for people to be able to purchase your program, product, or service. I’ll tell you what to include in the email to deliver the video (the subject line and body copy) and what you should say in the video. The timing of recording this video is critical because you want to be feeling all the emotions that you will have on that last day. You will be coming in raw, honest, and extremely helpful with this last bit of communication to your prospective customer.

There you have it! I’ve shared my secrets and I hope you take what worked well for me and incorporate these strategies in your next live launch. Believe me, you will never be sorry for adding these personal touches.

Click here to listen now!  

This episode is brought to you by:

SUBSCRIBE & REVIEW IN ITUNES

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!  

 

Feb 28, 2019
#251: How I'd Grow My Business If I Were Starting From Scratch
45:48

I was thinking about you, my listener, the other day and thought, “What can I give to them that would help them most in their businesses right where they are today.” This is my tenth year of business in the online marketing space, and I have learned a lot. Ups and downs, successes and failures...and through it all, I learned invaluable lessons along the way. I’m going to take that ten years of learning and share it with you in today’s podcast episode.  

Specifically, I’m going to share what I would have done differently were I starting from scratch today. Now, this is not only for those newbies out there. There are many foundational principles that even the most seasoned entrepreneur can learn from to ensure you are a building a business that is sustainable. I know I’m still learning as I go along, so I hope today’s episode will help you wherever you are in your business journey.

Here are the areas  
  • Where I Would Spend My Money

I’ll be talking about the must-have tools I use in my business, as well as how to choose the right personal development investment that will serve you best.

  • What I Would Focus On The Most (especially in the first two years)

Don’t do what I did in my first two years of business. You MUST create original content consistently AND know who you’re talking to. Too many overcomplicate this process and I’ll share how to keep it simple to move your business forward in a powerful way. I’ll also discuss the importance of knowing and declaring exactly HOW you want to make money in your business.    

  • What I Would Say Yes To More Often

What I talk about here would have looked very different five and ten years ago. This will be the same for you because the business you have today will look dramatically look different just a few years from now. You will make choices today that you won’t make years from now because your business will be different.

  • What I Would Say No To More Often

You may be surprised by some of what I discuss here, but please, please heed my advice here. Your time is valuable and there are some things that may look good but are not good for growing your business.   

  • The Mindset Shift I Would Make Early On

With so much noise in the online world, there is one key mindset shift that will be invaluable for you personally and in your business. It’s all about asking yourself higher value questions. I’ve got a worksheet for you with some great examples to get you going.

  • The Habits I Would Adopt Early On - Habits That Would Shape My Identity

Establishing good habits in your life will be a game-changer! Your level of success is directly tied to how you show up on a daily basis, and creating habits is the key.

I think this episode is going to be really helpful to you in your journey, so take a listen and use the lessons I’ve learned over the past 10 years as a shortcut to your success.  

 

Feb 21, 2019
#250: How to Create a 3-Month Content Calendar (The Step-by-Step Process)
34:10

You’ve heard it before, right? Content is KING.

That is certainly true and I’ll be the first to tell you that the quality and consistency of your content directly correlate to the growth of your email list AND your bank account.

The operative word in that last sentence was consistency. Without consistency when it comes to your content creation, content is not king.

You probably know that I just recently launched my new course, Digital Course Academy, and I can guarantee that if you ask any of my students what the ONE thing that I’m a stickler about...they will tell you that I want them creating consistent content on a weekly basis.

The reason why I’m such a stickler about this is that In order for you to have a thriving online business, you’ve got to create consistent content in order to attract your tribe. Once you’ve attracted your tribe and they’re paying attention, that’s when you build the “know, like, and trust” factor. And once they know, like, and trust you, they will likely buy from you.

Creating consistent content on a weekly basis is NOT always easy and it takes time, however, it’s a clear step that, should you commit to, will pay dividends in the success of your business.

The question is: how do you make sure this weekly content gets done?

You create a content plan. And I can help you with that!

In fact, in this episode, I go over these three things:

  1. A foolproof plan to create consistent content, that will leave you feeling confident, excited and inspired
  2. My top 5 favorite ways to choose topics that your Ideal Customer Avatar will want to eat up immediately (You’re going to find these VERY useful!)
  3. I’ll tell you all about the 3-Month Content Calendar Template I created for you to keep all your content organized. I’ve got it all laid out in a spreadsheet that you can take and make your own. All you have to do is follow the prompts and fill in the blanks and you’ll be good to go! You can download the calendar here.

Click here to listen to the episode now.

 

Feb 14, 2019
#249: The Seven Biggest Fears That Stop People From Building An Online Business with Marie Forleo
51:04

Having fear is a natural part of running a business. The key is to not let those fears stop you from doing the work that you were created to do. But what do you do when those fears threaten to throw you off your game or derail you completely? You take action and keep moving forward, but sometimes you need a little inspiration to keep you going.  

In this episode, my friend Marie Forleo (entrepreneur extraordinaire) and I are going to share the seven biggest fears that we have personally struggled with and overcome. Our intention is to pull back the curtain to show that some of the very things you may be experiencing now may be obstacles, but they are not insurmountable.

This is my 10th year of running an online business and Marie is in her 20th year! We’ve seen it all and experienced ALL the fears (and still do!), so come along and let’s see if we can provide some helpful insight for you and your business!     

To give you an extra dose of inspiration, I asked Marie to also share stories of her B-School students and how they, too, faced similar fears and what they did to work through them to build thriving, profitable and successful online businesses. You’re going to learn so many valuable tips and tricks that will help you navigate through similar fears when they come up in your own business.   

Here’s a rundown of the 7 fears we discuss in the episode:

  1. I don’t have an email list. How in the world can I start a business without one?
  2. I don’t have enough skills to make an online business work.
  3. It’s all been done before. My market is saturated with people doing what I want to do.
  4. I’m too old to be starting a business online.
  5. I want to do something different than I’ve been doing for the last 5, 10 or 20 years, but I’m not sure how to start over.
  6. I can’t figure out all the tech that’s needed to get my business up and running.
  7. I am overwhelmed...it’s just too much.

We’ll also talk about Marie’s free online business building workshop that she just released in which she’ll teach you The 6 Pillars of Building an Online Business. Marie has a tremendous gift for breaking things down to simple and understandable next steps, so you do not want to miss being in this free workshop.  

The first video in the workshop series goes live today and you are going to get so much value. You can find it at AmyPorterfield.com/Marie. Don’t wait, because the series will only be available for a limited time.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Feb 07, 2019
#248: How I Built My Business
47:37

You asked some tough questions, and today I’ve got answers!

I recently put out a post on Instagram to all of you, asking: What would you like to know about how I built my business?

The response was amazing! You all sent in SO many questions and today, I’m going to answer 10 of them.

I tried picking topics that I haven’t covered all that much on previous episodes, and that would resonate with as many as you as possible.

Here are those 10 questions:

#1: If you burned it all down & started over, what are the first 3 things you’d focus on & do now? (This one was a super timely one!)

#2: What did you do when your email list was TINY? I mean less than 100, like mine 😅. How did you interact with your small community? (It all started with me underpromising, and overdelivering…)

#3: When you have multiple awesome projects you’re working on, how do you prioritize? (Shout out to my project management tool, Asana!)

#4: In hindsight, what is one thing you wish you would have done sooner? (If you’re a loyal listener, you know the painful answer to this one!)

#5: How do you set boundaries for quality family time and one on one time? (I need to be open and honest: I work on this every single day.)

#6: Have you veered off course and how did you know when to get back on course or go ahead in that different direction? (So I’ve never been big on chasing shiny objects, but I also get too comfortable sometimes…)

#7: How did you originally grow your podcast audience? What specifically did you leverage? Or was it purely organic? (I would say it was about two years before the podcast was doing amazing things.)

#8: Apart from weekly consistent content what moved the success needle for you? (This one was REALLY hard for me at first…)

#9: What do you do in the moments when you doubt yourself? (For me, I just keep doing…)

#10: Which mentor do you credit for making the biggest impact in creating the biz you ❤️ today? (A little tribute to my mom and dad, and how I got the best of both worlds.)

I really hope this episode proves valuable to you. I’m sharing a little bit of what’s in my secret sauce, and I and my wish is that it inspires you to kick butt in your business.

Don’t forget to check out the links at the bottom of this page. I couldn’t get to all of the questions, so I’ve listed some resource podcasts down below as an additional tool for you!

Now, let’s dive in! Let’s get your burning questions answered!

This episode is sponsored by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan: My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Jan 31, 2019
#247: Why I've Agreed to Fail 100 Times in 12 Months
38:10

I’m setting very specific goals this year, and one of them, is to epically fail. Again and again.

I know that sounds crazy—but hear me out.

You all have shared with me how you’ve struggled with the fears and confusion of building an online business. I started this podcast by sharing marketing strategies and step-by-step details to get things done—build a list, create a digital course, launch webinars, you get it.

BUT because you guys have asked me for more and have asked me about the mentality I use to run my business, I’m going to share with you how I’m setting goals for the New Year.

These are some behind-the-scenes details of where I’m going with my business. I’m also going to invite you into my personal world a bit.

I’ve set about 10 goals for the year, and in today’s episode, I’m going to share four of them with you. My:

  1.     Impossible Goal
  2.     Business Goal
  3.     Health-Related Goal, and
  4.     Personal Growth Goal

I’m also sharing the three things I’m going to do to ensure my goals stick.

I’m sure you’re wondering where the epic fails fit in, right?

As I start working toward my Impossible Goal, I’m going to write out 25 Epic Fails for each quarter—that’s 100 for the year. These are the crazy things, that will probably lead to a fail, that will get me closer to my goal. You’ve got to be willing to do whatever it takes, even if that means fail, in order to get what you really want, right?

My hope for you is that by the end of this episode, you’re ready to lock in your goals for the year and be inspired to fail with me.

Are you ready to be a goal-getter in 2019? Hit play now.

This episode is brought to you by Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Jan 24, 2019
#246: Choosing Your ONE Thing with Jay Papasan
01:00:35

It’s so easy to get caught up on all the little details of launching a course, running a business—or, hey, living life. All these little things compete for your attention and energy.

The thing is: Living like this isn’t going to help you realize your full potential and true success.

The key to extraordinary results? Finding your ONE THING—your number one priority at any given point in time.

And I’ve got THE expert on this topic on the show today, my new friend Jay Papasan, author of the amazing book The ONE Thing: The Surprisingly Simple Truth Behind Extraordinary Results.

His book—one of my favorites—has sold more than 1.3 million copies worldwide, and has appeared on national bestseller lists more than 400 times. And I truly believe that the principles in this book are the difference between realizing your potential and true success and honestly, just settling.

In addition to dishing about your one thing, or “true priority,” Jay and I talk about the real secret to sticking to your goals, and it’s about one word: Habits.

After this episode, you’re going to walk away with a new sense of purpose. You’re going to move past the distractions and overwhelm and get to a place where you’re hitting your goals and living stress free.

Are you ready to for this type of clarity and focus? Head on over now!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Jan 17, 2019
#245: How to Use a Virtual Assistant to Make Your Webinars More Profitable (+ Easier!)
23:19

It’s very I’m going to introduce you to a secret weapon that’s going to help you kick butt in webinars.

When I ran my first webinar waaaay back in the day, I enlisted my best friend to come over to my condo help me out. She sat next to me—really, I was almost sitting on her lap, I was so nervous—and made sure everyone could hear me and see my slides. She made sure everything went right, that way all I had to do was focus on giving my best to all my attendees.

I didn’t know it then, but I had essentially hired my best friend to be my virtual assistant during that first webinar. We made it through and that webinar was a success, but let me tell you, if I could do it over again, I would do it exactly how I’m going to outline for you in today’s podcast.

Virtual assistants are your secret weapon to rocking a webinar! They’re the key to making your webinars not only more profitable, but EASIER for you. And you know how I feel: webinars are the absolute best way to promote and market your digital course online.

But I want pause here for a second, because I’m sure some of you will tune out during this episode—or may even be tempted to skip it—because you don’t think you’re ready for a digital course. And if you’re not ready for a digital course, obviously you won’t be ready for a webinar. I’ve solved this conundrum for you.

I created a brand-new quiz called Should I Create a Digital Course for My Business.

I spent months and months on this, and I promise you, it’ll point you in the right direction. So take the quiz, figure out where you’re at, or if a digital course is even right for you, then come back to this episode.

Because even if you’re not ready for a webinar right now, it’s good to have an idea of what it’ll look like once you do have your digital course created. You’ll know exactly how to make your webinar easier on yourself, and you won’t have all the fears of something going wrong.

Remember my last episode? One of the biggest fears of launching has to do with a running a live webinar. But we’re not going to let those fears hold us back in our business! I’m sharing how to enlist virtual assistants so you can fear less, do your best, and make money, money, money!

So press play and listen to me gush about why virtual assistants are your secret weapon for webinars.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Jan 10, 2019
#244: How to Get Past the Fear of Launching
41:11

I’m here to get honest about the fears that come up around launching.

Because they are too real. And I have faced MANY of them.

If you’ve been listening for a while, then you know I had a HUGE fear of launching courses using webinars. I royally screwed up the first webinar I ever touched, back in my Tony Robbins days. Another time I had THE Marie Forleo live on my webinar, and it went completely silent right as I introduced her.

#epicfail

But as bad as those experiences were, I didn’t let them define me as a business owner. Because if I let that fear take over, I wouldn’t be where I am today.

Maybe you’ve had similar horrifying experiences. Maybe you had a webinar and no one showed up. Or you put a lot of effort into a launch for crickets. Well I’m here to tell you: That’s part of being in business. And you have to bust through that fear and march forward if you want to be successful.

And here’s the great news: I’ve generated well over $9 million through webinar launches by NOT letting the fear hold me back—and you can have that kind of success too…but you HAVE to get over your fear of launching!

For today’s episode, I’m going to drill down into the most common fears when it comes to launching, and how to squash them.

I’m going to break down some important insights you need to know and shake up some of your mindset blocks that are holding you back from giving it 100% when you launch something new.

It’s time to launch face first, hands out wide, ready to accept anything that comes your way. Are you ready for that? Press play and let’s dive in.

By the way, if your head is spinning just at the idea of a launch, I get it.

The truth is you likely have not been taught many of the crazy nuances around launching strategies.

Which is exactly what I wanted to break down the big picture of what it takes to launch a digital course, in my new masterclass. I’ll give you three behind-the-scenes secrets to digital course success in 2019 and beyond. I’ll share how to build, launch a grow a digital course business without the overwhelm and confusion.

Go to amyporterfield.com/dcamasterclass to sign up—make sure you reserve your spot, because I will be doing this class LIVE only!  

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Jan 03, 2019
#243: The #1 Secret to Playing a Bigger Game In Your Business
19:06

Have you ever felt like your dreams were bigger than you are? So big that they felt out of reach?

Maybe you want to write a best-selling book or start a talk show, buy your dream house, or travel to islands you can’t even pronounce! Or, maybe you’re being interviewed on The Today Show by Savannah and Hoda (that’s my dream, just in case you’re wondering).

Those are good solid dreams that feel light years away. You think about them and then you put them on the shelf. Instead of going after them you fiddle around and worry about things that you know won’t matter in the long run—like staring at your Insta feed or worrying that your website opt-in isn’t quite right.

The reality is that you have likely been afraid to do big things and I get it. You’ve been playing small. It’s sad but it’s true—and I’ve been in the same boat.

It’s time for a change, my friend.

You’re here right now. You’re listening to a podcast that promises to help you make a bigger impact in the world. That proves to me you’re in this and you’re not taking your business or your life lightly.

In this episode, I’m going to walk you through an exercise that will help you make some crucial decisions about moving forward in a bigger way. Listen through to the end of the episode, download this special PDF, and make sure you finish the exercise.

But promise me that in the next 24 hours you will commit to doing this worksheet

Here’s why this exercise is so important: right now, today, you can reclaim the fact that you are a big deal.

Because you are meant to be a big deal in this world. You are ready. Your time is now. It’s never too late, so hit play now, let’s start making those big dreams come true.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Dec 27, 2018
#242: Choosing the Perfect Topic for Your First Digital Course (Perfect...AND Profitable!)
37:27

Looking for a little inspiration when it comes to the topic of your course?

If you’re like most course creators just starting out (who I hear from all of the time!), you’ve had an idea for your course for some time, but you aren’t sure how to move forward, or if your core market will even pay for it.

So in this ep, I will walk through three approaches to help you choose your next course topic.

To up the fun factor, I am going to teach this episode with real-life examples from some of my students. You’ll hear how they built their courses based on their successes, including one superstar who made $255,000 with one webinar and a couple of emails as a follow-up.

I will also show you how to take what you teach with your customers or clients one-on-one and turn that framework into a digital course so that you can move away from that client work you enjoy in the beginning, but then get burnt out with over time.

This episode will definitely spark some creative juices for you—and better yet, show you what’s possible in the digital course world!

And if you want to keep the momentum going, make sure to download my brand new freebie called The Ultimate Course Creation Starter Kit. In this Starter Kit I’ll show you how to choose the right “course type” for your business, the perfect course name to attract your perfect audience, and how to kickstart your course idea validation on social media to ensure your audience will be willing to invest.

Grab a copy of that special free guide here.

I truly believe you have something you can teach others that can become a digital course. Allow yourself to dream a little bit. And don’t let the fear of “what will others think” stop you. Creating a digital course has transformed my life, and the lives of so many of my students. I want you to experience what’s possible. Listen up now.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Dec 20, 2018
#241: How a Mom of 4 Turned Her Chiseled Abs Into $330K Using Webinars In Just 9 Months with Kim Constable
53:51

How does a vegan, homeschooling, bodybuilding mom of four get into the online world? And then see massive success with webinars?

It may seem like a crazy story, but I can guarantee you that you will be completely enthralled and inspired with Kim Constable and her personal journey.

Kim started her online adventure back in 2009 after she had had enough of the stress of running a business AND raising four kids. There was literally a day she just sank to her knees and started crying. She knew there had to be a better way to live (and make money!).

On today’s ep Kim and I talk about how she finally found success online by tapping into a personal passion—vegan sculpting—then building a signature course and running webinars.

Kim followed my coaching to a tee (in Kim’s words: “I’m a very good soldier”) even when it got frustrating or took longer than she had hoped. And that commitment paid off: In her first round of webinars for her Sculpted Vegan program she made $52,000. She also just had her first six-figure month—and there’s still so much more ahead for her!

This type of success doesn’t happen overnight, nor does it come without a little time, energy, and investment. Kim has found the secret sauce, and she’s sharing it with us today. (And in case you don’t think you can manifest your dreams—Kim said years ago that she would be on this very podcast!) Click here to hear her story.

This episode is brought to you by the Digital Course Academy—if you are looking to move beyond your service-based business (or, like Kim, you are burnt out on your current situation) and want to embrace a course-based model, you’ll want to enroll in the Academy, launching in January 2019. Sign up to be the first to know when the program goes live (and also grab a tasty course creation freebie!).

Dec 13, 2018
#240: 3 Types of Profitable Digital Courses You Can Create (And How to Choose the Best One For Your Business)
42:36

When it comes to picking the format of your next digital course, the options may seem... daunting. Because thanks to the growing demand for online trainings, there are A LOT of choices out there today.

So how do you know which one is right for you?

Today, I’m taking all of the confusion out of what can be a tough choice, and giving you three solid choices to pick from. These three are based on my experience as a course creator, and what I think works best for my students overall.

I’ll walk through each of the three, giving you the pros and cons, as well as an example from one of my students.

Then make sure you stay on until the end, where I give you the exact questions to ask to help determine which of the three are right for you.

Let’s get started and figure out your next course format, together.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in and read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Dec 06, 2018
7 Things You Must Do When Planning for 2019 (My Best Revenue Boosting Ideas)
48:56

It’s planning time. My favorite time of year. Time to pull out the giant calendar, the sharpies, and any other office supply I can get my hands on. And start to plan for BIG things in 2019.

In this special bonus episode, I walk through my 7-step process for getting what you really want in your business in 2019. Download my 2019 Planning Roadmap and follow along, because I know great things are waiting for you next year...

Are you ready?

Oh, and three things before you get started…

#1: Just focus on the first 6 months. Don’t think beyond that so you can stay focused.

#2: Take ONE entire day to plan. Break out that white board, the post-its, anything that gets your juices flowing, and eliminate any distractions. Think about getting out of your environment, even booking a hotel room for a day so you can really dive in.

#3: Plan with someone who knows your business. Whether it’s your virtual assistant or a trusted colleague, the more someone knows you and where you want to go, the better.

Again, make sure to download the step-by-step worksheet that goes along with this episode—your 2019 Planning Roadmap—to follow along and do this exercise.

Let’s get started…

First you’re going to start with your opportunities and big dreams for the next 6 months. Will you create your own digital course? Hire a VA for extra support? FINALLY write that book that’s been swirling around in your brain?

Then you are going to decide on your non-negotiables—what did you hate doing this year? What are you not willing to do or experience to get to your wildly successful year? There is always stuff that you just get tired of doing. For me, I’m no longer to make excuses for not posting on Social Media. You might say: I’m no longer going to take clients out of fear that you will lose out on the money.

Then you get to the fun part—to declare your number. Is it $555K or $55K? How much do you want want to earn next year?

Next you’ll take a step back to move forward. I’m not about living in the past, however one thing I always do on my planning day is to look at the metrics of 2018. Because so much of what you’ve done (the good, the bad and the ugly) influences how you are going to move forward.  

Then you’ll do your calendar planning in two phases. This is the big step. In phase one you’ll figure out how you’ll make the number you declared. Then in phase two you will calendar it out.

Then you’ll identify how you need to show up to make 2019 the biggest year yet.

In the final step, you’re taking action. There is where you pull it all together and identify your steps to get it done.

Now promise me one thing: At the end of this process, you need to celebrate and do something special to commemorate the moment! (My integrator, Chloe, and I did something fun and silly!)

So get going and build your vision for 2019.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Dec 04, 2018
#239: My Weightloss Journey (Part 2)
44:06

I’m getting a little personal in this episode, because it’s time to revisit something I brought up back in October 2017 on this podcast: My weight.

Now, that October ep was the first time I had ever brought up my struggles with weight. I shared how I hated video because I was incredibly embarrassed about my weight. That was just over a year ago, and today, I can confidently say everything is completely different.

Coming clean to you guys put a fire under my butt and helped me make a shift in my life. I was no longer hiding this big, dirty secret from the world and that opened up space in my mind for what was possible.

It took a couple of months, but on March 25, 2018, I officially started my weight-loss journey and so much has changed about my life. I hired a weight-loss coach, Corinne Crabtree (who just so happens to be one of my students, but more on that later…), and have learned to put myself and my health first—even before work.

Since then, I’ve lost roughly 60 pounds and I’m a little more than halfway to my goal. I know that before I started this journey, any time I saw someone make such a transformation, I always wanted to know, how did you do it!? So today I’m sharing with you guys how I’ve gotten here—not just in my weight loss, but also in the mindset change that has happened.

Look, if we’re going to be real, it’s not just about the weight. I had to change the way I handled my feelings and thoughts; most importantly, my thoughts about myself. I have a feeling that many of you might need to make that kind of mental change too. My wish is that when you hear my progress, you also decide that enough is enough and you join me on this journey of letting anything hold you back from living the life you want to live and building the business you want to build.

I want this episode to be more like a conversation—so grab a cup of coffee, find a cozy spot, and press play.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Nov 29, 2018
#238: Success Secrets to Serving the Smallest Viable Market with Seth Godin
37:11

Find people who want to be found.

Talk to them in ways they want to be talked to.

Take them on a journey to where they want to go.

—Seth Godin

Those are just a few of the nuggets of marketing mastery from THE Seth Godin, my longtime DREAM guest for the podcast.

I’m SO excited to have Seth on today to chat about his new book, This Is Marketing: You Can't Be Seen Until You Learn to See, and diving deep into what sets the best marketers apart from the rest.

According to Seth, as an online marketer, you know you’re not going to be able to successfully serve every single person in the world, but for some reason, you still (probably) freak out in narrowing down the people you can help or reach.

Change—and thereby, growth—can only happen when you find your smallest viable market and serve the heck out of them. You have to find and build your community in order to be an effective online marketer.

In his book, Seth writes:

“Find a corner of the market that can’t wait for your attention. Go to their extremes. Find a position on the map where you and you alone are the perfect answer. Overwhelm this group’s wants and dreams and desires with your care, your attention, and your focus. Make change happen. Change that’s so profound people can’t help but talk about it.”

That’s your goal as a marketer—to find people who want to go where you are going and who want to experience what you are offering. Then you can teach them what they need to know to get there.

If it’s your content that’s going to help them, awesome. But, as you’ll hear Seth share, that’s not the only thing they need; you should be providing them safe places that build tension, invoke change and push them forward in their journey.

His book—and this interview—have already dramatically changed the way I view content and community. And I can already tell you, it’s literally going to impact how I teach my brand-new course, Digital Course Academy.

So, are you ready to have your mind blown like I did? Press play to hear Seth’s nuggets of wisdom!

This episode is brought to you by the women of Cultivate What Matters and their Power Sheets. How would it feel to get anything you wanted? What if you could create goals with clarity and purpose? If you want to create goals that matter (“goals with soul”) then you’ve got to check out Power Sheets.

Nov 22, 2018
LLC or S-Corp? Choosing the Right Business Structure with Bobby Klinck
41:27

If you’re reading this, I know that you are an entrepreneur that puts a lot of time, energy and resources to building your business. The last thing you need in your entrepreneurial journey is to run into any sort of legal trouble, but if you do, you’ll want to be protected. Better to be safe than sorry, right?  

The sort of legal protection I’m talking about is setting up a corporate entity to protect you and your business. The good news is that it’s a relatively cheap investment. The double dose of good news is that I’ve got attorney extraordinaire, Bobby Klinck, on the show today to walk us through all the ins and outs of setting up an LLC or S Corp without all the confusing legal jargon.

You may remember Bobby from our GDPR episode, but what you may not know is that Bobby has become our resident attorney here at Team Porterfield. We love him because he breaks down all the legal stuff for us an understandable, doable fashion, and actually kind of makes it all fun!    

What we cover in today’s episode:

  1. The most common company forms (listed below), what they entail, how they’re different, and which is the right kind (and wrong kind) of entity for an entrepreneur to set up:
  • Sole Proprietorship
  • Partnership
  • LLC (including the S Corp election)
  • C-Corp
  1. The process for setting up your LLC or S Corp election (most common options with entrepreneurs) and what you need to do after you’re all set up.

Let me tell you, this episode is packed with good information. Even after being in business for 10 years and all set up legally, I learned a ton and am glad to be more clear on the whole process. Bobby gave so many good examples throughout this episode and we both hope that you walk away with some real clarity on understanding what you need to do in order to protect yourself and your business.

Let’s get to it...press play and let’s dive in!

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for a while but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here for more details.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Nov 20, 2018
#237: 5 Ways to Create Binge-Worthy Content with Melissa Cassera
52:42

Ok, I have a confession to make...I totally LOVE to binge-watch certain shows like Housewives, Game of Thrones, and my latest binge has been The Handmaid’s Tale. So good! Anyway, I’ve heard from enough of you to know that you, too, love a good binge session.

So what do you think it is about these types of shows that keep us coming back? I’m pretty sure the writers have a secret writing potion they use when they’re creating the storylines and scripts. ; )

But seriously, wouldn’t you love to know their secret so you could create content that your ideal customer avatar (I’m looking at you episode #236) wants to binge consume and can’t stop raving about?

Well, you’re in luck, because on today’s show I’ve brought in a Hollywood insider to tell us exactly how it’s all done. My guest Melissa Cassera, is a publicity strategist and a professional screenwriter who loves nothing more than creating binge-worthy content, so she’s our girl!

Melissa became obsessed with how movies and TV shows could create obsessed fan bases, so she decided to figure it out and share the secrets with business owners, like yourself, so that you, too, can create an obsessed fan base through the power of storytelling.

In this episode Melissa breaks down these five storytelling techniques that you can use when you’re creating content:

  • The  inciting incident (your hook)
  • Introducing conflict into your story
  • The rule of three
  • The conclusion
  • The power of “what’s next”

(Don’t forget to download the worksheet that Melissa created to help you walk through these techniques the next time you create content.)

You will love Melissa’s approach to storytelling and you’re not going to believe how fun it is to create content using these strategies. And best of all, you’re going to have your ideal customer avatar LOVING what you’re giving them and coming back for more!  

Press play and let’s dive in!

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for a while but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here for more info.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Nov 15, 2018
#236: How to Clarify Your Message with Donald Miller of StoryBrand
43:32

Have you ever struggled to communicate a clear message to your followers? One that grabs AND keeps their attention?

Is this scene familiar? You sit down at your computer, fingers on the keyboard, ready to create the perfect content to captivate your audience. You know this email you're about to send or the social media post you’re creating is going to resonate with your audience!   

You hit SEND or POST….

And….

No comments on your post (except your aunt and a high school friend who is definitely NOT your ICA). The open rate on your email isn’t at all what you expected and the click-through rate is even worse.

I think we can all remember scenes like these from our entrepreneurial journeys. But there’s hope, my friends! And that hope comes in the form of a 7-part communication framework. One that’s easy to understand and fun to implement.

With just a couple tweaks to the way you position yourself and your customer, and how you talk to them, they’ll be eager to read that next email or social post. Excited to jump on your weekly FB lives or show up for your next webinar. And better yet, they’ll want to buy what you’re selling because you’ll know how to present what you’ve created for them in a clear way that speaks directly to their pain points and desires and offers a solution that they won’t be able to refuse.

“When you stop talking about your customer’s problem, they stop doing business with you.”  Don Miller

And that’s where Don Miller comes in. Don, the author of Building a StoryBrand, is the creator of this 7-part framework that shows you how to clarify your message through the principles and framework of storytelling.

This interview was one of my all-time favorites and I think it might be one of yours too. I had a couple of huge aha moments for sure!

Are you ready to listen? Click here to get started.

P.S. Remember how we became intimately aware of our avatar last week in episode 235, How To Identify Your Ideal Customer Avatar and uncovered their specific pain points and desires? It’s this type of knowledge that we MUST have to create the messaging Don talks about that captivates and converts. If you haven’t listened to that episode yet, make sure you add to your playlist.   

This episode is sponsored by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan: My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you. amyporterfield.com/listbuilding

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Nov 08, 2018
#235: How To Identify Your Ideal Customer Avatar
27:40

Have you ever sat down to write a blog post, create an outline for your podcast or video show, and you just froze? Not because of fear or imposter syndrome, because those are 100% real, too. Instead you froze because you just didn’t know what it was that your ideal customer wanted or needed from you. It can feel like you’re just pulling any old idea out of a dark hole.

Now of course we will all suffer from writer’s block at some point, but what is worse is not understanding who it is you’re serving and why.

In today’s show I’m talking about how to identify your Ideal Customer Avatar (ICA). Why is this so important? Because your ICA is someone who is absolutely crucial to the success of your business and if you don’t know who they are, your business won’t have legs to stand on.

Your ICA is your PERFECT customer. This ONE single person is the potential customer who wants and needs YOUR content, YOUR product, or YOUR services. This is also a person that you LOVE to work with. Win-win!

There are specific ways to really hone in on who this person is: what they like, what they don’t like, what their aspirations are, and most importantly, what their fears are. And surprise, surprise...when you know all this, you won’t be sitting there frozen at your computer not knowing what to create or to say in your next social media post.

You’ll be happily creating solutions to their wants or needs and something they will actually pay for.

You’re not just building your business as a hobby, right? I know you’re not, and that’s way I want you to get laser focused and know how to serve your customers best!

In today’s show, I’m going to share the exact steps in how I figured out how to understand my perfect customer. I’ve even created a super helpful worksheet for you to print out and use as you define your very own ICA.

Press play and let’s dive in!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Nov 01, 2018
#234: Do You Know What Makes You Unique? A Brand-Building Chat with Laura Belgray
56:05

As an online entrepreneur you are constantly putting yourself out there. You’re writing social media posts, copy for emails, creating webinar slides, creating content for your podcast or video show, and writing blog posts. And when you do, you’re showing up in one of two ways: with your true personality shining, or trying to impersonate someone else.

The problem is, especially if you’re just starting out, the impersonation route seems to be the popular choice.

I want you to hear these words from my guest today, Laura Belgray: “There is no person, brand or artist that is for everyone.”

Read that again, my friends: There is no person, brand or artist that is for everyone.

You cannot and should not even try to be all things to everyone. When you do, you water down all that is wonderful and unique about YOU.

Here’s the good news! Laura is in the business of helping people infuse their personality in all they do and she’s sharing some great tips and strategies with us on the show today.

Laura is a copywriter and television promo writer. She even works with BRAVO and tells us about a Real Housewives promo line she wrote not too long ago...sooo clever!

In this episode, we talk mindset blocks and how to overcome them so your copy shows the real you, specific exercises and assessments that will help you to discover what your unique personality is, and Laura shares the five very actionable Ps of showing your personality in your copy. Really good stuff today, my friends!    

Are you ready to step into your own special uniqueness? Press play and let’s dive in!

P.S. Don’t forget to grab the free worksheet that will help you to discover the uniqueness of your personality so you can share it with the world!  

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Oct 25, 2018
#233: Podcasting 101: From Creation to Promotion
50:41

This episode is a long time coming. I get asked A LOT about how to podcast. From the equipment and software I use, to knowing what topics to cover and which guests to feature, to the recording, editing and publishing phase, to how in the world I keep it all organized!

I’m pulling back the curtain and sharing all of it with you today!

Whether you’re currently a podcaster and would find it helpful to hear about my podcasting process and organization, or you’re thinking about starting a podcast soon and want to hear all the ins-and-outs of set up and how to decide on topics and guests, this is going to be an episode you don’t want to miss.

Here are the 10 podcasting areas I get into on the show today. Hit play and let’s get started!

  • Show Format
  • Set Up
  • Deciding on Topics and Guests
  • Podcast Outlines
  • Recording
  • Editing
  • Graphics Creation
  • Publishing
  • Promoting
  • Tracking Your Analytics

I’ve linked you up to all the podcasting equipment and software I use here, but I thought you might like to have a little behind-the-scenes tour of my podcasting studio, too. I did this video a while ago, but I still use the same equipment.

Remember, I chose to invest in better quality equipment from the beginning, but you can still get great audio quality with a less expensive mic and by sitting in a closet to record. Feel free to start simple and get fancy later.

I hope you find this episode packed with value and resources that will help you in your podcasting process.

Wishing you all the best in your podcasting journey.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Oct 18, 2018
#232: How to Track Your Financials Using ‘Profit First’ with Amber Dugger
43:27

Today we’re going to talk about making money and actually being profitable in your business.

Believe it or not, most entrepreneurs never really show a consistent profit in their business. The reason for this is because any extra money they have coming in ends up going back into the business. Reinvesting back in your business or using extra money on hand to buy the latest and greatest software or tool of the trade sounds like a reasonable and healthy plan, right?  

Not so much. Especially when you’re not being intentional about it.

My guest today, Amber Dugger, is a financial expert who tells us that maintaining clarity and control of where your money is going will be a game-changer but you must first have a good cash flow system. Amber is a mastery level Profit First Professional and teaches the cash flow system from the Profit First book, but her teaching is tailored specifically to online entrepreneurs.

In case you were wondering, this has nothing to do with bookkeeping or accounting, but everything to do with with what you do with the money coming in right now and in the future.  

I use the Profit First system in my business, and it has been a game-changer, but what Amber shared today is going to help me to make the system even easier. I can’t wait for you to learn this system, too, and become a profitable business the minute you do!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Listener shout out of the week!

Thank you Anna! So glad you enjoyed it and happy to know you’ve hired an Integrator, too! Listen to the epsiode Anna refers to here.

Oct 11, 2018
#231: “I’m Terrible At Writing My Own Copy” And Other Copywriting Lies That Are Killing Your Sales With Marie Forleo
43:09

Let me ask you a question: Can you relate to any of these issues when it comes to writing your own copy?

  • It takes forever to write a headline, a blog post, or the script for your podcast or video show because you’re constantly second guessing yourself?
  • You write something, put it out there and...CRICKETS? (The silence is devastating.)
  • You’ve got a tight deadline and you sit down to write but you’re completely blocked? You can’t seem to eek out anything on that page and the clock is ticking?

If there’s one thing that most of us as online entrepreneurs have experienced it’s getting tripped up on writing copy.

Well, don’t worry, there’s hope for us yet...

Two things my guest, Marie Forleo (yes, the Marie from the award winning MarieTV!) shared on the podcast today that really resonated with me, and I think will with you too, are:

  1. You CAN learn to be a stellar copywriter in your business. (No more telling yourself otherwise!)
  2. Writing effective copy has been the single most important skill that Marie has developed over the last 18 years in her business. (By the way, this one says A LOT, coming from a person that has achieved the monumental level of success that Marie has.)

Marie, who has been a student of copy since day one, joined me on the show today to share the top copywriting tips and strategies that she’s used along the way to connect and resonate with the millions of people her message has touched.

You know I love when you listen to my podcast and take action, so today I want you to listen in, take what Marie shares, and begin implementing it in your business immediately. You’ll see... you’ll get better and better with writing copy, and you’ll have tangible results to show for it: more conversions and a bigger impact.

If you haven’t jumped over and started listening already, let me give you one more reason why listening in today is going to be a game-changer in your business: You know how much competition is out there, right? Now, you know I’m all about running your own race, but competition is real, and when you can find an advantage over your competition, you’re smart to take it. Copy is an area that most people are not paying attention to, so this IS your competitive advantage. Writing better copy will be how you set yourself apart.

Are you ready? Press play and let’s dive in!

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Listener shout out of the week!

 

Thank you 

Oct 04, 2018
#230: Dealing With Depression as an Entrepreneur: Amy and Jasmine Star Open Up
48:22

In honor of the upcoming World Mental Health Day (October 10, 2018), I wanted to have a candid, real, and raw conversation about being an entrepreneur while dealing with depression.

I have dealt with depression starting at a young age and it moved its way into the years that I was starting this business as well.

There are three goals I wanted to accomplish in this episode:

Goal #1: If you are struggling with depression or anxiety, or anything around mental health issues, I want you to know you are not alone. We may not talk about it, but we are out there. You are not alone.

Goal #2: To get the conversation started. Mental health issues can be uncomfortable to talk about, but that needs to change. We need to have hard conversations and I’m hoping you will learn some tools in this episode to be more vocal about what you’re going through as well.

Goal #3: You can still be successful in spite of, or in addition to, your depression or other mental health challenge you are going through right now.

I didn’t want to do this episode alone and I also wanted you to be part of a conversation, so I brought on my dear friend Jasmine Star who also has a history of depression that she shares today, too.

I hope that as you listen you will not feel alone, be encouraged, and walk away with some tools and resources to help you move forward as you deal with depression and as you grow your business.

Here is the quote Jasmine shared by Elie Wiesel: “I swore never to be silent whenever and wherever humans endured suffering. We must take sides. Neutrality helps the oppressor, never the victim. Silence encourages the tormentor, never the tormented.”

These were the questions that Amy and Jasmine asked (inspired by Dr. Amen and suggested by Jasmine): When you are having a negative or overwhelming thought:

  1. Write it down. The act of writing it down is like an exorcism. It forces you to see it.
  2. Ask yourself about that one thing you’re struggling with.
  3. And then ask yourself: Is this true?
  4. See what your answer is to that question and ask yourself if you’re 100% certain the your response is true. (Remember, you are not a fortune teller….you can not know with certainty what is destined to be true for you, right??)
  5. Then ask yourself, “How does this make you feel?”
  6. Then look at that response and ask yourself, “Do you think that those feelings will keep you from the purpose you have in this world?”
  7. What would feeling the opposite of this look like?

The choice is yours in how you choose to think and believe in your answers to these questions.

“We are not our thoughts. The things that we think are not us.” -- James Wedmore

Remember:

  • Don’t be ashamed of your story--it’s needs to be heard.
  • Find a support system that will give you what you need in those dark moments.
  • If you don’t have that support system, or even if you do, find a good therapist.
  • Consider exploring medication that may help you.

If you are in crisis and need help immediately, please call the National Suicide Prevention LifeLine: 1-800-273-TALK or text “Talk” to 741741.

Sep 27, 2018
#229: The Power of the P.S. Strategy
25:19

“There is no such thing as a benign email that doesn’t have a goal.” This is something my copywriter, Ry Schwartz, said to me a while back and it’s truer than ever today, with so many things vying for the attention of our audiences. It is critical that we be intentional with our communication and that’s where the P.S. Strategy comes in.

In today’s episode I dive into the strategies behind simple, yet very powerful micro-conversions -- the P.S. Strategy being one of them. Once you understand how to use these micro-conversions in your communication with your community, you will not only be coaching their conversion from point A (your first interaction with them) to point B (which is them being your paying customer), but you will also be coaching them to take action when you ask them to. Both will be game-changers in your business!   

If you’re not using micro-conversions in your marketing strategy, let’s change that right away! Join me on the podcast today!

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here to sign up.

Sep 20, 2018
#228: 6 Secrets to Finishing What You Start with Jon Acuff
01:11:58

Even the most vigilant goal-setters have been know to stumble when approaching the finish line, but my guest today, Jon Acuff - entrepreneur, New York Times and Wall Street Journal bestselling author, and popular speaker, has cracked the code on how to SIGNIFICANTLY increase your chances of FINISHING what you start, and you’re going to be pleasantly surprised to hear how to make it happen.

In writing his most recent book Finish: Give Yourself The Gift of Done, Jon commissioned a study where nearly 900 people were studied for six months to figure out what really works and what doesn’t when it comes to being able to finish what you start.

Jon breaks his findings down in six areas with an overriding theme of embracing imperfection (ugh! This is gonna be hard for some of us...)  

"Developing tolerance for imperfection is the key factor in turning chronic starters into consistent finishers." - Jon Acuff

Here are the six secrets to finishing what you start that Jon divulges on the podcast today:

  • SECRET 1: Cut your goal in half
  • SECRET 2: Choose what to bomb
  • SECRET 3: Make it fun!
  • SECRET 4: Leave your hiding places and ignore noble obstacles...
  • SECRET 5: Get rid of your secret rules
  • SECRET 6: Use data to celebrate your imperfect progress

So, f you’re about to start something or you’ve got a list of half-done projects that you’d like to finish - don’t wait another minute - listen to my conversation with Jon right away.

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here to sign up.

Sep 13, 2018
#227: Getting Started with Chat Bots with Andrew Warner
36:42

My guest today, Andrew Warner, tells us that chatbots are the FUTURE of online engagement. Sounds like something we should pay attention to, right? If you’re not familiar with chatbots yet, you will be by the time you listen to this episode.

I currently use chatbots to a limited degree in my business, but after this interview I can assure you, I will be using them in a MUCH bigger way. Andrew shared some amazing strategies that are easy to implement and don’t cost much, if anything.

Andrew is the founder of Mixergy, a podcast where he interviews entrepreneurs on how they built their businesses. He also started BotAcademy.com, where he trains people to create bots (not something he recommends for the majority of my audience, by the way).

In this episode, Andrew breaks down exactly:

  • What a chatbot is (Andrew created this sample chatbot for my audience)
  • How we should use them in our businesses (he blew my mind with some amazing statistics from using chatbots to increase webinar attendance show up rates)
  • How we should NOT be using them (you’ll want to know how to avoid these 5 mistakes)
  • How to begin using them (It’s easy and most are free)
  • Fun bonus: Andrew gives us a look into the future of bots...some fun ways they will be used. Think: being able to order, pay for, and have a beverage delivered for yourself or someone else while you’re attending a pro baseball game!

Andrew gives immense value in this episode...he shares great examples and even created a couple videos for us to see a chatbot in action (I’ve got those videos linked up below).

Behind-the-scenes funny story: I do most of my podcast interviews in audio-only format and when Andrew asked if we could turn on video because it would be easier for him to engage during our conversation, he was wearing a sports coat! I love that!! Talk about showing up...look how dapper he looks! I on the other hand was in my workout clothes.

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here to sign up.

Sep 06, 2018
#226: What to Focus On When You Are Just Starting Out
45:59

When just starting out in business (your first year or two) there are a variety of different paths to take, tasks to complete, and shiny objects lurking around every corner. When you’re not sure where to start or what to do next, this lack of focus leads to overwhelm and frustration. That’s why I recorded today’s episode (and created the awesome New Business Focus Worksheet to go with it!).

I’m breaking down the FIVE key areas to focus on when you’re just getting started, and these are absolutely crucial for a successful online business.

Are you a seasoned entrepreneur? Don’t click away, because this episode is for you, too. I not only focused on these same areas when I first started my business, but I still do today. I use these five areas almost as a check-up checklist for my business every quarter and during my annual planning.

Here’s a snapshot of what I’m covering in today’s episode:

FOCUS AREA #1: The importance of understanding WHY you’re building your business. I talk about Simon Sinek’s Golden Circle and the #1 foundational question you need to ask yourself as you develop and grow your business. .

I also dive into the importance of understanding WHO you are serving - your Ideal Customer Avatar (ICA).

While this exercise will take time and some real work on your part, you don’t want to skip over this if you’re not really clear.

If you’re listening to the episode and are already clear on your ICA, you can just pick back up around the 21 minute mark to move on to Focus Area #2.

FOCUS AREA #2: Why you need a website with a clear message and how to make that happen. These are some of the examples I discuss in the episode:

Example from Michael Hyatt’s ABOUT Page.

FOCUS AREA #3: The importance of choosing ONE platform to focus on in the beginning and creating original, consistent content there on a weekly basis.

FOCUS AREA #4: Authentic engagement - a HUGE factor in whether your business will succeed or not.

FOCUS AREA #5: Creating a way to make money in your business while you are figuring things out and building the business of your dreams.

I also created a great freebie to help you work through these FIVE focus areas. You can grab that right here.

Subscribe & Review in iTunes

Are you subscribed to my podcast? If you’re not, I want to encourage you to do that today. I don’t want you to miss an episode. I’m adding a bunch of bonus episodes to the mix and if you’re not subscribed there’s a good chance you’ll miss out on those. Click here to subscribe in iTunes!

Now if you’re feeling extra loving, I would be really grateful if you left me a review over on iTunes, too. Those reviews help other people find my podcast and they’re also fun for me to go in an read. Just click here to review, select “Ratings and Reviews” and “Write a Review” and let me know what your favorite part of the podcast is. Thank you!

Aug 30, 2018
#225: How to Create an Evergreen Lead Machine on YouTube
55:00

On today’s show, we’re diving into strategies around two things I LOVE to talk about: list-building and evergreen lead automation! However, there’s a twist! I’ve brought on someone to walk us through some really great strategies on these topics on a platform I haven’t covered much here: YouTube!

You and I both know video is where it’s at so even if you haven’t thought about the platform much or are not a huge fan of video, this episode is loaded with very doable strategies that I want you to consider using to grow your email list.

My guest today is an absolute YouTube boss and she’s going to guide us through her proven three phase method to creating a YouTube evergreen lead machine without using paid advertising.

Sunny Lenarduzzi has a YouTube following of over 170,000 subscribers and and has helped her clients to go from zero to 100,000 subscribers and build their email lists from zero to 28,000 in less than 10 months (resulting in multiple 6-figure businesses).  

HOW BECOMING A YOUTUBE BOSS WAS A HAPPY ACCIDENT

Do you ever wonder if the work you are doing today will ever lead to something that can REALLY help you scale your business? Sunny shares her journey from being a social media consultant to coming to a place where she didn’t have the bandwidth to accept any more clients.

In order to save some time and provide a common solution to several of her clients, she created a video that that changed the trajectory of her business forever. She published that video on her non-branded YouTube channel, emailed the link to her clients, went to bed and the next morning had 2,000 views!

THE POWER OF REVERSE ENGINEERING

Sunny was completely surprised with the amount of views and comments and decided to figure out what the heck had happened, so she reverse engineered the situation. Through this process Sunny realized the key to the success of that ONE single video and applied it to every video moving forward. In that first year she grew her YouTube subscription to 50,000 in and 3 million views!

WHAT CONTENT IS BEST FOR YOUTUBE?

As Sunny will tell you, YouTube is a platform that people are searching every single day for how to solve their problems and get their questions answered. That was why that first video she published went gangbusters. She was providing a solution to a problem that many people were searching for.

Well guess what? You as an entrepreneur can be the one to provide your ideal customer the solutions and answers that they’re searching for on YouTube...you just need to show up and let you videos be found. If it worked for Sunny, it can work for you too!  

GETTING STARTED GENERATED LEADS ON YOUTUBE

You’ll want to tune into today’s episode to get all the details on Sunny’s 3-phase system to creating an evergreen lead machine, but here are the phases broken down:

PHASE 1

This phase is all about creating profitable content that increases your reach and revenue without having to rely on paid advertising. The key here is to research before recording and here’s how:

  • Use frequently asked questions for content ideas
  • Look for ideas from your competition and community hubs (Sunny’s not suggesting you steal from your competition, but there’s nothing wrong with getting a little inspiration and putting your spin on an idea that’s resonating with your ideal customer.)
  • Look to provide content on trends within your industry. This is not for the evergreen leads so much, but more more gaining visibility and reach.
  • Research and find the right keywords and key phrases to use when titling your videos.

PHASE 2

This phase is all about converting your viewers into customers through Sunny’s H.O.T. (Hook, Outcome, Testimonial) formula. She explains how  you can use this formula to tweak your video scripts to keep your viewer engaged, which will turn them into a loyal viewer, and ultimately a paying customer.

It’s through Sunny’s H.O.T. formula where list-building comes in too! Sunny explains how to work in the ever-so-important conversion calls to action where you provide an opportunity for your viewer to download a guide, checklist, or worksheet.   

PHASE 3

This is the evergreen traffic machine phase! Now that you’ve got your phase 1 and 2 bases covered, it’s time to publish your video. But you’re not just going to publish and wait...Sunny explains why the first 24-48 hours after posting your video is crucial to actively distribute a link to your warm audience in order to get some engagement going which tells YouTube that your video is one that should be ranking on the first page. Once you’re on that first page, your cold audience is introduced to your video and this begins that evergreen lead machine!

You might be thinking, “This is great, but I don’t have any authority on YouTube, so how am I supposed to rank when my competition is so tough?”  Sunny explains in detail in today’s episode but the key is to work on getting search rankings in smaller competition pools.

So there you have it! I’d love to hear how you’re going to use YouTube as a list-building technique in your business. Head over to Instagram and DM me and let me know. I’d love to hear from you!

This episode is brought to you by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days”. If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you.

Aug 23, 2018
#224: A Behind the Scenes Chat with My Integrator, Chloe
40:19

On today’s show I brought on the Integrator on my team, Chloe Euse. The goal of this episode is to help you step into the Visionary role as the founding entrepreneur of your business so that you can do more of the things that you were created to do and that are in your zone of genius.

The deal is, in order to be able to fully step into that role, you will need to hire an Integrator (also known as a Project Manager) to work alongside you.

I’m taking you behind-the-scenes so you can see how a Visionary and Integrator work together. To give you a hint, you as the Visionary are responsible for deciding on the WHAT of the business, while your Integrator figures out the HOW to make your vision come true.

I really want you to take the time to tune in and listen today and hear directly from us, but here are the key areas we cover:

  • The skills that are vitally important for an Integrator to have
  • How specific Myers Briggs types may work better (or worse) together
  • The nitty-gritty of how a Visionary and Integrator work together (you two are going to work VERY closely together so you better like each other!)
  • Whether you should hire a local or virtual Integrator
  • How the Integrator executes on the Visionary’s vision (this is where the other members of your team and contractors come in!)
  • How tension between the Visionary and Integrator is actually a good thing
  • Why an Integrator is NOT an implementer. There is a very important distinction here!
  • What a day in the life of an Integrator looks like
  • Chloe’s TOP 3 tools that she couldn’t live without as an Integrator
  • Chloe gives you (the Visionary) some final words of wisdom for when you decide to take the leap and hire your Integrator (her insight here as an Integrator is GOLDEN!)

And to wrap this episode up with a big bow, we’ve got a couple fantastic freebies for you. Both are Google Doc templates that you can take and make your own.

  1. The exact Integrator job description I used when I hired Chloe.
  2. The pre-hire test-run assignment I used for my top Integrator candidates.

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you. Click here to sign up.  

Aug 16, 2018
#223: How To Start Earning Affiliate Money With Pat Flynn
59:02

Raise your hand if you could use a little extra cash in your business right now!

In the first few years of building my business I certainly could have used some extra money, and had I known what I know today, I would have done something entirely different that would have brought in a nice flow of revenue during those tight times: affiliate marketing.  

If you don’t have affiliate marketing as a revenue generator in your business, I want that to change for you today.

My guest today, Pat Flynn, is going to share his proven system for earning money through affiliate marketing. Why did I choose Pat to be our guide today? Because he has earned three million dollars through affiliate marketing commissions since he started this business! He knows his stuff!    

AFFILIATE MARKETING IS A GAME-CHANGER!

If you’re new to the idea of affiliate marketing, Pat simply defines it as the process of earning a commission by promoting another person or another company’s product.

The great thing about affiliate marketing is that if you love a product or service and have a platform that you’re able to share why you love it with your audience, you can earn a commission from that recommendation at no cost to your audience.

Pat shared how he promoted one of his favorite products through a banner ad on his website and was being paid $1,000 per month, but he contacted them and asked about trying out an affiliate relationship instead. They did and he went from earning $1,000/month to $8,000 the next month!

PAT’S TOP TWO TIPS ON HOW TO BE SUCCESSFUL IN AFFILIATE MARKETING:
  • Be authentic. Don’t be an affiliate for a product you don’t believe in. Think about the things you would recommend to a friend, this is how you should think when you’re deciding what products to be an affiliate for.  
  • Treat the product you are promoting as if it were your own. Tell your audience why you love it, how it has helped you, and how it can help them. It’s extra helpful if you can take them behind-the-scenes and show how you use it.
TWO TYPES OF AFFILIATE MARKETING TO CONSIDER: PASSIVE & ACTIVE

An example of a PASSIVE way of affiliate marketing is when you include links to products on your website, like my Tools of the Trade page here. This is considered PASSIVE because once you set it up, it’s there and as people come to your website or are linked to it in an email, they can click on the links to make a purchase. Another example is by including a link just like this link right here in the show notes in which I’m sharing my affiliate link to Pat’s 123 Affiliate Marketing program.

An example of an ACTIVE format of affiliate marketing would be it Pat and I decided to do a special webinar with a launch sequence where we were actively promoting and selling the product to our audiences and we even offer a special deal that’s only available during a specified time period.

A prime example of this is when I promote B-School each year in February. I go all out in promoting Marie’s program because I 1000% stand behind her program, and because of this I promote the program as if it were my own. Being an affiliate for this program has been a game-changer for my business and I definitely use the strategies that Pat teaches in his program.

Either way, always be upfront with your audience that you are an affiliate. This is being transparent with your audience, but also protects you legally.

JUST GETTING STARTED IN AFFILIATE MARKETING?

Pat is clear that you do need to have an audience to be successful in affiliate marketing, otherwise who would use your links or join your webinars? However, I love that he talks about planting seeds now for people that may come across your content down the road. You may not make much money when your audience is small, but everything will be in place for you to earn affiliate commissions as you grow.

This is also a great way to begin monetizing because that trust you gain by recommending other people’s products can then lead to you selling your own products down the road.  

HOW TO AUDIT YOUR EXISTING AFFILIATE MARKETING STRATEGY

Maybe you’re already an affiliate, but you want to do an audit to see what’s working and what’s not, Pat suggests looking at your Google Analytics and see what’s doing well and optimize for those. Here are a few of the optimizing ideas he shared:

  • Include more links in your blog archive
  • Interview the founder on your show or on your blog
  • Create a demo video for the product you are recommending
  • After you’ve generated lots of leads for an affiliate you are then in a good position to contact the company to discuss other ways to promote your affiliate link beyond the traditional methods (Pat gives some good personal examples in the episode)
  • Create offers or bonuses as an incentive to go through your affiliate link
  • Add links to your resource page
  • Do a review of the product
PAT’S #1 NINJA AFFILIATE MARKETING TRICK!

Create a demo video!

Pat says creating a demo video is one of the most underused but HIGHLY effective techniques to take your affiliate marketing to a whole new level.

Pat includes the in-depth how-to create a killer demo video that converts as a bonus to my audience if you purchase his 123 Affiliate Marketing program through my affiliate link, but he also shares a few tips right here!

  • You don’t need to share every little feature or process for the product you’re recommending. Your demo video should show just enough to excite someone, but not bore them. It’s not a tutorial, it should be a overview that shows the viewer what the product is and how it can help them.
  • Pick three features to share in your demo video, but make sure to understand how to share why these features exist and why this product is unique.
  • Show your viewer how easy it is to use the product. If you do, they will want to get started using the product right away!  
TOP MISTAKES TO AVOID IN AFFILIATE MARKETING
  1. Promoting the wrong product. Make sure your are promoting relevant products that you have experience with and that WILL help your audience.
  2. Not pushing hard enough. Of course you don’t want to be annoying or too pushy, but when you know you’ve got a product that will solve that person’s problem or help them to achieve a certain goal they have, then you can and should push harder.

Alright, you’ve got ninja tricks, some mistakes to avoid, and hopefully a plan to either begin earning money through affiliate marketing, or a plan to give your existing affiliate strategy a boost

Take a listen to this short one-minute video where Pat tells you a little bit more about how you can earn money through affiliate marketing.  

Aug 09, 2018
#222: How to Create Your "Total Immersion Weekend Retreat" to Clean Up Your Messy Business
33:10

I just got back from a total immersion weekend retreat in Palm Springs with my Integrator Chloe and in today’s episode I share all the details of what went down! Unlike a typical team retreat we weren’t brainstorming ideas, we were actually cleaning up the messy stuff in our business.

Yep, I’ve got messes to clean up just like anyone else. I must say, I do believe my team and I are a gold standard when it comes to setting up systems and processes, but I think no matter how well the backend of your online business looks every single one of us has room to do a little cleaning, don’t you think?

Let me share a little bit about the weekend...

WHAT IS A TOTAL IMMERSION RETREAT WEEKEND?

First things first, this is NOT a team retreat and it is NOT a big brain-storming weekend where you come up with new ideas for the future. This is dedicated time to spend looking at the messy parts in your business and cleaning them up. The types of things you’ll be looking at cleaning up, fixing, or eliminating are areas that will ultimately impact the financial bottom line in your business.

WHO SHOULD GO ON A TOTAL IMMERSION RETREAT?

This is time best spent either on your own, or in the company of the right-hand person in your business. I took Chloe, my Integrator, because she is such an integral part of my business. . (Side note: Don’t miss upcoming episode #224 where I bring Chloe on the show and we talk about her role as an Integrator (aka Project Manager). We get into what she does, how she does it, who she manages, how we work together, her fave tools and lots more!)

FIVE QUESTIONS YOU SHOULD ASK YOURSELF BEFORE YOUR TOTAL IMMERSION WEEKEND RETREAT

Answering the following five key questions will help you to set a focus and make sure you’re on the same page (if you will be with someone from your team):

  1. What’s your #1 pain point in your business right now?
  2. What feels messy, broken, or painfully slow?
  3. What needs to be fixed before you can grow?
  4. Where are you losing money? Do you have any current leaks in your funnels, or in any system that you’re using to make money right now?
  5. What have you been putting off for way too long? What are the important things you’ve been wanting to get to but you know there are just not enough hours in the day?

I want you to answer these questions when you take your total immersion retreat weekend, too. Yes, I want you to take time away to clean up the messes in your own business. You will not regret it, I promise you!

TIP for answering the five questions: When answering these questions for yourself, think about team, systems, processes, and funnels (for my beginners, don’t let the word funnel throw you off...this just means the different systems and strategies that you have in place to get people to buy or join your email list).

I go into much more detail in today’s episode, but I’ve included a snapshot here for you to see how our weekend progressed. Now remember, this is going to look different for everyone, but I thought the examples from my business might be helpful to get you thinking about areas in your own business that might need some cleaning up.

FRIDAY AFTERNOON/EVENING

  • Agenda
    We worked on our agenda during the 2-hour drive to Palm Springs. It’s important to have a clear game-plan before you arrive at your destination, so you can get right to work. While we laid our agenda out in detail, we allowed ourselves the flexibility to change and pivot as necessary throughout the weekend.
  • Calendars
    We cleaned up my calendar bigtime! I’m a big fan of the “no train” but for some reason I lost my way over the last few months and had said “yes” to too much. Because of this, I was missing important deadlines in my business because my calendar was too full. This also meant that I was working nights and weekends and that is something I am trying not to do.

SATURDAY MORNING

Fresh and ready for a new day, we cleaned up our elaborate evergreen funnel system inside InfusionSoft. Because we’ve been at this for awhile, parts of our funnels were broken. Let me just tell you that this part was NOT fun!! But, you know what, I’m glad we knocked it out early in the weekend. : )

SATURDAY AFTERNOON - THIS WAS THE FUN PART FOR ME!!

  • We talked about the projects we were going to work on moving forward and who was going to work on what.
  • We also talked about what projects we needed to put on the back burner or eliminate completely. In this episode I talk about a big decision we made in switching up something that one of my team members was working on.

SUNDAY MORNING

  • Wrapped up any loose ends and headed back home. (I didn’t do it this time, but next time I’m definitely scheduling massages for me and Chloe to enjoy before we leave.)

MY TOP TOTAL IMMERSION WEEKEND TIPS

I believe a total immersion weekend retreat like this is critical to the success of your business. Step away from your everyday distractions and you won’t regret it! Here are some tips for you to consider when you go on your retreat:

  • Choose a destination you enjoy and that inspires you. It doesn’t have to be fancy or expensive, but if you’re at a place in your business where you can splurge a little, go for it!
  • Just know that your days are going to be long. We worked hard, but it was so worth it!
  • Change up your environment so you don’t go stir crazy. We found fun little places around the hotel property to work throughout the weekend: the beautiful lobby, our hotel room, and we even knocked out a couple of hours of work from the bar while sipping on a refreshing margarita!
  • Take time to eat, drink lots of water, get some fresh air, take walks, and get 7-8 hours of sleep each night.
  • Let your family know that this time away will be focused on work and that you will not be available much throughout the weekend. It’s very important to limit distractions in order to make the most of your time away, and by stating this up front you will make sure no one at home is feeling neglected!
  • Keep a Google Doc noting the big decisions that you’ve made over the weekend and any team communication you want to relay when you return.
  • Get all those action items moved into your project management tool. Chloe always says, “If it’s not in Asana, it’s not happening!”
  • Don’t forget to have a little fun, too! You’re going to be working really hard, so I suggest you treat yourself to a massage or some sort of simple pleasure at the end of your weekend.
  • Upon your return, have a meeting with your team or individual team members to fill them in on some of the decisions you made or changes that may be coming down the pipeline.
  • Repeat your total immersion retreat weekend on a quarterly basis!

So what do you think? Are you ready to book a total immersion weekend retreat to clean up the messy parts in your business? I hope you said “yes!” because this is an investment that you won’t regret! If you’ve decided to go for it, pick where you’ll go and book it in the next 48 hours, and when you do, head over to Instagram and DM me to let me know when and where you’re going!

This episode is brought to you by Audible where you too can listen to the book I mentioned that I’m loving right now: High Performance Habits by Brendon Burchard, for FREE! Members of my audience get a FREE audiobook download and 30-day free trial at www.audibletrial.com/OMME

Aug 02, 2018
Million Dollar Club Student Spotlight with Anna Digilio
26:19
HOW WEBINARS, CREATING A COURSE, AND A MEMBERSHIP SITE CHANGED THIS TEACHER’S LIFE IN A HUGE WAY!

I'm always in awe when one of my students shares with me how they’ve built their million dollar businesses. Anna’s story is one of my favorites and I wanted her to share it with you as well!

Anna spent 23 years as a second grade teacher but decided she wanted to make an impact on the education community in a bigger way. This decision to shift her focus led her to my programs and she dove right in, taking action after action until things clicked! She made $10k on her very FIRST webinar and she's NEVER TURNED BACK.

You won’t want to miss Anna’s incredible story as she shares her journey to success. She shares the specific steps (and consistent action) she took from making that first $10k selling 2nd grade course curriculum, to creating a membership site for teachers that brings in almost $60k per month, to her latest venture, a course that teaches teachers how to teach guided-math, which at the time of this recording had only been live three weeks and she’d already made $35,000! That’s an entire year’s earnings for some teachers!

TWO MISTAKES TO AVOID WHEN GROWING YOUR ONLINE BUSINESS

And to wrap it up, Anna shares the two things she would do differently had she known back then what she knows now. I 100% agree with both, so do yourself a favor and take what she says and don’t let those mistakes slow you down from the impact you are destined to make!

Alright, if you’ve gotten this far and haven’t listened in to the podcast yet, what are you waiting for? : ) I promise you, you’ll be inspired by Anna’s story and fall in love with her just like I did!

If you’d prefer to watch the interview, enjoy that right here...

This episode is sponsored by my free master class, “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days” If you’ve been thinking about creating an online course, or if you’ve had a course idea for awhile but you are just not sure how to get started, this free master class is for you.

Jul 31, 2018
#221: How to Create a 3-Month SEO Plan with Neil Patel
54:48

Neil Patel, master marketer and SEO genius, joined me on my show today to dive into the the nuts-and-bolts of some simple SEO strategies that will bring you more traffic, conversions, and revenue! He walks us through a 3-month plan that I’ve broken down for you in a free guide that you can grab right here.

I have to admit, I haven’t spent as much time or attention as I should on SEO strategies, but that’s all changed this year...my team and I are being intentional about learning more about SEO and we’re going to implement the plan that Neil shared with us today, too!

IT’S NOT ROCKET SCIENCE

One thing that Neil dispelled immediately is the fear that so many of us have around the idea of SEO strategy, and that is, that SEO is too complicated and we’ll never understand what exactly to do!

Here’s what he had to say about that:

“SEO is not rocket science...it’s not hard, and as long as you follow this plan, which is broken down into three main steps, you should get results.”

And let me tell you the plan is not complicated...it’s very doable and this guide is going to help!

WHAT IS SEO AND WHY SHOULD I HAVE AN SEO STRATEGY?

SEO stands for Search Engine Optimization and Neil explained that it’s really all about making your site compatible for search engines. Now of course we create our content for our audience to enjoy and find useful, but we need to understand the importance of making our content compatible for BOTH users AND search engines.

HOW SEO WILL INCREASE TRAFFIC, CONVERSIONS AND REVENUE

As an entrepreneur, you likely have a strong “why” behind what you’re doing online, but the bottom-line is that you want more people to see or listen to your content, you want to turn followers into customers, and you want to earn a living doing what you love to do. One way to accomplish this is to develop an SEO plan that has the ability to give you these tangible results.

And that’s exactly what Neil shared in today’s show! He broke down exactly what you need to do in order to get a really good, simple SEO strategy running on your website.

THE 3-MONTH SEO PLAN

I’ve outlined some of the key points Neil made in the interview here, but for the step-by-step plan download your free 3-Month SEO Guide here.

MONTH 1 - Research & Competitor Analysis

With SEO you may not see results for several months so you want to make sure you are going after the right keywords. Neil explained that if you’re not figuring out what keywords you should be using in your content, you might be getting traffic, but it’s NOT traffic that will turn into customers.

I’ve linked up to the keyword research tools that Neil recommends (below), but you’re going to want to listen in to today’s show for the JUICY hack he shared about using SEMrush to look up your competitor’s keywords as a guide in your research...it’s like he handed us a little piece of gold!!

MONTH 2 - Optimize Your On Page Code and Building Content

So, you’re probably wondering what “on page” means! I was too. : )

In simple terms, Google reads source codes (not the language you and I speak or read!) so it’s our job to make sure Google can read our websites so that we can rank in its searches.

The good news is that if you have a Wordpress website with the free Yoast SEO plugin installed it will handle most of the on-page SEO stuff for you. It basically walks you through the steps (in a very user friendly way) to make sure Google can read your pages.

Neil also discussed the importance of building quality content on a consistent basis on your blog. You’ve gotta have a place to use that keyword research from month-one research, right? Here are a few pointers Neil suggests you implement when you write your blog posts/articles:

  • Write in a conversational tone
  • Create thorough content (NOT short)
  • Use sub-headings
  • Keep paragraphs short
  • Use images
  • Wrap up your blog posts with a summary conclusion
  • End your conclusion with a question

MONTH 3 - Building Links and Getting Social Shares

Links from other people’s sites to yours (backlinks) can be a big SEO boost. Google loves seeing links, but not just any links! Google is so smart that it knows the authority and relevance of where those links are coming from. I know! It’s scary how smart Google is!

Anyway, obviously if you are linked to from a very well-known authority in your field, versus someone who themselves doesn’t have much authority or who doesn’t have much to do with your field, then who is Google going to give more credibility to? The well-known authority who is sharing relevant content with their audience via a link to your content, of course!

Part of Neil’s three-month plan also includes a great strategy for gaining social shares to your content. While social sharing will not directly affect your SEO, it sure will indirectly. Social sharing builds social proof, which ultimately builds awareness and your authority.

Make sure to grab your free 3-Month SEO Guide right here, to learn all about Neil’s technique for getting social shares through Buzzsumo.

I hope you listened to the episode because Neil broke all of this down in such an easy to understand and doable fashion. But let’s not leave it at that...I want you to put this plan in action. Here what I’d love for you to do right now:

  • Print out the 3-Month SEO Guide
  • Schedule time in your calendar to implement the steps in the plan. Remember to be non-negotiable with the time you block out.
  • Join my OMME Podcast Facebook group so that we can share our SEO successes in a few months. See you there!

This episode is brought to you by:

Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

Jul 26, 2018
#220: Your Summer Listening Playlist (Strategy, Inspiration and Biz Insights!)
29:10

One thing I love about summer is having a little bit more downtime. This allows me to do some things that I might not always have time for at other times of the year like binge listening to my favorite podcasts.

That usually only happens while on vacation. As a matter of fact, I’m just back from a family vacation in Hawaii and I totally binge listened to a couple of my fave podcasts, The Life Coach School with Brooke Castillo and Oprah’s Super Soul Conversations. They are both soooo good!  

So if you too find the opportunity for a little binge listening, I thought it would be fun to compile a Summer Listening Playlist for you as it relates to my favorite past Online Marketing Made Easy episodes.

What made this episode extra special for me was to have some of my listeners submit their favorite episodes as well. (I’ve included audio messages from them directly in today’s show!) Let’s dive in!

YOUR ONLINE MARKETING MADE EASY SUMMER LISTENING PLAYLIST
TOP FIVE LISTENER FAVORITES
  1. Both Michelle from Canada and Sarah from Denmark are fellow megabatching lovers and they recommend episode #182: How To Mega-Batch Your Content. My productivity has skyrocketed since I began mega-batching in my business.  
  2. Lyndsey from Asheville, NC (hello Blue Ridge Mountains!) recommends you listen to an episode that helped her to grow her email subscriber list to 50,000 in just one year: Episode #99: How to Build a List-Building Blitz Campaign. Make sure to listen to her audio message in today’s show, she has some great insight on the one thing in episode #99 that made all the difference in her list growth!  
  3. Molly from Oregon actually has three favorites to share:
    Episode #149: Your 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint (she really loved the freebie in this episode and if you like a detailed blueprint, so will you!)
    Episode #150: [Case Study] How to Turn a Pre-Launch Strategy Into a Wildly Profitable Online Launch (This episode is a follow up to episode 149 and will show you what the pre-launch strategy looks like in the real world.)
    Episode #209: The Surprising Journey of Launching a Physical Product with Lara Casey - I love hearing that Molly learned about a resource in this episode that saved her TONS of money in the production of her own physical product!
  4. Gregory from Nashville, TN (you’ve got to tune in to hear his awesome southern accent!) is a fan of the DIY approach and recommends you listen to episode #171: DIYing Your Business: 5 Areas to Focus On When You’re Just Starting Out - I was so happy to hear that Gregory said that this episode really gave him clarity to begin to build his brand and his online business. I’m definitely specific in this episode about what you should and should not be delegating in your business when you’re first starting out.
  5. For the 5th spot of my listener favorites list, I had to include a double-whammy because both of the recommendations are so good! Also, I just love how so many parts of the world are represented in the show today!
  • All the way from Perth in Western Australia, Neda shares her favorite episode #201: 5 Ways to Make Money (Without Using Webinars). - I love how Neda said this helped her combine her previous experience with what she’s doing now to make more money in her business.
  • And finally, from May in Oslo, Norway! May loves how episode #206: Post-it Note Content Creation Mini-Training contains a content creation process that’s easy to take action on! May, you are not alone...I had so much great feedback (and pictures of people’s Post-it Note creations) from this episode!  

I absolutely LOVED hearing from so many of my listeners and how their favorite episodes of Online Marketing Made Easy have helped move their businesses forward!  

Moving on to my own personal recommendations for your Summer Listening Playlist...

AMY’S TOP FIVE FAVORITES
  1. I absolutely loved episode #147 with Marie Forleo: How to Ask Better Questions and Get Better Business Results. Limiting beliefs and negative self-talk are a HUGE problem in the entrepreneurial field, and may be holding you back from achieving the success you want and deserve. This episode will help you to move forward with confidence!   
  2. Next up is episode #203: How to Get Noticed When You’re Just Starting Out. Are you seeing a theme here? My next recommendation is another on mindset! The online world can be a noisy place, but it’s the way you think that will really set you apart. I’m all about helping you reset your mindset around business and being an entrepreneur, and this episode will do just that!
  3. My next pick is a super strategic one: Episode #164: Free Content vs. Paid Content (What’s the Difference?) In this episode I talk about the #1 question I get ALL the time. I actually created this episode so I could have a place to direct people when I get asked this question and it’s one of my most downloaded episodes to date!
  4. Did you think I wouldn’t mention the first time my sweet husband Hobie joined me on the mic? In #161: Love & Business: How to Make it Work. Being an entrepreneur can be tough, but how about being married to one? This is an excellent listen for all those couples out there. P.S. Since then I recorded another episode with Hobie (#207: 20 Questions (Rapid Fire Style!) with Special Guest Interviewer, Hobie Porterfield which was super fun, too!
  5. The last episode that I’m going to recommend for you is one that is actually airing a couple weeks after this episode, so you’ll have to wait for it if you’re reading this before August 2, 2018. In episode #222: How to Create A "Total Immersion Weekend Retreat" to Clean Up Your Messy Business I talk about a weekend retreat I took recently with my Integrator, Chloe, in which we focused on cleaning up the messy stuff in our business. I want you to listen to this episode so you can get a behind-the-scenes peek at something that can be a complete game-changer for your business.   

So there you have it - you’ve got a nice summer playlist to tune into! I’m guessing there may have been one or two recommendations that really resonated with you and I want you to commit to listening to those in the next 24 hours.

If your favorite episode wasn’t mentioned here today, I’d love to hear from you! Head over to Instagram and DM me what your favorite is and why.  

This episode is brought to you by my free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan” -- My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm). If you are struggling to get started with building your list OR if you are not attracting new subscribers to your list every single day, this is the free master class for you.

Jul 19, 2018
#219: How to Use Instagram Stories to Grow Your Email List with Tyler McCall
57:21

Today you’re going to learn how to use one of the fastest growing social platforms, Instagram Stories, to build your email list, without using the Swipe Up feature.  

I don't know about you, but Instagram is by far my favorite social media platform. Mostly because I love Instagram Stories but also because I think the connections on Instagram feel more real than any other social platform.

If you are on Instagram then you've probably either recorded an Instagram story yourself, viewed one--or several (they are completely addictive), or you've heard someone else talk about Instagram Stories and you weren't really sure what the heck they were talking about.

Wherever you fall in this equation, there's one thing that is certain...you as a business owner, should be using Instagram Stories to create more solid, real connections that will, if you do it right, go far beyond just chatting on social media.

I had the pleasure of interviewing Tyler J. McCall, an Instagram Marketing Strategist, who has found great success in growing his email list through Instagram Stories. He shared tons of valuable insight, tips and strategies that you will be able to implement starting today!  And, don’t worry, as I mentioned earlier this strategy has nothing to do with the Swipe Up feature, which requires you have 10,000 followers to use.

So whether you’re familiar with Instagram Stories or not, we’ve got you covered here! Let’s first dive into the basics around Instagram Stories and then we’ll go ALL in on strategies to grow your email list via this platform!  

WHAT IS AN INSTAGRAM STORY?

An Instagram Story is content that is shared in Instagram itself, typically photos and videos, but you can also share text-based images. Your photos or graphics last six seconds while your videos can be up to 15 seconds long. You create the Story content using Instagram (the creation and editing tools are built right in), or you can create them externally and upload them to your Instagram account.  

How Stories are different than a post in your regular Instagram feed is that the content goes away after 24 hours unless you add it as an Instagram Story highlight in your profile, which is a whole different episode!

WHY YOU SHOULD BE USING INSTAGRAM STORIES IN YOUR BUSINESS:

Instagram now has over 800 million users. Of those, 500 million are on the app every day. And of those 500 million, 300 million are on Instagram Stories every day. Need I say more?!?

Tyler tells us that Instagram Stories are taking over as the content of choice, and Instagram likes this, because it gives them another place to run ads.  And as business owners, Instagram ads are a very powerful tool, as well. And let me tell you, Instagram Story ads are converting really well for my business right now!

“There are now millions of people every single day waiting for the right content to show up for them on Instagram Stories” - Tyler J. McCall

How to Create High Quality Instagram Stories

In order to grow your email list through Instagram Stories (we’ll get to that strategy in a minute), you first need to know how to create high quality Instagram Stories that people want to watch. Here’s a quick rundown, but make sure to tune in to the episode for all the details!

  1. Create your Stories with purpose and intention
  2. Use a good mix of personal and business (Tyler shares information about his business in his Stories, but he also shares his shopping trips to Target! Yes, he loves to walk the aisles and point out some of his favorite products!)
  3. Utilize a beginning, middle, and an end to your Story. Just like your elementary school teacher taught you! Download this great 2-page worksheet “The Story Arc Method” to work through an exercise Tyler put together for you to up your Instagram Story game!
  4. “Never let the dashes turn into dots!” I love how Tyler put this, regarding being careful to not create painfully long Stories.  
  5. I asked Tyler how he always has AMAZING light for his Stories and he shared two tips that money can’t buy!!
  6. Use captioning in your Stories for people who want to consume your content but don’t use audio. Tyler said that this technique will help keep retention high, too.
  7. Drive interaction with Instagram features like polls and DM conversations. Engage with your followers!
How to Grow Your Email List Using Instagram Stories Without Using the Swipe Up Feature

Ok, now that you have a plan to create high quality Instagram Stories, Tyler shared some really great insight as to how to grow your email list through a Direct Messaging strategy. Since Tyler has over 10,000 followers he is able to utilize the Swipe Up feature available in Stories, but he admits he doesn’t use it much because he thinks it’s a bit lazy and too passive!

Growing your email list through Instagram is all about Instagram Story Direct Messaging!

It’s through this DMing that he’s able to directly communicate with his followers, build relationships, hear pain points directly from his potential customers mouth, and engage in an authentic way.

Here are a few of the important habits Tyler suggests you build around Instagram Story DM engagement in order to be in a position where you can actually grow your email list:

  • Show up consistently
  • Make sure your content is high quality
  • Use calls to action in your Stories (from asking your followers to answer simple questions, respond to polls, and finally to respond to your invitation for them to learn more about what you’re doing or to gain access to an opt-in offering.)
  • Once you’ve engaged them, keep the conversation going,...see how you can help them
  • Post in the regular feed less often, so you can spend more time in Stories (you saw the stats, this is where the people are!)

Do these things and the opt-in opportunities that you offer your followers (the ones that keep coming back to watch your Stories) will put you in a prime position to grow your email list. Tyler’s DM conversions are huge!  

Listen in as Tyler shares a system which he calls -- An Instagram Story Opt-In Sandwich -- in which you guide your Story viewers through a journey that ultimately leads them to your lead magnet, content upgrade, or webinar via DM conversations.

I, too, have recently using my DMs to engage with my followers, and it is powerful! The only problem is that it can be time-consuming --- time well spent, but time-consuming, nonetheless.

Since Tyler gets A LOT of DMs, I asked him how he manages it all and one of the top tips he shared is to get in there a few times throughout the day so you are responding pretty quickly, and also so the DMs don’t pile up and become too overwhelming for you to respond to.

I’ve found that it’s helpful for me to actually create a task in Asana (my project management tool), to check my DMs daily, and that’s working well at this point.

So here’s what I want you to do, download and work through this 2-page worksheet that Tyler created for you and don’t spend another minute on Instagram without intention and purpose.

A great big thank you to Tyler for providing such great step-by-step teaching in this interview!

Tyler and I would both love to hear from you in our DMs! I’m @amyporterfield and he’s @tylerjmccall.

All my best,

Amy

This episode is brought to you by: LBL

Links to things I think you might be interested in that were mentioned in these show notes and on the podcast episode:

 

Jul 12, 2018
#218: 7 Steps to Pre-Selling Your Course
32:20

As an entrepreneur, your business is constantly changing—that’s the beauty of being an entrepreneur.  

And here’s the thing: YOU change too. You change your mind about things you used to be adamant about.

I’ve experienced this myself. For example, when it came to creating courses, five years ago I would have said: Concentrate on building your course, don’t worry about the selling.

But since then I have had a change of heart.

I’ve watched my students inside of my training program Courses That Convert, and I’ve seen a need that I did not see years ago. That need is around launching their course before they have 100% completed it.

Now I talk about the benefits of pre-selling your course, or selling it in advance of the course being done, then delivering your content each week via a LIVE workshop to a group of founding members who have already paid.

So this episode is going to walk you through the exact steps that go into pre-selling a course. I am going to walk you through the pieces you’ll need to make your offer, get your first students through the door, and deliver your content.

There are a few reasons I like this strategy:

 

  • #1: Pre-selling is a big validator of your course idea.

 

  • #2: Pre-selling helps you build confidence about your training. Nothing builds confidence more than getting a few PAYING students through the door.
  • #3: Pre-selling helps with cash flow! I know that building a course and getting your online course up and running can sometimes be a bit of a pinch on your finances. That’s why pre-selling is great—to bring in a bit of money to help you pay for some of those expenses.
  • #4: Pre-selling helps you build momentum and accountability. By selling before your content has been created, you have no choice but to deliver! This helps you avoid the “it’s been a year and my course is still languishing” syndrome!
  • #5: Lastly, you get immediate feedback from actual students when you pre-sell. Since it’s more of a live interaction, you can tweak your content based on the feedback before you launch again.

By the way, this episode was brought to you by Courses that Convert…I teach a much more robust version of this process in that course, with step-by-step plans and templates. Learn more by attending my free masterclass “How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.

So if you’re as excited as I am about pre-selling your course, here are seven steps to get you started.

The 7 Steps to Pre-Selling Your Course

Step 1: Determine Your Course Offer

First, you will determine your pricing and what kind of “course package” you’ll be offering.

Step 2: Set Up Your Early Interest Page

Once you figure out your offer, it’s time to set a page where you can capture interest about your course. You’ll need to create an opt-in to collect first names and email addresses, and include a teaser about what they can expect. You’ll also want to create a follow-up email for everyone who opted in.

Step 3: Create Your 30-Day Content Blitz

Come up with content ideas for your blog, podcast, Facebook Lives, etc., and then schedule your content so you’re releasing something new every week for 30 days. Remember to include a call to action at the end of your content, asking your audience to sign up for the course if they want to learn more. (All traffic from this content will go to your Early Interest Page.)

Step 4: Set Up Your Checkout Page

This page should include information about your course such as the benefits and the features.

Step 5: Set Up Your Live Workshop Components

In this step you will want to create the shell of your member’s site so when you start delivering your content you have a place to load it.

You’ll also need to determine the details of your training and decide on the platform you’ll be delivering it.

Set up all the components you’ll need to ultimately deliver your live content—links, welcome emails, a VA, etc.—so that you’re ready to go. As you deliver your live content, you will load up your recordings into your course platform for your paying members to access.

Step 6: Promote a 48-Hour Flash Sale Offer

Your 48-hour flash sale offer will include two emails:

  1. The first is sent to your Early Interest list and informs them of your limited time offer, what’s included in the program, the number of spots available, and a link to your checkout page.
  2. Your second email gives them one more chance to sign up.

In this step, you also have the option to include a webinar training as part of your pre-sell strategy.

Step 7: Deliver Your Content

You’re now done with the selling portion of your pre-sell offer. All that’s left is delivering your content!

Remember to create your slide decks, prepare any cheat sheets or other bonuses, remind your students before each new training, and then upload your content to your member’s site once you’re done delivering it.

Links mentioned in this episode:

Course Creation Resources:

Episode #49: How to Know if Your Idea is Profitable
Episode #107: How Do I Price My Online Course?
Episode #133: How to Get Unstuck in Your Course Creation Process
Episode #206: The Post-It Content Creation Mini Training

Webinar Resources:

Episode #130: How to Sell on a Webinar (Without Being Overly Salesy)
Episode #145: 13 Questions to Nail Down Your Winning Webinar Topic and Title
Episode #211: 5 Things I Said Yes to In The Early Years (But Say No to Now)


Jul 05, 2018
#217: Why You Aren’t Taking Action with Brooke Castillo
41:38

Today we’re going to discover something that has the power to majorly change the trajectory of your business! We’re going to uncover the three main roadblocks that sideline many entrepreneurs (and people in general) and cause them to get stuck in inaction. You will learn specific ways to take massive action, get more done, and get those big results you desire.

“Taking action...” seems easy enough, right?  “Just do something!” As you and I both know, it’s not as easy as it sounds!

If right now what you’re doing in your business is not leading you to the results you desire, then this episode is for you!

To shed some light on WHY we’re not taking action and to help us understand how to turn that around and become massive action takers, I had the pleasure of interviewing Brooke Castillo. Brooke is a Life Coach—I actually call her a Life Coach Extraordinaire— who has worked with thousands of people (including yours truly) who have been stuck, are not reaching the goals they’ve envisioned for themselves, or ultimately just need a coach to shine some light on a path that can lead them to the promised land of getting a lot done and achieving big results.

Quick note before we move on: I mention that I’ve worked with Brooke personally; I get more into it on the podcast, but in case you were wondering, I’m part of her Self-Coaching Scholars program. You know I’m on a mission to up-level my life, including my health and my weight, but I’m also on a mission to up-level my mind, and Brooke really gets into this in her program. I know that focusing on how I think about things will change both my personal and business life, and I believe it could do the same for you. Because I stand behind what Brooke does, I have become an affiliate for the program, so if you are interested in joining her program, too, click here, and let Brooke know I sent you!

MANAGING YOUR MIND

Brooke began with the idea that so much of starting and building a business is about managing your mind.  She said, “There's no way around it, because you can understand how to do everything, you can study all the material, but until you understand that what you think about is going to create the emotion that either drives the action or the inaction, you're never gonna take the action.”

Did you get that? This is important: What you think about creates the emotion that drives the action or inaction.  If stress, fear and panic are fueling the action, you’re not going to be able to produce results at the level you want to produce.

Brooke shared three entrepreneurial roadblocks—things that are keeping you from taking massive action.   

Reason #1: YOU’RE STUCK IN THE BUSY HUSTLE

I can remember times, back when I was first starting out, when I was hustling my butt off. I was all over the place, connecting with different people, working with all kinds of clients, seemingly very successful—but the problem was, I wasn’t taking action on the things that could actually take me to a place where I could grow and scale my business. I was hustling. I was tired. But, to some degree, I was really just chasing my tail.

This is what Brooke refers to as “The Busy Hustle”—a tiring hustle that’s produced by negative emotion: stress, fear, panic…[Insert your own word here!].  

You want to avoid getting into a state of busy hustle, where you may be working hard yet aren’t producing anything. Instead your goal should be to get to a place of a productive hustle, where results are consistently produced.

Brooke suggested if you want to produce something, don’t just sit down to “work on something.” Sit down to produce something!

It’s important to change our language around this. Let’s stop saying, “I’m working on so and so,” and instead say, “I’m producing xyz,” or “I’m recording a podcast.” See the difference?!  

Reason #2: YOU’RE GIVING YOURSELF TOO MUCH TIME TO GET SOMETHING DONE

Brooke believes that many people, especially those who are newer to business, give themselves too much time to produce a result. In the beginning you have more time than customers or clients, so you just expand the time you are “working” in your business. Yet while you may  have the time, what you actually produce doesn’t line up with the many hours you’re working.

Brooke suggests we take a look at the projects we need to get done, and assign a time frame in which we will get it done. For example: instead of my saying, “I’ll get the podcast recorded and uploaded to Dropbox by Wednesday”, Brooke would say, “I will have the podcast recorded and uploaded to Dropbox in one hour. I’ll sit down and get it done in that hour.”  

Of course you need to be realistic about time frames….some things are going to naturally take longer than others.    

And what sort of results will be produced if we go this route? Brooke says, “When you decide how long something will take and you stick to that, that’s when your production gets huge momentum.”  

Now for my fellow perfectionists out there: this can be tough, because you’re going to have to embrace the fact that you might produce some B-minus work. I know that’s hard to stomach! Brooke had to give me a little life-coaching during the episode, because I am not someone who got Bs in school!

Brooke’s argument for producing B-minus work is this: “B-minus work can change people’s lives. Work that you don’t produce at all, does nothing in the world.”  

Brooke told a great story about producing B-minus work on a book she wrote, about how she got some negative feedback which caused her some real shame and embarrassment; but a letter she received from someone whose life was changed because of that B-minus book made her realize that had she declined to put out that work in favor of striving for an A-plus, that woman’s life would never have been affected. That was when Brooke decided that she was ok with B-minus work—because she knew it would still produce results.

You’ll have to decide for yourself as to what level work you are ok with; but for Brooke, making this decision made a HUGE difference in her business, and because of that decision, she has reached epic levels of success.

Reason #3: YOU’RE AVOIDING FAILURE AND DISCOMFORT

Of course, no one loves failure and discomfort; but the truth is, if we’re going to learn and grow, there are going to be moments of failure and times where we will need to step outside of our comfort zone.

Brooke explained that our brains are literally wired to avoid any kind of failure, and the only way to produce a successful business is to fail repeatedly. So what do we do?!

We have to show our brains that we are not going to die because of discomfort and failure. We need to learn the process to move into discomfort, and then get comfortable with that discomfort.

“Discomfort is the currency to your dreams.” - Brooke Castillo

But discomfort is only part of the road to success for business owners. I love that Brooke shared that she schedules “Comfort-Time” in her week! This time is non-negotiable, and she schedules it in her calendar before anything else. Her comfort-time is comprised of walking her dogs, enjoying coffee and reading in the morning, and spending time with family.  

What would be the activities or non-activities that you’d have in your comfort-time? Schedule it in!  And remember: this time is non-negotiable. Agreed? Work hard, play hard! : )

If you’re reading this and have not listened to the episode yet, I highly recommend you do. Brooke gives some great examples, insights, and encouragement that you’ll only hear by tuning in. Plus, Brooke is so fun! I guarantee you’ll not only learn a ton, but will enjoy a few laughs while listening to this episode, too!

Thanks for spending time with me today!

All my best,

Amy

Links to things I think you might be interested in that were mentioned in these show notes and on the podcast episode:

 

Jun 28, 2018
#216: Why Courses Flop, And How To Turn “Failure” Into Opportunity
27:57

 

I’m the first person to admit when I’ve made a mistake.

But I can promise you this, when it happens: I learn something new every time.

Inside my private Facebook group for all of my students, my students often ask me to troubleshoot their challenges with launching their courses. Our FB Live chats and their questions inspired me to create this specific podcast episode for all of you. Based on my experiences with thousands of students, I’ve uncovered five core reasons why most online courses fail. My goal is to help make sure you don’t make these mistakes, and if you do, I want you to be able to learn from them and turn them into opportunities.

In this episode I also talk about the importance of a validation blitz, and knowing all about your potential student’s hopes and fears, and what may be holding them back. I go into step-by-step detail about how to conduct a validation blitz in my Courses That Convert Program. You can learn more about that program and how to get started with an online course with my free Masterclass—“How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.” It’s a fun and comprehensive training that will help you get well on your way to creating your first training!

Also: if you've experienced any of these mistakes or if you've made a big mistake that I haven't mentioned here, I want you to come over to Instagram and DM me.

Check out these highlights:

  • Why your ideal customer avatar needs to be top of mind at all times. [3:48]
  • I changed my mind on pre-selling, and you need to also. [8:25]
  • The four things to do to make sure you get to the finish line with your course. [12:43]
  • What to consider instead of signature courses. [14:42]
  • How I had to enlist a colleague to keep me in check and keep out the fluff. [17:34]
  • The best online courses are taught by the best teachers. What you need to do to become an engaging teacher. [20:40]

Links mentioned in this episode:

Episode #206: “The Post-It Content Creation Mini Training”

 

 

Jun 21, 2018
#215: Creating Multiple Streams of Revenue in Your Business with Jennifer Allwood
41:34

As entrepreneurs, creating multiple streams of revenue should be our goal. After being laid off from a software development company in the year 2000, today’s guest, Jennifer Allwood,  discovered firsthand how using her creativity and passion could create not one, but six different revenue streams in her business.

One of the things I love most about being an entrepreneur is how we are able to use our passions and creativity to build a business that has many layers to it—and Jennifer has done just that!

So whether you are just starting out building your online business or are already doing amazing things but looking to up-level, you’re going to find lots of inspiration and actionable tips in this interview!

Never Say Never

Jennifer’s first foray into an online business revenue stream was through creating and selling a handful of short videos teaching people how to do fun DIY painting techniques on cabinets and furniture. After just a year, she had earned six figures...from simple painting videos!  

Jennifer was at first confounded to discover she could sell stuff that could be easily found online for free via YouTube videos; yet she also came to understand that people will pay for shortcuts, and they prefer to pay for something from someone they know, like and trust, rather than go searching for something on their own.

That was the beginning of her online business journey. In the years since, she has launched a couple membership sites, teaches others how to run their online businesses, is writing a book, and is enjoying engaging with her nearly half-million online social media followers.

Jennifer admits that even just five years ago she would never have dreamed she would be where she is today! Let this be a lesson to all of us!   

It’s Not About Working Harder: It’s Working Smarter That Makes The Difference

Jennifer works mostly with creatives: painters, artists, makers, DIYers, and repurposers. She says these type of entrepreneurs have a hard time getting past the idea that they don’t always have to trade time for dollars; yet Jennifer teaches them they can share their gifts in a new way by adding revenue streams to their business. The opportunities she identified (which can work for anyone with an online business) are:

  • Info products – ebooks, ecourses, webinars, etc.
  • Affiliate income
  • Sponsored content
  • Membership site
  • Ad revenue
  • Brand ambassadorship
  • Consulting
  • Speaking

Where to Start?

If you are just beginning your online journey, Jennifer suggests you begin with something on the simpler side. Test the waters first, to see what you enjoy doing and what works. She highlighted some great examples from the list above that I hope will inspire you with some new ideas!

What I loved about talking to Jennifer was seeing how strategic she was—even from the beginning, when she didn’t even realize she was being strategic!

If you tuned in and listened to today’s episode, I hope you were as inspired by Jennifer’s story as I was. She was following her passion. She was hustling. She was doing what she needed to do to make things work, and look how it came together for her! I hope the same for you!

This episode is brought to you by:

Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

Jun 14, 2018
#214: The Ultimate Guide to Choosing the Right Lead Magnet for Your Audience
31:31

Most of you already know I’m all about list building.

In fact, one of my favorite mottos is “always be list building.” But not everyone knows that an indispensable element of any successful list-building effort is an effective lead magnet—a freebie—that’ll stand front and center and draw crowds to opt-in.

But then the question becomes:

How do I know which type of lead magnet to create?

That’s why you can’t miss today’s episode! I’m sharing the ultimate guide to choosing the right lead magnet for your audience, covering the seven types of lead magnets I think are working best right now.

And what I’m sharing is not only from my experience. I’ve prepared a bunch of examples of lead magnets from some of my good friends and peers—all of them list building pros—and I’m also covering the pros and cons of each, to help you decide which lead magnets are right for you and your audience.

To make it even easier for you, I’ve prepared a freebie with every one of the examples of lead magnets I’m going to discuss in the episode, so you can hear about them, but also see what I’m talking about as clearly as possible.

This episode is brought to you by:

My free Masterclass, The Ultimate List-Building Catch-Up Plan. If you are struggling to get started with list building or if you're not attracting new subscribers to your email list every single day, this is the free masterclass for you!

Check out these highlights:

  • Why it’s only worth it to look at your conversion rate numbers and not anyone else’s. [3:48]
  • The one lead magnet that’s sure to help your audience get to the finish line easily. [6:08]
  • The type of freebie that’ll get your audience saying, “I can’t believe this is free—I would’ve paid for this.” [10:55]
  • Is there a place for video or audio freebies? [13:33]
  • How about challenges? (You know you want to know how to make these lead magnets work—they’re fun!) [16:49]
  • The quick, easy (for audiences to process) and increasingly popular quiz. [20:17]
  • What kind of free courses you can do and how to get them to work as lead magnets. [24:41]
Jun 07, 2018
#213: 10 Things I'm Embarrassed to Tell You
32:31

My podcast space has always, with a couple exceptions, been a place where I share online marketing tips and strategies...100% my comfort zone! And don’t worry, that’s still my plan for the future episodes, but this year, I’ve made an intentional decision to step out of my comfort zone (or actually maybe a lot with today’s topic!) and let you in on some more behind-the-curtain type personal things. If you listened to episode 210, my 5 Lessons I Learned From Shonda Rhimes, just a few weeks ago, you’ll see where some of the inspiration for this week’s episode came from. For example, speaking my truth was something that I was really inspired to do based on what I learned from Shonda Rhimes, one of my favorite mentors.

Several years ago a well-known podcaster that I love, Jess Lively, shared an episode with her audience with this type of format (I think she called it Things I’m Afraid To Tell You) and the honest and raw truth from that post really hit a chord with her listeners, and I believe that even back then, it created a bit of an “online honesty” movement. She still does these episodes and they’re priceless.

In my opinion, there are far too many people in the online world that have created these “everything is awesome” online personas and it really casts a false light on what’s actually going on behind-the-scenes.

I, for one, don’t want to be looked at by those that follow me as this person that has it all figured out, doesn’t have bad days, doesn’t struggle in both my personal and business life (that’s so far from the truth, it’s laughable.) So, I titled this, “10 Things I’m Embarrassed To Tell You” - and I know I shouldn’t be embarrassed by this stuff, it’s just life stuff -- the real stuff, but when I look at social media, I feel embarrassed because it’s not my highlight reel. Although, as an entrepreneur, I believe that what’s personal is business, and what’s business is personal, and I see my business as my baby. This means the personal and business are bound to blend together, especially with a personal brand, and I wouldn’t be being honest and transparent if I were to just show the highlight reel.

I bet you’d be surprised at how much we have in common when it comes to the types of things that make us feel embarrassed, ashamed, or stupid, but we wouldn’t know it unless we talk about it, right?

Here we go:

1. Sometimes I wonder if Hobie and I made the right decision to not have kids together.

I got married when I was 31 and we thought we would have babies. At that time I had just started building my business and I was incredibly focused. We had a 4-year-old already - Cade (my step-son) was in our life daily - so it felt like I already had a little one. Time flew by, and we just never took the leap and about 3 years ago Hobie got a vasectomy. On the way home from the doctor, I cried -- a lot! But I was just crying because it felt final - I knew I didn’t want to have biological children...so it was just an emotional closing to that piece of our life. I THINK we made the right decision, but sometimes (once in a while) I wish we just took the leap 7 or 8 years ago and went for it. But then at the same moment, I think we made the right decision and that feels fine to me.

2. I work well under pressure so sometimes I let myself wait to the very last minute to finish something, because I know I’ll get it done, however, this causes tremendous stress for my team AND I am not so nice to Hobie in those moments and I hate myself for it.

So, for example, when I’m late getting my slides done for a webinar, and a huge launch is looming over my head, I am super snappy with Hobie. It’s like he can’t even look at me without me saying something that I would regret. It’s the tiny things that set me off because I am stressed and tired. Hobie is a complete champ about it, too, but it’s not fair to him. The reason I’m so embarrassed about this is because I teach people to get stuff done in advance! I’d say 80% of the time I walk the talk, but that other 20% can be NOT fun. Lately, I’ve really been working on not letting anything go until the last minute.

3. I worry about aging because of my online presence.

I hate talking about this one. I am 41 years old...and I see photos of myself when I first started my online business, and I look like a baby compared to now. It’s hard to get older on video...especially when all the old photos never go away online! I wish I subscribed to the “age gracefully” model of thinking, but I don’t. Maybe over time I will, but for now, I am going to fight the battle! So, I pay close attention to my skin: I’m obsessed with LED light and Multi-Wave technology to help stimulate collagen in your skin. Yeah, I do that! Don’t laugh, but it works! I never do this, but I’m going to post links to some of my favorite skincare products below. The ones that I use daily, that I swear by, and that I know are working for anti-aging. I take this stuff seriously! : )

4. I sometimes don't like to tell you that I use a copywriter.

If I do, I’m afraid you’ll feel that you’re not hearing from me directly and then you’ll not feel connected to me. The truth is that I work closely with my copywriters - I have two, Ry and Tarzan, and they’re both really good friends. We text each other a lot, we laugh a lot together, they just get me. They know how I talk, they know how I think, they know my little quirks, and that all comes out in the writing. They actually write like I would write to you if I was really talented in my writing skills. So, yes, I use a copywriter, but it’s still me -- they’re basically an extension of me.

5. I don't always love being the one in the relationship that makes the most money.

It’s too much pressure and creates a weird shift in the relationship. Hobie and I talked about this in episode 161 - Love and Business: How to Make it Work, and he said that he doesn’t like it either. I grew up in a household where the dad went to work and controlled the finances, while the mom stayed home and did the homemaking type stuff...I thought that was how marriage worked. Since my marriage is very different than that model, some of those old beliefs creep in at times and mess with my head.

Also, I sometimes wish Hobie made more money so that if I wanted to take a break, I would have the option to. It’s silly, I know...I really want to make the money and doubt I’d ever actually want to take a big break, but I don’t want to HAVE TO make the money.

6. I’m a fierce competitor and want to be at the top of the charts with my podcast and the #1 affiliate in launches that I do.

I want to win and I really push myself and my team to be on top. The downside of this is that I find myself comparing myself to others that are also in the so-called race and that’s not a good thing to do -- it slows me down and messes up my mental game. Lately, I’ve been asking myself “why?” - why do I want to be at the top? And if I’m honest, it’s my ego more than anything - and that ain't good. So, I’m really examining this area of my mindset and am remembering what I learned from Oprah in the “Making Oprah” podcast: Put blinders on and RUN YOUR OWN RACE!

7. Ok, this next one is super personal …. Growing up I was always afraid of my dad.

He was strict and stern and expected more out of me than I thought was fair. I love him dearly, but he was hard on me. My childhood experiences put some distance between us as I got older. I still have hard feeling about some of my childhood experiences with my dad and I’ve even gone through an EMDR intensive to move past it. (If you don’t know what EMDR therapy is, I’ve linked to it below - it’s incredible and I loved the doctor I did it with, Dr. Mcayla, who I also link to below.)

But beyond my dad and me - here’s the current day truth: Sometimes I see myself being too hard on Cade and I have to pull back because I never want distance between us and I don’t want to make him feel the way I did with my dad.

8. I am embarrassed about my weight and I don’t like to do video because of it.

I talked all about this a few months ago in a 9-minute podcast episode, #179. If you’ve not heard that one, and you like this type of episode, I think you should listen to that one next. I’m bringing up the weight issue here because ever since I did that podcast episode, the feedback from listeners has been amazing. It spoke to so many of you, both men and women, and I’m glad I put aside my embarrassment of talking about it and was honest with you. As for my weight loss journey, things are going well -- slow and steady. I’m making great progress and feeling good and when I have some solid success, I will share the details with you.

9. When I have a big success (like a million dollar launch) I have this weird tinge of guilt thinking I don't totally deserve it - or I struggle with thoughts that it will all go away.

I know it’s about not feeling like I am enough, and let me tell you, it used to be a whole lot worse, but I’m really working on this one because I hate feeling that way. Recently we had an amazingly successful B-School launch and that weird guilt feeling came up for me, but I was able to kill the flame quickly by reminding myself I did deserve it and I am worthy of success. Progress, not perfection, right?!

10. I struggle with letting go, even though I have an awesome team.

I still review every single email before it goes out and I know I need to, and can trust my team, to let go. As I talked about in episode 208, I have an awesome team, and I want them to feel empowered -- they deserve to move things forward without my eye on everything. And if mistakes are made, I need to give grace, because I know that’s how we learn and grow. But man, it’s hard to let go! Especially when everything is in your voice - I am the brand - so I think I hold on a little tighter due to that! But I am working on this one -- baby steps!

So there you have it...a bit of me baring my soul.
The point of this week’s episode was, as I said, for me to be honest about parts of my personal and business life that you might not know about me yet - I really want you to know me. So when you see me out and about in real life, or better yet, come to one of my events in San Diego, you don’t just know the shiny, social media approved side of me. I want you to know all of me - and know that I am just like you in so many ways. That’s when true connections happen… I also really hope that maybe something I said will help you to not feel so alone in what you’re going through, or maybe even encourage you to be more honest and real with your own online community.

And can I just say, Thank you! Thank you for allowing me to feel safe enough to share these types of things here today. I truly love my community -- you all are such a source of encouragement to me!

Have a great day!

May 31, 2018
#212: How to Hit $1M with a List Under 20K with Rick Mulready
58:06

 

Today I’m bringing back one of my favorites, Facebook ads guru, Rick Mulready.

The difference is today I’ve got him nervous—because he’s here to share with you what he’s NEVER shared before…he’s taking you behind the scenes and letting you in on his process of how he got to a million dollars in just one year (!). He’s also talking about how he reached that number with a decent (but not monster-sized) list of 17,000 (which once upon a time was 30,000).

You know I love to talk tips, tricks, and strategies, but I also think it’s important to look at how you are thinking, how you are feeling, what motivates you to make certain decisions and how they actually work for you… which is what Rick is sharing today.

Tips and tricks will only get you so far unless you learn to get your head on straight around everything you’re working on in your business. And Rick is ready to get raw and honest and show you the shifts he made during 2017 and the results these changes had on his life and business. Let’s get all of the scoop.

Check out these highlights:

  • Random moment of the episode: my new sauna (I didn’t bring this up myself, but it’s a fun tidbit to hear). [4:40]
  • The offers Rick made in 2017 to get to a million bucks. [8:20]
  • The issue of quantity vs. quality for your business model. [10:46]
  • How Rick changed the way he was thinking about his own email list size. [13:38]
  • Shifting your mindset from a lack to abundance as it relates to your team. [27:55]
  • Let’s get honest: Are you not growing your team because you’re scared to spend money? [32:29]
  • At some point, you might not make it without a team… [37:55]
  • Rick’s awesome email list re-engagement campaign. [42:07]

Random moment of the episode: my new sauna (I didn’t bring this up myself, but it’s a fun tidbit to hear). [4:40]
The offers Rick made in 2017 to get to a million bucks. [8:20]
The issue of quantity vs. quality for your business model. [10:46]
How Rick changed the way he was thinking about his own email list size. [13:38]
Shifting your mindset from a lack to abundance as it relates to your team. [27:55]
Let’s get honest: Are you not growing your team because you’re scared to spend money? [32:29]
At some point, you might not make it without a team… [37:55]
Rick’s awesome email list re-engagement campaign. [42:07]

May 24, 2018
#211: 5 Things I Said "Yes" To In The Early Years (But Say "No" to Now)
26:46

Today I’m taking a trip down memory lane to my early days—

the first few years when nothing seemed to go as planned and everything that came my way felt like a BIG deal…I’m getting personal and raw and sharing with you what my business looked like when I first started out, the decisions I made to get where I am, and the most significant challenges along the way. (You asked, and I answered!)
More specifically, I’m sharing those things I said “yes” to in the early days—the yeses that got me where I am today, in a multimillion-dollar business with an incredible and engaged audience.

Wherever you are in your own business, you need to know:

The business you have today will look dramatically different a few years from now… but it is the choices you make today—the things you say yes or no to—that will lead you towards where you’ll be tomorrow. And then tomorrow you’ll be able to make different choices, but because you and your business will be in a different place. So here’s a little help to get you to (hopefully) make better decisions...

This episode is brought to you by:
My free Masterclass—“How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days.” If you’re thinking about creating your online course or have been for a while and don’t know how to get started, this free masterclass is for you!

Check out these highlights:

  • The most important question I ask myself every time my business hits a milestone or pivots in some way or another. [2:53]
  • Speaking opportunities—yay or nay? [4:55]
  • The time for sacrifices. [7:06]
  • Trading knowledge and experience. [8:49]
  • What to say to coffee chat invites. [11:58]
  • And how they’re completely different than “Can I Pick Your Brain” invites. [13:13]
  • The right way to collaborate with other people. [17:33]
  • And the right way to have other people collaborate with you! [20:14]
May 16, 2018
#210: 5 Lessons I Learned From Shonda Rhimes
44:08

Shonda Rhimes, the creative powerhouse behind Grey's Anatomy, Scandal, and How to Get Away with Murder, wrote a book a few years ago called Year of Yes that really resonated with me. I’m sharing five takeaway lessons that have impacted my personal and business life in a pretty major way.

First, let me set the scene for you as to why Shonda even wrote this book. Shonda and her sister were in the kitchen getting ready for Thanksgiving dinner way back in 2013, and Shonda was telling her sister about some parties, talk shows, and conferences that she'd been recently invited to, you know, the Hollywood type stuff. She was talking about how she was too busy to do any of it, and without blinking an eye, her sister said something to her that day that became the wake-up call that Shonda needed to transform her “busy life”, and those words were:

Her sister knew that Shonda was hiding behind being too busy to avoid doing things that scared her and would take her out of her comfort zone. Her sister also knew that Shonda had ZERO balance in her life and she was actually miserable. Now, would the outside world have known that she was miserable? No. However, Shonda knew that her sister was telling the truth. She’d been called out and it was the truth.

This brought on an epiphany that something major had to change in her life. She wrote in her book: "This could not possibly be what having it all was supposed to feel like, could it? Because if it was, if this is what I spent all this time and energy working so hard for, if this is what the promised land looked like, what was success ... was what success felt like, was what I sacrificed for ... " And then she trailed off, telling the reader she didn't even wanna go there.

This was her aha moment! And the reason I bring it up here is because I think many of us are working our tails off, hustling to the core, and if we're not careful, we're gonna work ourselves into the ground, and then one day we're gonna pop up and say, "Wait. Was this what I was working so hard for, to feel burned out and overworked and tired?” We’ve got to be really mindful of this. I know we're creating businesses we absolutely love, but just don’t work yourself into the ground, okay?

Before we get into the lessons, I want to ask you two questions:

  • 1. Are you at a place in your life where you’re wondering if all the hard work you’re putting into growing your business is even worth it? Now, hard work is one thing, but being miserable is another. Who wants to bust their butt only to be miserable??
  • 2. Are you ready to make some changes in your life so that you can embrace things that scare you or take you outside your comfort zone? You know, those things that deep down you know would probably make you a happier or more successful person.

With your answer to those questions in mind, let’s dig into the five lessons I learned from Shonda’s book, Year of Yes.

Lesson 1:

In Shonda’s book, she told a story about when she gave a commencement speech a few years ago at her alma mater, Dartmouth. (I’ve included the video for you here, but save that for later when you’re in your pjs and can settle in for 25 minutes.) In her speech she was encouraging the graduating class to be DOers, NOT dreamers. She would say things to them like, “You want to be a writer? Guess what? A writer writes everyday. Start writing.” “You want to travel? Sell your crappy car and buy a ticket and go to Bangkok.”

https://youtu.be/EuHQ6TH60_I

I love this! It’s not that she’s bashing on having dreams, it’s good to dream and have big goals, but if you keep your head up in the clouds, you're going to get nowhere.

Shonda talked about dreaming of being author and Pulitzer Prize winner, Toni Morrison. She said she did a whole lot of dreaming...from her parents’ couch! She then realized, “Wait a minute! Toni Morrison already had that job and she wasn’t interested in giving it up!”

Can you relate?

Have you ever dreamed of being so and so, or having so and so's business? You look at someone else's business online and you think, "I want to be them. I wanna have what they have." It reminds me of that quote, "Be yourself. Everyone else is already taken." Words to live by, right? You've gotta do you!

Now, I've always pretty much been a person that digs in and gets stuff done. I'm definitely a doer. But this lesson about doing instead of just dreaming does keep me motivated and on track in my business. Every single day I take action toward my goals. And if at any time I feel like my head is in the clouds, I've gotta pull it back down and say, "Okay, where's the plan?" And to get really specific, I’d ask myself: Where are the action items for my plan inside Asana?”, the project management tool I use. If I don’t put it in Asana, then I'm just dreaming it.

Where are your action items written down? Your notebook? Your project management tool? Just make sure to get it written down.

Speaking of being actionable and writing stuff down, I’ve got an awesome freebie for you today. There’s an exercise in there that's going to help you take some of these ideas in your head, get them on paper and make them more actionable so that you do more and dream a little bit less.

Lesson 2:

For the record, I'm not going to tell you to find more balance in your life...I feel like that's a cliché. Way easier said than done! But Shonda explains this in a very practical way. In her book, she talks a lot about finding a good personal and professional balance. And when she's talking about it, she not only had a super important big job, but she also had three little ones, and I mean little, at home. I've only got one teenage son, a dog, and a husband, and sometimes I don't even know how I get through it all!

Achieving a perfect balance between work, social, and family is impossible. We all know that right? So perfect should never be your goal. In her book, Shonda dropped a nice little truth bomb when she said, "Whenever you see me somewhere succeeding in one area of my life, that almost certainly means that I am failing in another area of my life." The reason I love this woman so much is because she tells the truth!

What Does Real Life Balance Look Like?

If you’re a Grey's Anatomy fan, then you will never forget Sandra Oh's last scene. It was epic! (Sandra Oh is Christina in Grey's Anatomy.) Anyway, watching that last scene LIVE was of huge importance to Shonda because, for 10 years, she had put her heart and soul into that character, to develop her and to make her the person that she was. So, it was the last hurrah -- this would be Christina’s last scene before going off the show.

SPOILER ALERT: Shonda wasn't there to witness the last scene!

Why? Because guess what else was important at the time? Her kid's school musical that was going on at the same time. She chose her daughter's school musical that day over something incredibly important at work. Now, this is what real life balance looks like. There's not going to be a perfectly easy solution every single time.

She also admitted that if she was working late on a script for one of her shows like Scandal, she'd probably end up missing bath and story time at home, which if you’re a parent, you know that is an important time. So you see, Shonda doesn't always give up the work stuff for the family stuff, she flip-flops back and forth. She found her own sense of balance, and obviously, the choices were not always easy.

As entrepreneurs, we are no doubt living full lives. And to achieve some sort of balance, there's gotta be some give and take. Yes, there will be hard decisions to make, but it's up to us to make daily choices through a balance type of lens that each of us is going to have to individually define. Your balance only needs to make sense in your world. Even if that looks or feels something like you hopping from one foot to the other to maintain that sense of balance, that's okay.

People always ask me how I keep everything in balance and I got a lot of those types of questions when I recently recorded the 20 questions episode with my husband, Hobie. Well, the truth is, I don't do it very well. My goal is to have that balance, but then I also know it's never going to be perfect, and I need to be okay with that. I have to remind myself that I am the only one that defines my balance. I talk about a couple of examples of this with my son and my husband in today’s episode.

Let’s agree that even though we may be a work in progress, we are making progress in this area. I’ve got a good exercise for you in the freebie I mentioned earlier in regards to defining your own balance. I think you’ll find it an empowering exercise!

Lesson 3:

I could've lumped this lesson into the whole lesson about balance, but I'm not going to, because without clearly defining boundaries for yourself, or sometimes for others in your life, you're going to have a hard time creating any sort of balance that truly benefits you. Think of it this way: boundaries are the framework for your very own definition of balance. Boundaries are just the rules or guidelines to what you will or won't do, and what you will or won't allow.

In Shonda’s book, she talks about some of the most important boundaries she put in place during her “year of yes” and I think these may be some of the very boundaries that you, my dear reader, might need to put into place too. I know I’ve had to!

  • No checking or sending emails after 7:00 p.m. Period. Notice she doesn't say 5:00? She's reasonable. She's an entrepreneur.
  • No working on Saturday or Sunday unless there was some sort of emergency or filming where she really needed to be there.
  • Home by 6:00 p.m. for dinner, so she could eat with her kids.
  • She decided that “no” would be a complete sentence. She wasn't going to feel like she had to give excuses for saying no to stuff.
    ****Oh, my goodness, I am notorious for this one! If I say no, then I feel guilty because I'm a people pleaser. This is definitely a boundary I’m working on getting better at.
  • No hot glue gun or no home-baked cookies.

There's a great part in the book about Shonda attending some school meeting, and a room-mom was telling everyone to bring cookies to some event, and that they had to be homemade. Well, Shonda about lost her mind when that came up. She actually blurted out a profanity in voicing her disbelief. Can you imagine? I would kind of die! No one was going to tell her that she couldn't bring Costco cookies. Let's be honest...we all know that Costco cookies are kind of amazing!

Notice that she wasn't saying that she wouldn't bring cookies to the school event. She just wasn't going to stay up late into the night baking. That didn't work for her. And the other scenario of going to buy the cookies, showing up and being there for her kid, that worked.

Believe it or not, when I read some of the boundaries that Shonda had put into place, I actually felt a sense of permission to do the same in my life. Besides working on “no” being a complete sentence, I’ve also decided to try and take Fridays off and not work on the weekends. Some weeks are better than others, but I would say I get it right about 60% of the time. It helps that my team knows this is my intention, too, so they don’t schedule anything for me on Fridays. My task management tool, Asana, that I mentioned earlier, and my Google calendar are real lifesavers in the areas of boundaries, too, because I schedule work and personal and if it’s not in there, I’m not doing it.
I hope that reading some of Shonda’s and my boundaries will help you to feel a sense of permission, or give you some good ideas, too.
Again, my freebie today has a good exercise for you to complete on setting healthy boundaries, as well as taking down those boundaries you may have in place, but that are not serving you well.

Lesson 4:

I know! This totally sounds like an oxymoron, doesn’t it!?

Hold on now, just listen to this nugget of wisdom that Shonda shares about having difficult conversations: “No matter how hard a conversation is, I know that on the other side of that difficult conversation lies peace. Knowledge. An answer delivered. Character is revealed. Truces are formed. Misunderstandings are resolved. Freedom lies across the field of the difficult conversation. And the more difficult the conversation, the greater the freedom.”

Ahhhh….Peace, knowledge, answers, freedom. Can I get an AMEN on having a little more of these in our lives!!

You may be thinking, “Sounds good, Amy, but I hate having difficult conversations and I’d just rather avoid them at all costs!” Believe me, I don’t love having them either! AND, I actually think that as women we struggle with them more than men. Ladies, can we just resolve to fix that?!
The main reason I don’t like to have difficult conversations is that I NEVER, EVER want to hurt someone’s feelings. Yep, I’m a people-pleaser, but I know that’s not healthy, so I’m a bit of a work-in-progress over here! : )

One thing I’ve found is that if I can sort of have a loose “canned plan” in place in the event I end up getting into a difficult conversation. In her book, Shonda gives some really great examples of these type of statements that we can equip ourselves with. These are ones that you’d use these when it looks like you need to just draw the line and shut the conversation down, instead of rambling or giving in. So, you might say:

  • “That doesn’t work for me.”
  • “I’m done.”
  • “This isn’t worth it.”
  • “You aren’t worth it.” (Now, this one may just be something you say in your head to give yourself permission to end the conversation.)
  • “No.” (Remember, Shonda says we can use this as a complete sentence!)

It might take some practice, but you’d be surprised at how empowering it can be to break out one of these statements at just the right time!

And, guess what? There’s a silver lining here! The more we engage in difficult conversations, the easier they get.

Lesson 5:

I really struggle with this one! I tell a story in today’s podcast about that struggle. What I love about Shonda is she decided to start taking the compliments that she was getting, like a boss. In her book, she wrote:

"I'm going to say yes to accepting any and all acknowledgments of personal fabulous awesomeness with a clear, calm, 'Thank you,' and a confident smile, and nothing more."

Fabulous awesomeness. I love how she says that. But for myself, I can't even imagine if someone were to give me a compliment and just saying, "Thank you," with a smile. That feels very awkward to me, but in an effort to take a compliment like a boss, I’m going to try and do it going forward, too.

How about you? You on board with me?

Lessons Recapped:

Lesson 1: Don't just dream it, Do it!
Lesson 2: Find your own balance.
Lesson 3: Create boundaries that help you thrive.
Lesson 4: It's good to have difficult conversations.
Lesson 5: Learn to take a compliment like a boss.

So, there you have it! I hope these five lessons I learned from my mentor, Shonda Rhimes, have given you a new perspective on how to live a more fulfilling life and to run your business from a place of empowerment and truth.

Don’t forget to download the freebie I created for you. It’s a worksheet that is going to walk you step-by-step through some exercises that go along with the lessons I talked about today. It's a bit of a journaling type of exercise, but believe me, it will make everything you learned more actionable.

This episode is brought to you by:
Master Class: How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days
www.Amyporterfield.com/courses

 

May 09, 2018
#209: The Surprising Journey of Launching a Physical Product with Lara Casey
49:38

Have you ever thought about creating a physical product to sell online, maybe even adding one to your digital line up?

And if you have, have you found yourself overwhelmed with not really knowing where to start in order to bring that product from merely an idea to something your customers can physically hold in your hands?

As most of you know, my business consists of all digital products and I would say 90% of my audience is the same, but I still get questions, pretty frequently, asking me about creating physical products to include in their existing online business. Maybe you’re at a point where you’d like to add a physical product. Questions like: How do I know if I’m ready to add a physical product to my digital mix? Where would I even go to get started? What kind of physical product could I add to the mix?

Since I get a lot of questions around this topic, but I’m not the expert, I thought, “Let’s bring on someone who is.” My guest today, Lara Casey - founder of CultivateWhatMatters.com, has authored two books, Cultivate, and Make it Happen, and has had huge success in launching and selling physical products online. If you’ve ever heard of the famous PowerSheets, she’s the creator!

Lara is going to talk to us about how she knew it was time to launch a physical product; how she figured out and managed all the details around designing, producing, and fulfilling a physical product. And to keep it real, she shares the ups and downs as she created her product along the way.

When I asked Lara to tell my podcast listeners a little bit about herself, this is what she said: “We’re all about planting seeds and helping women to Cultivate What Matters and giving them the tools they need to plant seeds of growing intentional relationships or cultivating their faith...whatever it may be, specific to them.”

Planting seeds...cultivating...intentional… I love this!

Lara continued, “I’m a mom to three, a grateful wife, and I’m really passionate about helping an instant-results culture embrace the power of little by little progress, instead of perfection.”

Now, let’s dig into the interview!

QUICK SIDE NOTE to those who are coming here from my podcast for the show notes, I'd love to know if you like this longer, more detailed version of show notes? While not everything from the podcast is included here, it's a pretty thorough representation. Please let me know yay or nay and why in the comments below. 

Amy: What are PowerSheets?

Lara: The PowerSheets are our goal planner, and they help you to uncover what matters the most to you, make an action plan and then TEND to that, little by little and take action.

Amy: It’s beautiful! It looks like a planner. Would you call it a planner?

Lara: We get asked that all the time and this is really your day planner’s best friend. We call it a planner because it fits into the marketing realm of being that same type of vein, but it’s more of an action book. We want people to not just plan but start planting things in their lives and to make a mess in this (the PowerSheets).

Amy: What your very first product and why did you decide to create it?

IN THE BEGINNING

Lara: About 12 years ago, my husband Ari was deployed to Iraq, with the Marines. And as you can imagine, at the height of any time of war or turmoil, it can leave you feeling very anxious. And so, this first product, which was Southern Weddings magazine came out of that pain that I was experiencing at the time. As my husband was deployed to Iraq, I sat on my laptop computer alone one night and just thought, "I just really have a deep desire to create beauty in this world that feels so broken," and that sounded like a really grand thing at the time, but it was my real desire.

And so, I got on my computer, and I started mocking up a wedding magazine cover, and I didn't have any formal training or background in this. I had an interest in weddings and started to get my feet wet into wedding planning at the time. I think I bought an ebook that was something like Wedding Planning 101. It was $0.99 at the time.

What it was really about was that I was fascinated with stories of transformation and how even in the gift of a wedding celebration, you could transport people from feeling despair and hopelessness to a place of hope, to a place of thinking about the future.

So, I mocked up this little wedding magazine cover, and I had no idea where it would go from there... I just knew I had to create it. I had this restlessness that I'm sure a lot of your listeners may feel at times. I put it out there to the world, and I thought, "You know what? This is something new and different."

I started a blog at the time. If you would have said the word blog to someone, they probably would have thought about the movie The Blob and had no idea what you were talking about.

Amy: Like the wild, wild West online, when blogs weren't even popular!

Lara: I started a blog to talk about creating meaningful beginnings to married life and started sharing the idea about this wedding magazine. Long story short, it really took off. People were excited about something new and different in the South, not just talking about roasted chicken and tulle at a wedding, but a story and how that story could transform guests' lives.

This is how the first physical product came to be. I used my whole life savings and created a physical print version of Southern Weddings magazine. I, again, had no experience in this. I have a degree in music theater, no background in journalism. I just had this desire to do it, and I figured I'm just going to figure it out. I created the first edition on Microsoft Publisher.

WHY A PHYSICAL PRODUCT?

Lara: There is something to the tangible. I still feel the exact same way today, that I felt 12 years ago -- there's something to holding a product in your hand that has the ability to change someone's life, potentially more than a digital product that maybe they see once and forget about. This physical product is something people could pass on. They could pass it to their sisters, their moms, their best friends...it really started a revolution in the wedding industry. This is back when the only publications that were out there were really big corporate publishing houses. And then, there was me and my cat in the apartment. : )

Amy: What year was this?

Lara: This was 2008. If you fast-forward five years from then, I had a major life change happen. Our marriage was really rocky within that time period, five years later, our marriage started to come back together, and that led to our fifth-anniversary issue of Southern Weddings, being about love never fails. And so, the first shop product that we sold in more of an e-commerce platform ... it was Big Cartel at the time ... was a print that said, "Love never fails." In each of these things we've created have really been born out of a pain point, out of some challenge that I experienced in my life.

But the print was more about how could we get meaningful messaging into people's hands. It was more about the profit of people, not about dollar signs. It eventually became dollar signs, but it started with the heart of, "If we could just get this messaging literally into people's fingertips, we believe that it would have a domino effect and a ripple effect."

CREATING A SOLUTION TO A PAIN POINT

Lara: It was right around that time that our business started to boom. as the heartbeat of Southern Weddings started to really beat with the message of, "Love never fails," people really started to grasp onto it, and I became really overwhelmed with so much work, and I just had my first baby. Our marriage was coming back together, so I was trying to balance and prioritize that. I know you've had so much of that in your story too, Amy. It was like, "How do you do it all?"

And what I realized, the obvious is I can't do it all and do it well, but I can choose to cultivate what matters. And so, right around that time, I sat down at my desk one day, and I thought, "Man, I have all these things," like my facebook page, my Twitter account at the time (I don't even think that Instagram was a thing), "How am I going to tend to all these things and make them grow?" I would come to the end of a year and just get so frustrated looking back and thinking, "I could have made progress on these things if I would have tended to them little by little." So I got really frustrated, and said, "I need to fix this," and I made myself what I called a tending list.

It was just a list of all the priorities, these seeds that I wanted to grow in my life and in my business. Things that I just knew, if I just touched on them a little bit at a time, it would add up. So I created a set of worksheets to help me make progress on the things that mattered, tending to them little by little. It's just like you teach, Amy, about it being focused on action by action.

MAKING PROGRESS

Lara: And that's when my life started to change. I started to make progress on the things that mattered. People started to see me making progress, amidst a lot of mistakes, and I got an email from a publisher who had read a series that I posted on my blog at the time about goal setting and about how I was doing this differently. The publisher emailed me, and that's how I got my first book contract for Make It Happen, and then my most recent one is Cultivate. At the same time, others began to ask me to create this set of worksheets for them too, and it really took off.

Amy: I love these stories, where you create something for yourself and then others want it, and it grows into a business. I mean, how organic can you get, right?

Lara: Yes! We have an unofficial, yet, official office motto that is: If you're not excited about it, nobody's going to be excited about it. So, for us, we have to create the things that we use in our everyday lives, the things that we need, and we just have to trust if we've done our research, and  looked at what the market needs, and listened enough, then other people are probably going to be affected by it too, if we are.

Amy: If you created these worksheets for yourself, did you just put them out there and that's how you knew others wanted them? Did you sell them and then hope that others wanted them? How did that happen?

Lara: It was a lot of both. It was a lot like throwing things to the wind. There weren't any shops around at the time, my friend Lindsay Letters had a shop with a couple prints in it, but there was no one that was really modeling this at the time. So, we were just testing the waters. At the time, I was doing coaching for branding clients, and I tested the PowerSheets out with them in little spurts. We would test it. The content, I tested with the Making Things Happen Conference, which we were doing twice a year (and still do twice a year now).

It was being tested, but it wasn't like a full-fledged test in an e-commerce platform. We just really at the time had to take the risk and put it out there.

Amy: You were creating a solution to your pain point, to begin with, and then your first customers were people in your local community and people who knew you through Southern Weddings and the Make Things Happen Conference who had that same need, and your product was their answer. Perfect!

Tell us what happened from there, as far as you knowing that this was actually going to be a business and not just a one-off order for some friends. For example, did you have a certain amount of workbooks? These worksheets really became a workbook, right?

Lara: Yes, you got it.

Amy: So did you have a certain amount of workbooks that you wanted to pre-sell before you'd produce the product? Or did you place an order that you could afford at the time and then sold online at stores or events? Give us all the details.

MAKING THINGS HAPPEN!

Lara: I designed the first round, which was a loose-leaf set of worksheets. We printed them at a local printer, which is something that I think is very important for anybody that's starting out because you get the joy and the asset of having a relationship with someone who's going to hopefully walk you through that process. We did not speak the printer paper product language at first, and I still feel like we're learning that. We didn't know anything about paperweights or bleed on paper or even what was possible.

I think it's really important to try a local printer first, even if you think you're going to get a better cost somewhere else, just so you can get that education.

We did a very small batch at first, and I think it was like 500 sets of PowerSheets, and that felt like a huge amount for us, at first. I feel very strongly about the power of one, so I thought, "If we could get even these 500 sets of PowerSheets into people's hands,” -- I started to imagine the ripple effect. I hope that's encouragement for anybody that's starting out. Don't compare your numbers to somebody else. Do what you think is best for you right now and just think about the ripple effect.

Amy: What were some of your biggest fears at this point, when you started to put it out there?

Lara: So many things. The thought of just somebody buying something from us was scary. The thought of, do we know even how to do transactions, or what if someone is unhappy with the product? What if this product doesn't create results for other people like it has for us and the people we've tested it with? What do you do about customer service? How do you print labels? I think the biggest thing is that there was so much unknown. The only way that we were going to figure out how to do it well was to do it and to get as much good advice as we could. But at the time, there weren't any resources for shop owners like there are now.

Amy: I love that you put this out there because a lot of my students want the whole roadmap in front of them, and they know I'm a step-by-step girl. So they'll say, "Amy, just give us exactly what we need to do." But if you look back at people that have had major success, they just put it out there, and when an issue comes up, they figure it out, and then there's their process moving forward.

Lara: I think you're right. I think that if I would have had a "plan" to start out with, we would have changed so much about it. Especially with e-commerce or selling a physical product in a retail shop, whatever it is, there's so much testing that happens, and asking yourself, "Is this right for us? Can we make this better? How can we put our unique stamp on this?" So I feel like it's actually an advantage to not know the entire roadmap ahead because you get the freedom to change for the better.

Amy: That's so powerful. Now, in these early days, when you did your first print run, and you've got your loose-leaf pages out there, you didn't do a pre-order, you actually put the money down, and you ordered 500. Did you sell those online or in person or both?

Lara: We sold them online, for the mere fact that we work out of my house. It's a small operation, and that also brought a lot of challenges with it, too. One of the biggest bumps in the road that we've had with production was having a lot of manual labor to do ourselves to package the products. This is not something that our printer at the time could do. We were collating the products by hand, packaging them by hand, stickering them, figuring out how to use the label printer, which we actually did at first. We are grassroots. I remember going to the post office with hundreds of boxes and the post people looking at us like, "Are you kidding me?"

Amy: This is how it's done! I love how you built this, because it is completely grassroots, just starting from something really small and doing all the labor yourself. You really had to just get in there and figure stuff out. Thank goodness the product you created was one to help you keep organized because it sounds like there were a lot of moving pieces!

So many people get to a place of overwhelm in the process of creating their product, whether it be physical or digital, and they just get stuck and make zero progress. It sounds like this wasn't the case for you. You just kept moving step by step even when you didn't have all the answers. Such a big learning moment.

So, you've got your first product out there and it was validated through continued customer demand and sales. How long did you stick with that business model? And when was the next major turning point in your business?

TAKING RISKS AND MAKING PIVOTS

Lara: I love this question because it takes me right back to the point of taking big risks.
One was, at first, our shop was called the Lara Casey shop, and that was just because it was my name at the time that was the heart of the teaching. I was the one creating all the content and all the messaging. But, over the course of several years, we realized that we/I did not want to just tell my story. It was not about me. This product was about other people's stories, and those stories had so much power to them.

So one of the biggest pivotal moments for us was stepping back and making the scary decision to completely change the name of our shop. The crazy part was that things were going really well. Sales were good. Things kept trucking along. We'd had a growth rate of almost 150% every year.

At the same time, this is where you really start to get to, and I don't want to call it magic, but like, the real heartbeat of where I think success comes from is doing things from your core, from your why, and always being willing to take risks for that. So for us, we had this conversation I'll never forget it. We stopped one day, and we said, "You know what? This name is not working. This is not about me anymore. How can we have a name that allows us to give other people the reins and to make it about them?" And so, we went around and around with a lot of different ideas and just kept coming back to why we do what we do, which is to help women cultivate what matters.

We changed the name of our shop from the Lara Casey shop to Cultivate What Matters, and that turning point was like a huge flood for us, because it wasn't about selling a product; it was about teaching people a different way of living and about changing the way that they think, and that's when things started to really click.

It's easy to be complacent. It's easy just to look at numbers. But again, when you're looking at the profit of people, -- like how can we actually affect people's lives in a more profound way -- you're working with a whole different set of rules, and it makes the risks worth it.

Amy: At this point, demand increased even more, right?

Lara: Yes.

Amy: What did that look like? Did you add more products? Did you move from local? Give us all the details.

Lara: One Thanksgiving I was sitting with my family on shipping boxes for Thanksgiving dinner, because my living room was full of boxes, and that was the breaking point. That's when I said, "You know what? I think we have grown to the point where something needs to change."

One change we made was taking the fulfillment away from our hands and putting it into a local warehouse, and that was a scary move because, through Southern Weddings, we have always held to the fact that there's magic in a handwritten note. I would write handwritten notes with all of the first PowerSheets orders. I mean, it would take me days, writing hundreds of notes because of that "power of one".

But, in order to grow with your business, to affect more people's lives, sometimes, you have to let go of some things and choose more meaningful things that you can do on a larger scale. One thing that was really important to us was to have a local warehouse, where we could still have a touchpoint. We could still deliver handwritten notes and I could get my dining room back! : )

As far as production goes, we outgrew our local printer, and the strain of the manual labor really became unsustainable for us. And having so many amazing, sweet friends come to my house to collate PowerSheets on my back porch all the time, it just started to NOT add up. So, we started to look at different options. To give you a little bit of background, we are a debt-free company, which I’m very grateful for and it's something we worked very hard for. So we didn’t take out any loans for this growth. We have embraced this principle not just in our business, but in our lives and what we teach, that it's okay to grow slow.

We have many times had to deal with sellouts, which sounds like a wonderful problem to have -- it's a blessing for sure when a product sells out, but for us, it was by necessity. We only ordered as much as we could. And in being a debt-free company, and in believing that growing slow was really important to us, it took a long time to figure out a better option for production. We wanted to be really intentional about that.

So, fast-forward, during that bump, we started working with a company called Codra. Codra is essentially like a middleman between us — the designer and the shop — and international and US production. We found them through my book publisher, Thomas Nelson, who produce a lot of Bibles and book content like that. I'm telling you this because more than looking for the right price point, and more than looking for the best deal, it's about looking for the right relationship. Because if you're really in this for the long haul, and if you really want it to be a product that is sustainable for the long term, then that relationship behind it has to be, too. All that to say that the team at Codra are our best advocates, and they have found us international partners and even domestic partners - production manufacturers - that have really strong integrity.

This was so, so important to us that the integrity of our product started even at production and went all the way through our customer delight, all the way down to the way we package things, that there was no stone left unturned. So, that was the biggest bump for us, was making that leap of faith to go with an outside production house.

Amy: So now they're being printed in China, but you have a middleman, so you don't have to go over to China and watch them and make sure everything's working properly and all that stuff?

Lara: That's correct. We love them so much because they take such care to make sure that our manufacturing partners are also really taken care of. They are the ones that travel there all the time, and they are there working with multiple clients at a time. It's neat to know that they have such integrity with those relationships, and they're passing that onto us.

Amy: Did you have to get a business loan to move on to this next big step in terms of moving from local to international printing?

MARKETING MATTERS

Lara: No, and I'm really grateful for that. We just grew at the pace that we knew we could sustain, but this is where we had to get really smart. When you reach a certain point, I mean, really at any point in your marketing, as you know more than anybody else, Amy, you've got to get smart about your marketing. You have to have the right data, and that's when it was about four years into our process (we've had PowerSheets for almost seven years now) when we started to really look at the data, and we started to look at our analytics and started to grow our email list and work on these things that we felt like were great benchmarks to knowing. If we could get to those key performance indicators, like having a certain number of newsletter subscribers or whatever those metrics are, that we would feel more confident in making a larger purchase for more inventory for the next one. We couldn't take risks with that anymore or just shoot the wind with a number that sounded good. We had to start looking at the data and making great strides towards that.

Amy: And it can be scary to look at the data. Some of my students say they don't want to look, because they're not really sure what they're looking for, and they might not even want to know the truth if they're being really honest with themselves. So this was something that you did that most people don't do -- you got really knowledgeable about what the numbers told you.

Lara: Yes, and we started with no email list. I remember when our former marketing director came to us, and she's like, "So tell me about your email list." It was like I felt list shame. I was like,, "What kind of list are you talking about here?"

Amy: It happens to us all.

Lara: It does, but I think more so than any numbers, it was about providing helpful content for people...we're not product producers. Like I said earlier, we're seed planters. First and foremost, we're about helping women change their lives and giving them the tools to do that. If we weren't doing that in our day-to-day content, there's no way that product is going to be a long-term thing in their lives anyway.

Amy: To give us a little perspective here, can you share a quick timeline from the printing of your first workbook to where you are at this point in our chat now, producing your product in China?

Lara: 

  • We first started in 2011 - I printed that workbook for myself to use at first.
  • In 2013, we produced the first small batch of 500 workbooks at the local printer for our first customers.
  • In 2014, we bumped up production to about 3,000 (switched from selling them on Big Cartel to Shopify, where we still are today). Printed at the same printing house in the US.
  • In 2015, we sought out a really great international partner through Codra. We do most of our printing here in the US for our accessory products. We use a couple printers: We love Curry Printing, in Dallas, Texas, and then Smart Press is another partner that we use here stateside.
  • But in 2016, that's when things started to change big time. That's the year that we changed the name of our company. And, up until this point, this was a mostly black and white product. And if anybody knows me, I have a very colorful product. This is really one of the hallmarks of our company, is about living your life in full color. And so, we took a really big risk. I remember being so scared to put color in our product thinking nobody's going to like this. It's not neutral enough. We're not going to reach everyone. But when we try to be everyone or everything for everybody, that's when you really miss the magic.
  • Then we put stickers in there, and we started to make goal setting fun, and that became our hallmark. And that's also when we embraced that mantra of, "If you're not excited about it, nobody's going to be excited about it." We changed it from being loose-leaf worksheets to a bound workbook. One of the other big things we did is we started to cut products from our shop. We had grown our shop under the impression that more is better.

FINDING YOUR CENTRAL FOCUS TO PROPEL YOU FORWARD

Lara: Once you really find your niche, and you find what matters, having one central focus is really what propelled us forward. So we decided to make the PowerSheets the main product, with everything else as a support to that main focus and system.

Amy: I can't get over how many great lessons you are sharing! It’s all the stuff that I teach, but you're saying it differently and putting it into a different light, and I'm loving it! So, you shaved down some of your products to get really focused on the one that was really doing well for you, and you knew it was the right fit for your audience.

Lara: Yes, but it was scary because cutting things out makes you feel like you're not going to please everybody. But it had to become more about the impact and realizing that we could make a bigger impact if we could help people make a better buying decision by giving them less to choose from.

Amy: So, now we know the product, but you said accessories -- I'm very curious about what that means. I'd also love to know about your team size, your production site, your warehouse, all that good stuff.

Lara: I love that you encouraged our listeners, too, that this doesn't happen overnight. It's a joy and an honor to be able to share the start of the story instead of just where we are now, because I would feel so intimidated if I just heard the end instead of knowing that it took hard work, and most of these things that were successes were because I made a lot of mistakes on the way.

But, out of all of those mistakes and trial and error, we have come up with a product lineup that, like I said, centralizes on or focuses on the PowerSheets and uncovering what matters to you, making an action plan and then doing something about it. We know there's not a one-size-fits-all program for everybody's life, so we have to be able to customize that for different people. We haven't shared any of this yet, but I'm excited to share here that for the release of our 2019 PowerSheets, we’re going to have four covers for the one-year sets. This is exciting for us because people have always wanted to choose the color that matches their life.

And there's a lot of intentionalities that went behind those covers, too. So, we’ll have four one-year sets of PowerSheets, with one six-month undated set. The six-month undated set was a very intentional decision too. People sometimes find out about us in the middle of the year, and we believe there's nothing magical about January 1st. You should be able to set goals at any time you want.

We also have another cornerstone product, which is our Write The Word Journal, and it's a Bible journal that allows you to just literally write Bible verses, and those have been super popular for people that want to cultivate their faith. So we have seven Write The Word Journals. We also have a new product we just released, which is Write the Word for Kids.

And this is where it gets fun as far as dreaming about if you have a core product, how could an accessory fuel that product? We came up with five different goal guides: a goal guide for parents; a goal guide for friendship and relationships; one for wellness; and one for finances. So if those things are important to you, that's where that supports the main product.

Amy: I like how these extras all support the main product.

Lara: Yes, because if they detract or, here's where it gets technical, if we have a product that felt like it merited its own separate launch and didn't support the other products, we would have a hard time getting people to purchase the main system that we're teaching about in our day-to-day content. It can actually be a distraction in a way.

We also have our Goal Setting Sticker Book, because goal setting should be fun! : )

Amy: Months ago, I wanted to buy the PowerSheets when all my friends were all about them and they were sold out and I was bummed out. Well, the other day, I was lucky to get this nice beautiful box in the mail from you - I was so excited! Thank you for that! I'm embarrassed to say how excited I was about the stickers, but I was. So that was extra fun!

Lara: We often talk about how the stickers are fun, but this is where a researched-backed, data-oriented mindset can help you create a product that's really fun. For us, knowing that there is power in the handwritten word, as opposed to typing something digitally, there's power in marking something that's meaningful for you. And with the stickers, for instance, stickers that say things like “top priority” and “this matters”, there's actually something that happens in your brain when you're putting a sticker on a goal that really matters to you. Your mind starts to make decisions and you start to go through a series of trying to figure out how you're going to do that.

THERE’S NO “I’ IN TEAM!

Amy: Tell me about your team size and the positions you have on your team.

Lara: We have a team of nine women who I'm very grateful to work alongside. Half of them work here in my home office in Chapel Hill, North Carolina, and the other half work remotely.

  • CEO and Visionary: That’s me (Lara Casey). We use our PowerSheets for business, but we also use the Traction model, and that has been really helpful for us, for anybody that is starting to grow a team, Traction and the EOS principles have been awesome to get us organized as far as our team structure, who reports to who, and how all that works really well.
  • Creative Director: This is where we show our small business card. The Creative Director is also our Chief of Staff, so we like to do that when we're small.
  • Director of Operations: Mostly handles the production side of working with our production partners on the products and making sure our fulfillment team is helping our customers to be delighted.
  • Graphic Designer: Helps with both product design and marketing design.
  • Customer Delight Manager: This is a huge position for us. One of the central focuses for us is making sure our customers feel delighted, which is why we don't call it customer service.
  • Content Marketing Manager
  • PR manager
  • Conference Director for the Making Things Happen Conference
  • And we're hunting for a Marketing Director right now. So, if anybody out there is interested, click here.

Amy: I hope that someone reading this is the perfect fit or knows someone who is.

Lara: We want to stay a small team, and even in our 10-year vision, we have plans to hopefully just remain like 12 to 13 people, because we have that agility, the ability to be nimble, the ability to make quick decisions and act on them. The Traction Model was really helpful for us to be able to do that.

Amy: Tell us about your current production method and your new warehouse.

Lara: We just switched to a new warehouse, in Kentucky, through a company called EasyPost. EasyPost is a tech company, so they're very much focused on advancements in technology. They created a software that is also labeled the same thing, EasyPost, but they also do fulfillment now. Fulfillment means that we get our product to their warehouse, and they take care of everything on the shipping side. Our system links in with them through Shopify, and they take care of sending all the orders out. For production, we still use the same people that we've been using for the last three years, which is Codra, Curry Printing and Smart Press.

The reason we chose the new warehouse in Kentucky is there, through the advancement in technology, is a decrease in human error. We have a lot of influxes of launch dates, where we sold far more than we expected to. We had these big bumps, and our current warehouse just wasn't able to handle that without a lot of errors. It has been really helpful to work with the team that does Kickstarter. They do high production for lots of different shops that might have 25,000 products go out on the day, but they can also do our normal day-to-day quantities, too.

Amy: Fantastic! Things happen...you made choices to change things up to make it better, and that’s how your business has grown over the years. So many different changes, but based on needs, wants, mistakes and everything in between.

Looking back. If you knew back then what you know now, what would you have done differently?

IF ONLY I HAD KNOWN THEN WHAT I KNOW NOW

Lara: I would have owned our mantra earlier of, "If you're excited about it, chances are other people will be too." That really is the best form of marketing that we've experienced: If it’s a product or a piece of content that we need and will change our everyday lives, it's worth taking a risk to put out there in hopes that other people will too. That's where we really get to the power of one. So, I would say, "Take risks for what matters." And then I would also say, "Keep making it better." I am amazed that every year when we start talking about the next year's version of the PowerSheets, or really any of our products, that there are hundreds of changes that get made.

We don't just rest on our laurels. We are making it better through listening to our customer, asking them questions like, "Is this working for you?" Hearing their stories and giving them lots of opportunities to give us feedback. Keep making it better. Never stop growing.

Amy: If you could give my listeners and readers one or two pieces of advice if they're thinking about launching a physical product, what would that be?

Lara: I would say make something that you need. Make something that you know that you will authentically be able to tell people, "This filled a need for me," or, "This filled a need for my mom," or someone that's close to you. It has to have a personal story behind it. People grasp on to the power of story, and they will listen to you if you’re being authentic with them and telling them about your product.

The other thing I would say is, just what we have experienced throughout this whole six-year period of having PowerSheets and 12 years of Southern Weddings, that it's okay to grow slow. You don't have to have the whole plan to get started. Good things take root over time, and little by little, good things grow and they bloom.

Amy: There are so many great little nuggets you’ve shared with us! This has been a real eye-opener for me as well because I've never done a physical product, would not even know where to start, but these lessons you learned along the way are just priceless for anybody thinking of doing a physical product or even just adding a physical product to their online business.

I think your story shows us that there are no shortcuts, but it can really pay off when you come from a place like you did of wanting to serve your customer well and providing them with products that can bring about change.

_______

Ok, my reader, was this interview not just packed with great insight and inspiration?! Head over to www.CultivateWhatMatters.com/Amy to see Lara’s amazing products (and check out that job listing, if they haven’t filled it by the time you’re reading this). When you use that special link, Lara is giving you a special discount because you’re part of my awesome community. Yay for us! And, thank you, Lara!

Also, don't forget to let me know, in the comments below, if you like this longer, more detailed version of show notes. I appreciate your input!

This episode is sponsored by my free masterclass, How to Create Your Ultimate List-Building Catch-Up Plan. You can get it at http://www.amyporterfield.com/listbuilding. If you are not building your email list every single day there is no better time than right now!

May 03, 2018
#208: How I've Built My "Small, But Mighty" Team (The Wins, Fails & Fears)
49:07

It’s time to talk team!

In the last 6 months, it’s been a staffing bonanza: I’ve hired four of the five full-time positions on my team. And boy, has it been a whirlwind, filled with mistakes, wins, fears and A LOT of excitement.

But through the process, I’ve identified 7 big distinctions to help you build your own team. Now, I’m not saying go out and hire right now! At this point, all you might need is an amazing VA, or a part-time contractor to help you out. I’m tackling this subject as well, so stay tuned.

Building your team—the right kind of team—is essential to the growth of your business, to eliminate some of the stress and overwhelm, to make a bigger impact, and yeah, to make more money! So if you’re a business owner growing your business, this will be a must-listen for you. (44:34)

With the right team on your side, the sky’s the limit!

So, join me as I share with you how I built my “Small, But Mighty” team, and how I figured out what I needed and what I didn’t need. I’ve also got an awesome freebie for those of you starting to build your team virtually—you can get my “7 Make or Break Questions When You’re Interviewing for a Virtual Position” hereLet’s get started!

This episode is brought to you by:

Gravy—my very own 24/7 engagement team who contacts my customers within hours of their failed payment, captures updated billing information and saves the customers I worked so hard to acquire. If you have a subscription model business or offer payment plans, you’ve got to check out Gravy!

Check out these highlights:

  • Who is on my team—what each team member does—and when I started building my team. [5:29]
  • Why I wanted local team members (and how I ultimately changed my mind!). [15:26]
  • About those trial periods (yes, they’re a bit corporate, but they work!) [20:39]
  • So, what if they’ve got the skill set but not much of the right personality? [23:34]
  • When it’s OK to hire even if they don’t have all the experience (and what to do). [31:37]
  • My fave hiring tools. [35:17]
  • Hiring a referral vs. hiring from an ad. [37:36]
  • Getting over the fear of hiring [45:07]
May 02, 2018
#207: 20 Questions (Rapid Fire Style!) with Special Guest Interviewer, Hobie Porterfield
39:41

My husband Hobie and I had a great time recording this episode!

It was extra special because a couple weeks before recording the episode, I asked my audience to send in questions for me to answer: business, personal, silly, or whatever. The hook was that I couldn't look at any of the questions in advance. Hobie was the only one that got to look at them. He went through all the questions and chose his favorite 20. He said there were a bunch of great questions and that they were pretty hard to narrow down. Perhaps we’ll have a Part 2 at some point!

Thank you to all of my awesome fans for sending in such great questions. You truly are the best!

Well, as you can imagine, I was a bit nervous because I had no clue what was coming at me. I told this to Hobie and he assured me that I was, and I quote, “definitely going to be uncomfortable on a few of them.” Great! Just great!

Alright, I’m going to list out the questions here and give you a bit of a teaser on each one, but I invite you to tune in to my podcast to hear our full conversation (just press the play button at the top of this page). : )

20 QUESTIONS: YOU ASKED AND I’M TELLING
HOW DO YOU FIND A FAMILY AND BUSINESS BALANCE WITHOUT LOSING YOUR SANITY AND FEELING GUILTY? —NATHALIA MELO WILSON
  • My answer has to do with having an understanding husband who speaks up when he needs to.
WILL YOU GIVE IN AND MOVE OR RETIRE TO TENNESSEE? INQUIRING MINDS WANT TO KNOW. —SHANTELL BRIGHTMAN
  • Hobie and I dream of a lake house in Tennessee one day!
WHAT WAS THE BEST VACATION YOU EVER HAD? ~ TRACY GREEN CAINES
  • Let me just tell you, the mini-pool on the balcony overlooked the ocean! Ahhhh….
CAN YOU SHARE WITH US A CHALLENGING PERIOD IN YOUR LIFE AND HOW YOU GOT OUT OF IT? ~ MYKAO THAO
  • A time when I wanted to wrap Hobie up in bubble wrap every morning. I know the suspense is killing you, isn’t it?!
IF A WORK-LIFE BALANCE IS IMPORTANT TO YOU, HOW CAN YOU TELL YOU’RE GETTING IT RIGHT? ~ MICHELLE ONYANGO
  • I actually get into this topic in an episode that airs shortly after this one (it will be episode 210...be on the lookout). My answer in this episode has a lot to do with the happiness of my family.
HOW DID YOU PICK YOUR DOG’S NAMES: GUS AND SCOUT? ~ SPURGEON PERKINS
  • You'll have to tune in to the show to hear how we came up with their names.
WHAT DOES A TYPICAL DAY LOOK LIKE FOR AMY PORTERFIELD? ~ RACHAEL WATSON
WHAT’S THE BIGGEST MISTAKE YOU’VE MADE IN YOUR BUSINESS, OR THE SINGLE BEST THING YOU’VE DONE? ~ AMY WARE
  • Without a doubt, taking the leap to do what I do now!
HOW DO YOU MANAGE TO NOT RESPOND TO NEGATIVE COMMENTS? ~ NIKOLINA ANDRIC
  • I’m pretty good here, but Hobie’s another story. ; )
DOES AMY SHARE THE COVERS, HOBIE? OR IS SHE A COVERS HOG? INQUIRING MINDS WANT TO KNOW. ~ NICOLE WALTERS
  • Hobie shares why he nicknamed me “The Alligator” when it comes to hogging the covers.
WHAT WOULD BE THE MOST CHALLENGING PART OF SWAPPING JOBS WITH HOBIE FOR 24 HOURS? ~ ERIC UPTON
  • Do you know what my husband does for a living? He’s basically a hero in my eyes, but the job would be tough! Hobie also shares how he’s a bit technologically challenged, which gave me a real laugh!
HOW HAS BEING A WOMAN PLAYED TO YOUR ADVANTAGE OR DISADVANTAGE IN GROWING YOUR BUSINESS? ~ AMBER BRUESKE
  • There’s a mix of masculine and feminine energy that I need to show up with and that can be good and bad in various situations.
WHAT FAMILY ROUTINES OR RITUALS KEEP YOUR FAMILY OR MARRIAGE HAPPY? ~ TARA ZIRKER
  • It’s all about coffee in the morning and going to bed together at night!
IF YOU COULD ONLY DO ONE THING DIFFERENTLY WHEN YOU STARTED YOUR BUSINESS, WHAT WOULD IT BE? ~ AIMEE STONEHILL
20 SECONDS OF COURAGE. CAN YOU SHARE A MOMENT IN YOUR BIZ WHEN YOU HAD TO CALL IN TRUE COURAGE, AND IT BECAME A PIVOTAL MOMENT FOR YOU? ~ JANET BECKERS
  •  Changing the names of one of my programs and a recent experience on stage.
IF YOU LOOK AT YOUR BUSINESS FIVE, TEN, AND FIFTEEN YEARS FROM NOW, WHAT DOES IT LOOK LIKE? ARE YOUR LONG-TERM GOALS CAREFULLY MAPPED OUT AND PLANNED? OR ARE THERE MASSIVE LEAPS THAT CAN'T EVEN ENTER YOUR SHORT-TERM THINKING? ~ ANDY WANG
  • I talk about being a planner, but a shorter-term thinker as far as years down the road.
WHAT MAKES YOUR MARRIAGE WITH HOBIE SUPER SPECIAL? ~ EMILY MYRICK
  • Yes, I thought Hobie was just setting me up with this one, but he didn’t. Let me just say that I feel like the luckiest woman around, with my man!
HOW DID YOU AND HOBIE MEET? AND WHY DO YOU THINK YOU CONNECTED SO WELL? AND THEN, THE PLOT TWIST IS, HOBIE HAS TO TELL THE STORY FROM HIS PERSPECTIVE. THEN YOU HAVE TO TELL THE STORY FROM YOUR PERSPECTIVE. ~ LAUREN TICKNER
  • You're going to want to listen to all the juicy details on this one. ; )
HOW LONG DID IT TAKE YOU TO FEEL LIKE YOU'VE MADE IT IN YOUR BUSINESS? OR AT LEAST LIKE YOU HAD IT TOGETHER AND WERE THERE EVER ANY TIMES BEFORE THAT POINT WHERE YOU FELT LIKE COMPLETELY THROWING IN THE TOWEL? ~ SHELLY LEVINE
  • Many, many times. The first 2 years I felt like I was going to have to go back to my corporate job, but that sounded miserable.
I COULD REALLY USE SOME ADVICE ON HANDLING LAUNDRY WHILE YOU'RE WORKING FROM HOME. DOES SOMEBODY ELSE DO THAT FOR YOU OR DO YOU JUST WORK AROUND IT? ~ INA COVENEY
  • Did I mention I feel like the luckiest woman around, with my husband?
HOW DO YOU BALANCE GIVING PERSONAL ATTENTION TO YOUR CLIENTS WHILE STILL TRYING TO AUTOMATE YOUR BUSINESS AND NOT BE TOO INVOLVED? ~ JENNIFER LAKE
  • Believe it or not, my answer has to do with Facebook lives.
IF YOU WERE JUST GETTING STARTED IN SOCIAL MEDIA, WHAT ARE THE THREE TOP PLATFORMS YOU WOULD FOCUS ON BUILDING AN AUDIENCE? ~ TAMMI HARRIS
  • YouTube, Facebook, and Instagram.

Well, I have to admit, I may have been a little nervous at first, but that was super fun. If there are any Pittsburgh Steeler fans out there, you may want to tune in to the last part of the episode for a good Steelers story.

**********

And that's a wrap! Maybe Hobie does have a future in podcasting after all! 😍

Amy

P.S. If you'd like to hear more from Hobie, listen in to this episode where we talked about how to make love and business work. 

May 02, 2018
GDPR For Entrepreneurs: What You Need to Know with Bobby Klinck
57:21

If you have an online business or an email list that you communicate with, you’ve probably heard the rumblings around the internet about the EU’s new General Data Protection Regulation (let’s just call it GDPR, shall we?). This new regulation goes into effect May 25, 2018 and in an effort to understand what it is, what it means to online marketers, and what we need to take action on, I’ve invited Bobby Klinck, an intellectual property attorney, to help us navigate all things GDPR. Bobby is not only an attorney, but he is an entrepreneur himself, so he really has his finger on the pulse of what online entrepreneurs need to do to protect themselves.

Let’s dive in and figure this all out!

What is GDPR?

GDPR stands for “The General Data Protection Regulation” a privacy law from the European Union that goes into effect May 25, 2018. Even though it’s a European Union law, all online entrepreneurs need to be paying attention because the GDPR will mean major changes for the way we operate.

What activities are covered by the GDPR?

  • The GDPR applies to the processing of personal data.
  • Processing is a fancy word for, “doing anything with data”. You should assume it covers everything you do with all of the data you collect from individuals from collection to deletion (and at every point in between).
  • Only applies to personal data which is anything that is associated with, or related to, someone who is identified or who you can identify.
  • Identified includes: names, email addresses, physical addresses, and most people agree it includes IP addresses and other info collected automatically (usually collected by Google Analytics).
  • Also includes any type of processing and information that you’re adding to your contact database. This could be information that you collect automatically, through an opt-in or any other collection method. (ex: surveys, quizzes, etc.), or through tagging or segmenting in your CRM database. These activities are included because you are effectively “monitoring” what people are doing.

Who does the GDPR apply to?

  • The GDPR will apply to any relationship or transaction (commercial or free) where one of more of the parties is in the EU. It is not based on citizenship, it’s based on where they are when you are interacting with them.
  • If you are an online entrepreneur or marketer based in the European Union, you must comply with the GDPR across your entire business. The means that if you are collecting data from someone in the US, you still have to comply.
  • If you are an online entrepreneur or marketer based outside of the EU, you must comply with the GDPR when we are interacting with or collecting data from people in the EU.
  • This is where things get complicated! There are some instances where it doesn’t apply if you’re outside the EU .

How Does GDPR Apply to Non-EU Entrepreneurs?

  • A non-EU entrepreneur has to comply when processing of people in the EU.
  • But ONLY if the processing is related to:
    • Offering products or services to people in the EU (paid AND free) - that means a lead magnet counts!
    • Monitoring the behavior of people in the EU (as mentioned earlier)
  • Here’s where the GREY ZONE enters in: People are not sure how the territorial limits will apply. Questions you may be asking:
    • What about people who don’t knowingly collect information?
    • Ex: Facebook Ads: Bobby focuses on people only in the US. He’s not actively trying to attract people in the EU. But when he looks at his list, about 5% are in the EU. He’s not going to refuse doing business with this 5%, so he will have to comply with GDPR when he’s interacting and handling data with this 5% from the EU.
    • What about adding a disclaimer that says you only sell to people in the US?
    • Unfortunately, there are not crystal clear answers to these questions, but let’s dig into the language and details and see how this pertains to you.

6 principles of the GDPR

#1: Data shall be processed “lawfully, fairly, and in a transparent manner.”

  • You have to be upfront about what you are collecting the data for.

#2: Data shall be “collected for specified, explicit and legitimate purposes.”

  • You can’t collect data without explaining how you are using it, and those purposes have to be legit.

#3: Data processing shall be “limited to what is necessary” for the purpose.

  • You can’t collect all kinds of data on a person if all you need is an email address (like for a lead magnet). You may only collect the minimum amount of data for the purpose you are collecting it for. Once you have collected the necessary data, you can only use it for its intended purpose. (We’ll get into how this affects list-building later in the post).

#4: Data shall be accurate, kept up to date, and corrected.

  • Doesn’t really apply to us. This is more for the Google and Facebooks of the world.

#5: Data shall be kept so it identifies a person “no longer than is necessary.”

  • You should not keep data about people forever if there is no reason to keep it.

#6: Data shall be “processed in a manner that ensures appropriate security.”

  • You have to take reasonable steps to protect the data. We should all already be using SSL certificates and other ways to actually make sure that we’re protecting the data, (Data should be stored behind a secure wall (password collected).

How You Will Need to Change the Way You Collect Email Addresses From Potential Leads In Your Marketing Efforts:

The only lawful basis for adding someone to your marketing email list under the GDPR would be consent, and the GDPR requires that consent be freely given, specific, and unambiguous.

This new standard means we can't automatically add everyone who grabs one of our lead magnets to our general marketing email list.

  • We must get a separate consent to add them to our marketing list.
  • You can't require them to give this consent as a condition for getting your freebie.
  • You have to sell prospects on the benefits of your list to get them to voluntarily sign up (not just as a requirement to get your lead magnet, freebie, or webinar registration).

The new consent standard applies to your EXISTING list. If you can’t show that you have the right kind of consent from people who are already on your list and to whom the GDPR applies, then you cannot email them any longer beginning May 25, 2018


IMPORTANT: Because consent must be specific and unambiguous, someone downloading a lead magnet from you does not equate to consent to be added to your general email list.

The GDPR also prohibits you to ask for consent to add them to the email list. Getting consent for multiple things or in the course of some other transaction is going to be hard. You likely need stand alone consent.

According to the GDPR, you also can’t add a checkbox and prohibit the delivery of the lead magnet if they don’t click the box.

You may not require someone to consent to be added to your email list to get access to your lead magnet. (Someone giving you their email address and you promising them a freebie is a contract under the law and adding them to your email list is not “necessary” as stated in the 6 principles above.)

Ultimately, to be added to your email list, a prospect must specifically and affirmatively agree to be added to your list. And you may not require that they join your list to receive a freebie, attend a webinar, etc. Instead, we have to sell prospects on the value of being added to our list.

The new consent standard applies to your EXISTING list. Come May 25, you cannot email your existing contacts who signed up through a lead magnet.


Can I send a nurture sequence after someone opts in for my lead magnet under GDPR?

It’s not crystal clear, but there’s a good argument for allowing you to send a nurture sequence after someone downloads your lead magnet.

This would be called expanded processing and that is when you take an action after the initial action.

Factors to consider when deciding whether it’s ok, or not, to do expanded processing:

  • The link between the purposes of collection and the purposes for the expanded processing
  • Context in which the data was collected
  • Nature of the personal data (we’re not really collecting sensitive information for a lead magnet)
  • Consequences of expanded processing (the consequence might be getting a few emails from you)
  • Existence of appropriate safeguards (these should be in place no matter what)

How Do I Preserve My Existing List and Get Compliant?

It’s two-pronged: Between now and May 25, you need to build goodwill with your list and run campaigns to get GDPR-compliant consents.

For non-EU entrepreneurs: Start by segmenting your list into two parts:
1) Non-EU subscribers
2) Subscribers from EU and any unknowns (treat them as if they are in the EU)
Many of the email service providers have this functionality or are currently rolling it out.

Why should I segment?:

  • You are going to re-engage with the subscribers from your EU (and those who are unknown) segmented portion of your list before May 25. The results of your re-engagement campaign won’t be great. You want to figure out how you can keep people on your list without getting a new consent.
  • For the non-EU list, you can continue communicating with them just like you have been.
  • If you have people that opted in cleanly to your newsletter, you can probably put them in the “ok” category. These people have given you consent to receive your marketing emails.

How do I run a re-engagement campaign?:

  • BEFORE you send the consent emails, first deliver extra value consistently.
    • Send an extra email a week.
  • THEN send emails asking for consent. Only to those who you have to send to!
    • Make sure that you have a system set up so that when someone does consent, you are taking them off this special “EU-non consent” list and moving them on to a “EU confirmed consent” list.
    • You want to send multiple “consent” emails and make them enticing. Pay close attention to the subject lines! Catchy or blatant subject lines might work well. The challenge is to get people to open the emails.
    • The only goal of the re-engagement campaign is to convince people to give you GDPR-compliant consent.
      • That might be by clicking a link in an email or signing up via an opt-in page. It depends on what your email service provider allows.

Anyone who doesn't give the necessary consent by May 24, should be deleted from your list. Remember, even storing or deleting their info is "processing," so this work needs to be done before May 25, 2018.


Summary of Bobby’s Suggestions to Preserve Your
Existing List and Get GDPR Compliant

Step #1: Build goodwill by delivering amazing value to your list between now and then. I'm talking about going above and beyond the normal value that I'm sure you deliver. Make your content SO good, no one will want to miss the awesomeness.

Step #2: Create your list of targets from whom you need new consents. For entrepreneurs in the EU, this will be your whole list. For entrepreneurs outside the EU, this will be everyone in the EU and anyone whose location is unknown.

Step #3: Run a re-engagement campaign to the list of people who need to provide fresh consent. Sell them on the benefits and do this in your own style. Good copywriting is still key here! You know your audience. You'll want to plan for a series of emails with increasingly dire (and interesting) subject lines to make sure people don't miss them.

Finally, anyone who doesn't give the necessary consent by May 24, should be axed from your list. Remember even storing or deleting their info is "processing," so this work needs to be done before May 25.


For online entrepreneurs, the main impact of GDPR will be in how we build our email list, so let’s take a list on what list-building will look like going forward.


IMPORTANT: Gone are the days of offering a lead magnet and adding everyone who claims the lead magnet to our marketing email lists.


What do I need to do moving forward in my list building efforts to be compliant with GDPR?

Because you have to get stand alone consent to add someone to our list, you either have to go back to the old “join my newsletter” model or use lead magnets and get consent somewhere along the funnel.

  • There’s no question that this consent would be sufficient, assuming you disclose what you will include.
  • But this method never really worked from a marketing standpoint... and there’s no reason to think that it will work now.
  • The “join my newsletter” approach is especially bad for non -EU entrepreneurs who can use segmenting as part of their strategy.

What would a workaround look like?

  • You can use lead magnets to get their name and email and then try to sell them on joining your list at some point in your funnel that you are allowed to have without getting further consent.
  • There are four touchpoints to consider:
    1) Opt-in Page (checkbox or drop-down menu)
    2) Sandwich Page (like a one-click upsell page)
    3) Delivery Email Itself
    4) In the Lead Magnet

Let’s break down all 4 options:

  • Opt-in Page:
    • You can add a voluntary checkbox/dropdown menu on your opt-in page.
    • This would clearly be consent if you do it right.
    • It must be voluntary and it cannot be the default. You can’t force them to agree and you can’t have the agreement as the default.
    • If you are going to do this, try to use a drop-down menu vs a checkbox. That way they have to choose “Yes or No” - so they have to make a choice and you are not forcing the “Yes.” With a checkbox for “Yes”, they can easily miss it and skip it all together (since it can’t be forced!).
  • Sandwich Page:
    • Include a one-click upsell page between opt-in and thank you page that asks them to subscribe.
    • “Hey! One more thing before we finish.” - It’s essentially a sales page for your newsletter.
    • This gives you the chance to sell the benefits of being on your list.
    • They are presented with this option all on its own, so it’s compliant.
  • Delivery Email:
    • You deliver the email as usual that gives them the lead magnet as promised.
    • Include language in the email to sell them on joining your list and include a call to action (example below).
    • Depending on how your system works, either send them to a separate opt-in or use click to segment the list.
  • In the Lead Magnet:
    • Add a paragraph at the end of your lead magnets selling them on your list with a clickable link.
    • This is sufficient consent and it gives them a reminder if they look back at your lead magnet later.

Guidance for non-EU Marketers:

  • Don’t seek consent until after the point that you can segment between EU and non-EU prospective leads. This likely means using only the delivery email and in the lead magnet itself.
  • **If your email service provider is able to show different pages based on somebody’s IP address/country, then do this at the front end (and outlined above). So you would show an alternative page for all outside of the US and don’t bother those in the US.

What is the Role of the Privacy Policy Related to GDPR?

  • Under the GDPR, you are required to inform people of certain information and you have to give them information to get informed consent.
  • And you have to provide this information to the individuals at the time that you are collecting their information. Your privacy policy is the tool you use to meet this requirement.
  • You need a Privacy Policy regardless of whether the GDPR applies. Privacy Policies were always important and they are a MUST in the GDPR world.
  • CA law requires you to disclose certain information.
  • There are hefty fines under GDPR and CA law, so get a policy in place.

What Do I Need to Include in the Privacy Policy?

  • The relevant contact information.
  • What information you collect and the basis for collecting it.
  • What you do with the data (including who else gets access).
  • The visitors rights under the GDPR.

Where Do You Put the Policy?

  • Create a standalone page on your website that includes the policy.
  • Put links to that page in your footer navigation on your website (and on opt-in pages, sales pages, LeadPages, webinar registration pages, etc.)
  • Put a link anywhere that you ask for consent or collect data.

What’s Next?

Check out Bobby’s Free GDPR Training: I’m breaking my rules a bit here because you all know I’ve had a policy for the last year or so of not sending podcast traffic to someone else’s sign up page - I’ve talked about that strategy on my show before. HOWEVER, this information is important and I want you to protect yourself. So I’m making an exception. I want to encourage you to check out Bobby’s FREE mini-training all about the GDPR. The goal of his mini training is not only to make sure that you, as an online entrepreneur, understand the legal requirements but also to give you the tools and practical advice you need to thrive in a GDPR world.

THANK YOU, Bobby, for your time and generosity in helping us understand GDPR. I truly feel I now have what it takes to move forward and implement to get compliant before the deadline! -- Amy

Apr 30, 2018
#206: The Post-It Content Creation Mini Training
29:26

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • When you’re looking into creating a course—and this is especially true when you’re just starting out—you’ve got a TON of information to choose from. Maybe you’ve been working on this material for 5 or 10 years, or you’ve been consulting a while and you have a ton of stories, examples and exercises.
  • Getting all of that out of your head can be difficult, to say the least. Whenever I sit down to create a new course (like I’m doing right now) it can be both exciting, and excruciating.
  • Which is why I wanted to bring on Gina Onativia, a content and course expert who is in the trenches every day with her clients, building their courses. Gina has a super practical post-it exercise she’s created to help her clients figure out some pre-details before diving into course creation. I think of her process as kind of like a “prelude” to my own...and I think you’ll find it extremely helpful in your own course creation process.

By the way, if you’re NOT in the midst of creating a course, you can also use this exercise for any type of content creation. AND I want to make sure you download the freebie—which has the exact steps we are going to talk about in this episode. In the freebie, you’ll see a real post-it exercise from one of Gina’s clients that you can use as an example to guide your own process (and I LOVE great examples!). (9:01)

With your freebie at the ready, get ready to dive into your course creation here.

This episode is brought to you by:
In my free masterclassHow to Confidently Create Your First Online Course in 60 Days, I will walk you through all of the pieces it takes to create a stellar online course. Save your spot here!

Check out these highlights:

  • The first area course creators get tripped up when starting out. [8:42]
  • How to start your post-it exercise. (If you’re an office supply junkie like me, get excited!) [9:31]
  • Why it’s so important to know what your avatar is feeling. [13:59]
  • How to brainstorm your overarching steps. [14:50]
  • What to do if you’re stuck. [16:27]
  • The final step: Your roadmap. [19:15]
  • How do I sell just a piece of my course as a standalone? [24:04]
Apr 12, 2018
#205: The 3 Do’s and 3 Don’ts for Entrepreneurs In-the-Making
28:19

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • The fear of not being good enough is a tough feeling to shake. If you struggle with this fear, I know it can show up way too often. Now, I can’t promise that it will ever completely go away—but I am proof that you can silence that voice A LOT.
  • If this fear comes up for you, then this is the show for you.
  • Today I’m going to introduce you to a powerhouse named Rachel Hollis—an amazing entrepreneur who manages a lifestyle website with almost two million readers each year and over 800,000 actively engaged followers on social media. Together, we’re talking about the pressures that you face as mothers and fathers and husbands and wives and employees, and of course, entrepreneurs.
  • We’re talking do’s and don’ts for entrepreneurs-in-the-making, and specifically, how to break through some of those major fears that we are constantly up against as you put yourself out there on social media, and in videos, and everything else you do to build your online business. (2:25)

Now, if you read the title of this episode and said something along the lines of, “Well, I’m not really sure I can call myself an entrepreneur…,” this is what I have to say to you: If you’re showing up, if you’re building your business, if you’re working hard toward your goals—you are legit! You are an entrepreneur, so it’s time to own it! So, if the fear of not being good enough, or that you’re not doing enough, or that you’re not doing it right, if those fears come up for you, then this is the show for you. Listen in.

This episode is brought to you by:
My incredible and free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan,” where you’ll learn my proven 3-stack system for leveraging the most powerful, “what’s working now” list-building strategies. You can sign up here.

Check out these highlights:

Links mentioned in this episode:

 
Apr 05, 2018
#204: How She Quit Her Day Job and Turned Her Side Hustle Into a Full-Time Thing with Melissa Norris
45:18

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • One question I get asked a bunch: How do I transition from my 9-to-5 to an online business full-time? What are the exact steps?
  • There are a lot of different ways to get there, but I wanted to bring in one of my students who did it in a less-scary and less-painful way that you can learn from and model.
  • Melissa Norris will share with us ONE roadmap for how she got to where she could quit her day job and live out her dream business.
  • Melissa’s story is filled with amazing insights and a-ha moments that many of you will be able to use for your own journeys—especially if you are interested in investing your time and money into webinars! (25:30)

Now here’s the kicker for today’s ep: Melissa’s business is all about the pioneering lifestyle! I’m talking full functioning homestead with pigs and cattle, grinding your own flour, canning vegetables… things you’ll probably NEVER see me doing (and for good reason!). The fascinating thing is she was able to use the same marketing principles and strategies (that you can use, too) to find her tribe, build her business and quit her day job. So if you’ve been wondering how you can ditch your J-O-B, this episode is the right one for you! Listen here to get Melissa’s step-by-step plan.

This episode is brought to you by:

Free Masterclass: How to Create and Deliver Your First Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even If You Don’t Have a List)

Check out these highlights:

  • Melissa’s incredible story about a full functioning homestead [4:24]
  • The importance of (sustainable) baby steps—and how to find the time to take those first steps. [13:28]
  • The inevitability of having to hustle, at least for some time. [17:08]
  • What scaling looked like after quitting her day job. [23:06]
  • Melissa’s hit “seasonal webinars” and what she learned from them. [25:30]
  • How Melissa runs her membership site. [29:44]
  • A few amazing sales sequence a-ha moments! [37:47]
Mar 29, 2018
#203: How To Get Noticed Online When You’re Just Starting Out
27:25

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • I’ve been an online marketing entrepreneur for a long time now. I’ve worked with thousands of students and have gotten pretty darn good at finding patterns. Specifically, patterns in limiting beliefs and mindset blocks that often stop promising entrepreneurs in their tracks.
  • One common struggle I’ve uncovered A LOT is the fight to stand out when the online world has become so saturated. And here’s the thing—it is tough to stand out. I’m not going to sugar coat it. It can be incredibly frustrating.
  • But I’m here to tell you—sometimes it’s not just about the strategies. Sometimes the key to getting noticed is all about...mindset.
  • And this all starts with one simple truth about every successful entrepreneur... (2:15)

So, in today’s episode I wanted to make sure you take the time to stop and learn how to shift the way you approach a noisy online world, and in turn, get noticed. Because it’s really the way you think that will ultimately set you apart. Tune in now.

This episode is brought to you by:
My incredible, and free masterclass, “The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan,” where you’ll learn my proven 3-stack system for leveraging the most powerful, “what’s working now” list-building strategies. You can sign up here.

Check out these highlights:

Mar 22, 2018
#202: How to Engage Your Small Facebook Group When You’re Just Starting Out with Caitlin Bacher
52:00

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • In the past few years, as Facebook has evolved, I’ve begun to think about Facebook groups in a whole different way. I believe groups—and not pages—are the key to building the kind of communities that allow you to truly connect with and grow your audience.
  • And it’s not just me! Many of my peers are having the same experience in discovering the incredible potential of Facebook groups. One superstar, in particular, is my friend Caitlin Bacher—who has grown her private FB group to more than 30,000 members in 3 years!
  • Caitlin is with me today to answer the question I get asked all of the time with my students: How do I boost engagement in my Facebook groups when I’m starting from zero?
  • Tune in to learn how to make Facebook groups one of your most effective social platforms! And Caitlin shares ALL, including the #1 mistake she sees entrepreneurs make with groups... [6:06]

Yes, I know it sounds like things just got trickier with the Facebook algorithm and the announcement that Facebook is going to focus more on “meaningful social interactions.” But don’t panic! This is actually great news for those of you who are using (or want to use) Facebook groups for your business. There are so many options. From Facebook groups that are tied to your paid content, to free communities that are tied to your bigger messaging and brand. It all begins here.

This episode is brought to you by:
Master Class: How to Confidently Create Your First Profitable Course in 60 Days
www.Amyporterfield.com/free

Check out these highlights:

  • Why Facebook groups and why someone would decide to do only Facebook groups? [4:14]
  • The importance of getting really good at selling one thing first. [8:55]
  • Everything you need to know about closed free groups. [17:57]
  • Some of the best type of content you can create for your own communities. [28:00]
  • What about Facebook groups created for paid courses? [34:01]
  • Using an email series to boost engagement within your Facebook group. [37:08]
  • How to use the group to help you solve for buyer’s remorse (for your paid content). [39:48]
Mar 15, 2018
#201: Five Ways to Make Money (Without Using Webinars)
55:11

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Yes, today’s topic may seem a bit off-brand for me, since to know me is to know that I love love love webinars.
  • However, today I’m mixing things up to present a few different strategies to make money online.
  • I STILL think webinars are the most powerful way you can drive your online business…but I wanted to share 5 ways to make money online that do not include a webinar training and that can set you up for bigger strategies to bring in bigger bucks.
  • Not only am I dishing out several ways you can make money, but I’m also talking about the actual offers you can craft to then promote the strategies I’m sharing.

I am a big believer in baby steps, and you may not be ready for webinars in your business—YET. So I’m going to talk about some simpler strategies you can use in your business until you’re ready to take the “webinar leap.” Let’s start making some money...

Check out these highlights:

Mar 08, 2018
#200: 10 Online Marketers Share Their Zig Stories
01:09:38

It’s the 200th episode! Cue the confetti and champagne! If you have been listening to me since I first aired in 2013, THANK YOU! It’s been 5 AMAZING years and I couldn’t have done it without you!

To celebrate, I have asked some of my closest friends and peers to share quick pieces about something I’ve been thinking about a lot lately…

How do you zig when others are zagging?

How do you “go against the grain”?

When do you take a risk and change things up?

And I couldn’t think of anyone better to tackle this topic than my small group of much-cherished and loved peers. I hope you enjoy listening to these as much as I have. Get ready to make some zigs happen for your own business!

If you’re wondering if it’s a right time to “zig” for your business, listen up to my four scenarios to help you decide.

Want a personalized message from me on instagram?
And if you want that new “outtake” of me sharing my personal story of zigging, make sure to 1) take a screenshot of this episode 2) post it on Instagram (feed or stories) and use #200withamy and tag me when you post it. Then I’ll slide into your DM with a link to this clip! That’s right, I will personally DM you...

Here’s a sneak peek of each of my amazing group of peers:

  • Jasmine Star gives us the inside scoop into how she invested a year of heart, soul and money into a launch that got her … an underwhelming amount of students. But then she decided to “knock on some digital doors” ... [12:50]
  • Ray Edwards shares the personal touch he provided for each person who bought one of his high-end programs. [18:25]
  • Pat Flynn starts off with a life-changing story from his childhood, then talks about how giving away a study guide for free became the launching-off point for Smart Passive Income. [20:03]
  • Diane Sanfilippo on why you need to be focused on creating paid content and programs. [26:30]
  • Julie Solomon offers up her own version of “Pitch Perfect” and how she took the initiative to start monetizing her blog. [32:01]
  • Tarzan Kay shares how she broke ALL the rules of launches, and executed a simple (no stress!) promotion that netted her five figures. [39:59]
  • James Wedmore gives us multiple examples of zigging, and asks a series of questions to help you come up with your own different “out of the box” ideas. [45:36]
  • Russell Brunson talks about how one T-shirt helped to reduce his ClickFunnels churn by 23 percent (!)—and build a powerful community in the process. [51:03]
  • Rick Mulready walks his own talk and tries his hand at Facebook Messenger for feedback about this podcast. The results may surprise you—because they surprised him! [56:51]
  • Jenna Kutcher gets real (as always) and tells you why she decided to go completely transparent with her messaging. [1:01:18]

Links to learn more about my special group of friends:

Mar 01, 2018
#199: From Two Failed Course Launches to Pre-Sell Success with Michelle Evans
53:29

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Michelle and I start at the very beginning (including how she transitioned from her 16-year corporate job at Microsoft to creating online courses). Michelle dives into all of the excruciating details of her two failed launches, and also what she did to turn it all around. I think you’ll get a lot out of the strategies, lessons and insights she’s sharing, including how she used my program Courses that Convert to make her own course dreams come true.

Check out these highlights:

Feb 22, 2018
#198: Five Important Facebook Ad Changes with Rick Mulready
40:42

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

If you’ve decided that this year is THE year to master Facebook ads, you cannot miss out on all the juicy details Rick has for us in today’s ep. Some of you know Rick from previous podcasts, and I love having him back because he’s always making sure you’re on top of your game with Facebook AND Instagram Ads. So let’s get started on the five must-areas Rick says you need to be aware of today.

Check out these highlights:

  • Where did Power Editor go? [4:51]
  • How Facebook is updating the potential audience reach. [7:39]
  • Should you keep your audiences separate? [10:40]
  • Budget optimization at the Campaign Level: you want to be ready to optimize this update. [11:45]
  • How to choose between manual and automatic bidding. [15:26]
  • Customizing ads for different placements in both Facebook and Instagram (this one’s brand new). [19:01]
  • Messenger Ads—why Rick thinks they will be BIG in 2018. [25:47]
  • Cyber Monday’s billion-dollar payoff and why keeping the mobile user in mind is super important. [31:22]
Feb 15, 2018
#197: How to 10X Your Results in 2018 (and Beyond) with 3 Dead Simple Strategies With Marie Forleo
01:00:11

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Marie has this uncanny ability to help you uncover what’s truly holding you back from getting results and on this episode, you’ll be amazed to discover that all of the strategies we’re diving into today require more of you and less of all the tools and gizmos you think you need to succeed online.

And if you let them, these strategies will free you up and open the door to a business you’ve been dreaming of.

WARNING: This one is definitely an “ear-buds episode” (to wear around the kids); Marie’s breaking out the adult language.

Check out these highlights:

  • Why running faster and faster and faster and working harder and harder and harder (like a hamster) will not get you the results you want. [10:00]
  • What it means to show the raw, real you. [12:02]
  • How Marie shook up her longtime video show with a little sumthin’ called Marie Unplugged. [17:23]
  • Do NOT spend a lot of money on that production! [20:46]
  • A real unscripted moment Marie had on the streets of New York. [22:23]
  • Our 24-hour challenge for you. [23:25]
  • Forget Social and focus on THIS instead. [25:05]
  • One of the most underrated and overlooked traits for creatives and entrepreneurs. [35:43]
  • How Marie took her B-School refund rate from 19% to less than 2%. [40:31]

Make sure to check out Marie’s FREE Video Training Series

This is some of the best marketing training out there today (in my opinion!). In Video One Marie covers two burning questions:

  • Where should I focus in my business?
  • How do I know if I’m working on the right things for my business?

Grab video one here now.

Links I mentioned in this episode:

Exploring B-School: 30 Days of Diving Into the Details
For the third year in a row, I’m bringing back my free, 30-Day B-School Pop-up Facebook Group, where I will get laser-focused on my experience with Marie’s B-School program. I’ll share personal business-building stories of how I got where I am today, exclusive live video trainings, and a lot of insights of how I got the most out of B-School. You can request access here.

Feb 08, 2018
#196: 3 Surprising Strategies to Increase Sales on Your Next Webinar
26:22

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • If I know one thing after running hundreds of webinars, it’s this: Connection on a webinar presentation is THE path to higher conversions.
  • With that in mind, I wanted to show you three key strategies that may just surprise you—not because they are advanced, or radically different. They may be surprising to you because they are not the typical strategies you talk about when it comes to boosting webinar conversions.
  • Which is EXACTLY why I wanted to share these three elements with you, so that you can focus on creating true, real touch points with your audience on your webinar, create those deeper connections, and ultimately see better conversions.

As some of you might already know, I relaunched my List Builder’s Lab program with a series of live webinars. And every time I do a series of live webinars I always learn new strategies or walk away with aha moments about how to do things differently or have a bigger impact. And you know me: I’m holding nothing back. Including sharing an embarrassing story of how I blew off advice from Marie Forleo. So let’s dive in.

Check out these highlights:

  • The true path to higher conversions begins here. [2:12]
  • How to get your webinar audience thinking “That’s totally me!” [4:58]
  • The (strong) case for keeping the chat live and open. [8:35]
  • What my team does during live chats to keep attendees engaged. [12:08]
  • How to get the most out of your Q&A time. [14:50]
  • Increasing the trust factor during every presentation. [17:45]
  • Are you asking: At what point in my live webinar do I focus on selling? I’ve got answers. [19:10]
  • The importance of reading between the lines and identifying what your audience SHOULD be asking. [20:18]

This episode is brought to you by:

Free Masterclass: How to Create Your Ultimate List Building Catch-up Plan

Feb 01, 2018
#195: The 6 Pillars of My Content Creation Process
37:35

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • You KNOW you have to create “quality content” for your different outcomes—but how do you make sure that it is relevant and compelling, and the entire process doesn’t feel completely overwhelming
  • Today I’m taking the overwhelm out of getting out weekly material plus creating content inside of your programs and promotions plus everything else you’ve got to think about by breaking down every single part of the content-creating process for you.
  • Introducing: My six pillars of content creation process and how they help me stay focused with every content piece I produce.

When you start categorizing your content and just hone in on one or two things (versus the 30 things on your project plan!), you can do them much more effectively. With these pillars, I want you to know exactly what you’re focusing on for where you are in your business. No more second-guessing on what kind of content you need to engage your tribe, or build up to a promotion. I’ve put it all out there so you can take immediate action.

Oh and by the way, it may surprise you to know that I will often spend more time and energy working on my free content than on my paid content. And there’s a solid why behind that. (19:33)

Check out these highlights:

  • How I create so much content in my business [00:38]
  • The type of content that brings in my ideal customer avatars like bees to honey. [6:48]
  • To freebie or not to freebie? (Or: How to know if my content will work best with a freebie?) [9:07]
  • Content for the masses vs. content for your Tribe. [13:34]
  • Who is social media content really for? [16:50]
  • When to focus most of your content creation time into your free promo content. [19:33]
  • The key lesson for creating paid course content. [25:10]
  • The right time for paid bonus content. [27:45]
  • Why I’m including paid relationship content in my six pillars (and what that even means!). [31:40]

Here's the '6 Pillars SlideShare' I promised in this episode: www.amyporterfield.com/6pillars

Jan 24, 2018
#194: How I Handle Criticism as an Online Marketer
21:09

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

When you are building your online business, you’re opening yourself up to a completely different world for feedback (in contrast to say, the corporate realm). And the fact is that total strangers may be giving you “input.” It can be daunting in the beginning, however if you can learn to face this feedback without taking it personal, then you will become that much stronger of an entrepreneur. Let’s check out those tips now.

Check out these highlights:

  • Trolls are the worst, and you have to learn to deal with them. But what about when it’s from your audience, your clients, your students? [5:17]
  • That one time I tried to make up for a “mistake” with a disgruntled fan and how it went very, very wrong. [6:13]
  • How two of my students handled a flood of negative comments… [12:16]
  • Sometimes criticism can actually be really helpful- depending on the delivery. [15:50]
  • What I actually learned after that horrible experience dealing with criticism (and what I do now). [16:44]
  • What about when you want to give feedback? [17:56]

This episode is brought to you by:
Free Masterclass: The Ultimate List Building Catch-up Plan

Jan 18, 2018
#193: Should I Join a Mastermind?
40:10

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

So today I’m digging into masterminds

  • Why you should think about joining a mastermind
  • How you know if you’re ready
  • How to pick a great one

Plus I’ll talk about a big decision I just made to join a mastermind for 2018, why I’m signing up, and who’s coming with me.

By the way—if you know me, you know I’m always looking for inspiration. And a big thing about working with a mastermind is that the group members inspire you to take action, partly because you’re seeing them take action, and partly because you’re in this together, and want everyone to succeed. I’ll even share a specific example of how I inspired one member to get some serious things done for her business. (13:19)

Check Out These Highlights:

This episode is brought to you by:
Free Masterclass: The Ultimate List Building Catch-up Plan

Mastermind/Group Coaching Resources:

Jeff Walker’s Masterminds
Jeff has two—a Launch Club and a Platinum group. Currently all spaces are full; for more information, email support@productlaunchformula.com.

Brendon Burchard’s Masterminds (2 levels)

Rick Mulready’s Accelerator Group Coaching Program

The Course for Completion Mastermind (for course creators)

*Note: At this time both of James Wedmore’s masterminds are full and therefore I am not linking to them in the show notes.

Jan 11, 2018
#192: Are You Embracing the “Visionary Role” In Your Business?
25:50

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

As you listen to me figure out what I really want to be as a leader I want you thinking about this for yourself, and how you can implement these three steps and transform your business in the next year. Being intentional about setting my vision for each year has shifted the way I think about my business, and I want the same for you! Let’s start to work those visionary muscles...

Check out these highlights:

  • See how one of my favorite TV characters inspired my theme. [1:54]
  • How this all started with a simple quiz on an airplane ride. [6:58]
  • One person I definitely look up to as the iconic visionary leader. [10:46]
  • How to find your own visionary role model. [13:00]
  • Being real and vulnerable doesn’t necessarily clash with being professional. [13:52]
  • When your image online takes over your real-life identity. And how to prevent it. [17:38]
  • How to actually manifest your vision. [21:22]
Jan 04, 2018
#191: A Week in the Life (A Behind the Scenes Look Into My Business)
01:08:27

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • If you’re anything like me, you love to see behind the curtain, to what’s really going on with successful entrepreneurs.
  • Many of you have been asking me (for a while) to map out my day—what I plan to do, what I actually get done, how I use my time.
  • Well I’m taking it one step further and talking through an entire WEEK.
  • You’ll hear about my struggles. How I get into the flow. And when I couldn’t get it together. Oh, and the one podcast I’m obsessed with right now.

The truth is, my processes and habits are a big part of what makes my business successful. I’ve got BIG chunks of time carved out where I can stay hyper-focused and get what might take another person weeks to do. And I know that many of my students want to do that too. So I’m hoping you’ll learn a little something about how to optimize your routine with this episode...

Here’s How the Episode Breaks Down:
I’ll start the week with my Sunday session.

From there, each day I’ll check in during the Morning and talk about what the day is going to look like.

Then I’ll check back in during the Evening to chat about what actually happened.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • My personal and professional goals for the week (including my battle with one food that makes me feel sick). [7:08]
  • How I approach a new content project. [18:45]
  • My workday shutdown ritual. [24:47]
  • All about my co-working space and how it helps my business. [30:50]
  • My quality time with the hubby, Hobie. [34:51]
  • The 3 roles I play in my business. [38:06]
  • My new favorite podcast featuring one of my business idols. [41:23]
  • Jasmine Star and my first InstaLive. [43:00]
  • Where I ended up at the end of of the week. [1:03:01]
Dec 28, 2017
#190: How Getting ‘Niche Specific’ Evolved Into $12K/Month Automated Webinars
49:07

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Today this dog lover (me!) is talking cat grooming—but it’s not what you think :). I’m highlighting cat grooming as the starting point of what has become a lucrative business empire for my student and new friend, Danelle German.
  • Danelle started with one simple question (5:07) —and grew that focus to a business that now generates $12,000 a month on evergreen webinars ALONE. That’s not counting her speaking, curriculum deals, physical products and certification program.
  • Danelle is here to teach us: If you really want to make money in this online marketing world, you need to drill down and serve a specific audience.

You never know who you’re going to meet at live events, right? And I am so pleased that I got the opportunity to meet Danelle at a recent event, because she is the perfect example of starting small and scaling slowly and intelligently. (During today’s episode, you’re going to hear me say “genius” A LOT.) I encourage you to “listen beyond the cat grooming” and absorb how Danelle uncovered new opportunities to consistently build her business.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • The question that Danelle’s audience REALLY wanted answered. [5:29]
  • How difficult it was to focus on a small niche like cat grooming (when starting out)... [7:37]
  • Why you don’t need massive amounts of customers. [12:12]
  • How Danelle was able to avoid any tough competition. [14:45]
  • The secret element that made Danelle’s business so effective in the early days. [18:19]
  • Why it’s crucial to shed light on the problems your audience faces. [19:24]
  • How Danelle added a non-cat grooming audience to her repertoire. [22:33] And where she found them (so you can add your own sub-audience!).
  • Danelle’s experience on how she used Webinars That Convert to lock in her success.[29:05]
  • Why she switched to evergreen webinars. [32:30]
  • The unbelievable show-up rate Danelle sees on her webinars. [34:43]
  • How to find and nail your niche. [41:38]

Danelle on the Value of Staying in Your Zone of Expertise:
“If I am 100% confident in what I am talking about and what I am teaching and, ultimately, what I am selling to people, I am going to do a much better job. The further I get out of the scope of my area of expertise and skill set, that confidence begins to diminish. I keep it real tight around that skill set and that knowledge base and then grow from there.”
—Danelle German, Online Marketing Entrepreneur, National Cat Groomers Institute

Dec 21, 2017
#189: 3 Wins (and a Few Misses) From My Live Events
30:24

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • This year I made a big decision to open up what is typically a B-School bonus event, and do two one-day live events for ALL of my students.
  • There is something incredible about holding live events—the connections with your audience, the relationships you build, the amazing team building.
  • Which is exactly WHY I wanted to go behind the scenes and share the big learnings, and a few misses.
  • I know some of you are thinking about holding your own events, so I wanted to give you some steps to making sure you hold your own ultra-successful event. And for me, it all starts with the connecting opportunities. (18:02)

So if you have been thinking about using events as a great upsell, or a VIP experience, or maybe a new revenue stream, you will want to listen in to all the takeaways from this episode. For each point I walk through, I made sure to provide a “take action” piece for you so you can immediately apply it to your own event planning.

Let’s get started making events work for your business.

By the Way…
I mention Marie Forleo’s B-School and my over the top bonus package (with a free live event!) for those who signed up via my affiliate link. I rarely do live events so if you don’t want to miss it in 2018, click HERE to sign up for the wait list and get all the details once it launches.

Check out these highlights:

  • WHY I decided to open my events to all of my students. [2:18]
  • The art of layering elements for a fabulous experience (in other words: gifts!). [7:39]
  • The feeding frenzy I created—and how to get people to stay in the room and connect. [10:42]
  • Thinking about inviting guest speakers? Check out these criteria to help you choose. [16:30]
  • Why you should consider including a VIP experience.[20:00]
  • There’s always room for improvement… [21:22]
  • How to make Q&A time meaningful for everyone (and not have it drag on!). [23:35]
Dec 14, 2017
#188: What I Learned From a Year of Automating My Business
28:48

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • At the end of 2016 it hit me: I was working for my business instead of my business working for me. Can I get an “AMEN”?
  • So I had to make a BIG decision and explore an entire year of evergreen for my business this past year (2017) and limit my number of live launches.
  • In the spirit of pure transparency, I’m looking back on how the year went, and putting it all out there for you: the good, the bad, the (at times) ugly so you know how I made this decision, how I executed, and what I learned from the entire process. And how proud I am of my “bold move.”

Spoiler-alert for this episode: I thought my year of automation would be much easier than it was. I took a leap of faith, and now regret NONE of it. In fact, I’m a better leader and business owner because of it. Today I’ll break down the positive results, and some of the learnings along the way.

To make it truly actionable, I have broken this episode into four parts:
Part One: How I approached the year of automation [4:38]
Part Two: What happened and the results [10:58]
Part Three: What I learned [14:46]
Part Four: How I plan to move forward [24:55]

Check Out These Highlights:

Dec 07, 2017
#187: How to Use Pinterest to Generate Traffic and Profits With Jenna Kutcher
45:56

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • What IF instead of looking at Pinterest as just another Social Media platform, you saw it as a powerful search engine that can drive traffic for your business?
  • That’s exactly why I invited my guest today—photographer, podcaster and savvy business woman Jenna Kutcher. Because she has experienced the kind of amazing impact Pinterest can have on your business—in fact, Pinterest is the platform that drives the MOST traffic to her site: More than 5,000 unique visitors every single month. (Yeah, I couldn’t believe it at first either!)
  • Pinterest also (at times) gets a bad rap because it may not be the first site you think of to reach your core clients, which also couldn’t be more wrong.
  • I think first and foremost, a mindset shift around Pinterest is in order, starting here.

Yes, Pinterest can be THAT effective. And what I love about Jenna is that she holds nothing back. She’s the kind of gal that says what she’s thinking, or feeling, at any moment. I feel like this episode is in that same spirit—open, and raw. I think you’ll maybe change your mind about Pinterest, and find a new friend in Jenna.

Check out these highlights:

  • Why it’s so important to be vulnerable with your brand. [8:13]
  • Should you care about your number of followers on Pinterest? [19:06]
  • The first step you want to take with your Pinterest strategy. [21:35]
  • How to look like you are active on Pinterest (and make the algorithm work for you!). [25:12]
  • Proven ways to get the most mileage out of your content. [27:54]
  • Jenna’s favorite Pinterest tool (for scheduling AND checking your links). [31:16]
  • This one tip will guarantee you engagement on Pinterest. [35:11]
Nov 30, 2017
#186: How to Makeover Your Blog to Get More Traction with Julie Solomon
51:18

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

In the world of online marketing, all of the people I follow and look up to—and who I know are financially successful in their business—they all have a central hub where they create content on a weekly basis. And for most of them… it’s a blog.

So look no further for the connection between blogging and having a thriving business. Now I want to make sure you are using the strategies that really get results (v. blogging to crickets)—and that’s where Julie is the master. Let’s start your makeover.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • Find out why Julie calls her blog “the headquarters”.  [12:17]
  • Why it’s so important to know your avatar’s favorite Margarita flavor. [14:06]
  • The five core values a great blog post stems from.  [19:22]
  • Julie’s steps to stay consistent (it may not be what you think!) [23:13]
  • The biggest mistakes bloggers make. [27:10]
  • Julie’s favorite tools to promote her blog posts. [35:22]
  • How to know if you have a “healthy” blog. [38:02]
  • How your mom can help you optimize your blog. [41:53]
  • Trigger words: what are they and how you can use them. [45:00]
Nov 23, 2017
#185: All About Instagram Ads with Rick Mulready
39:27

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Rick Mulready is back to give the scoop on Social Media ads—but with a TWIST! We’re taking a break from Facebook ads (but don’t worry—much more to come as always on those!) and shining the light on his Social Media sister, Instagram.
  • Now just because these two are related, don’t think one size fits all when it comes to working with these platforms. Rick and I walk through the nuances of the difference between the two (especially when it comes to imagery, videos and placement).
  • Just in case you don’t think Instagram ads are worth for your business—keep in mind that there are 800 million Instagram users right now that are up for grabs.
  • AND if that’s not enough, if you have a product or service, Instagram can be an incredibly powerful platform for you. Just take a listen to these stats that Rick throws out. [7:39]

I gotta tell you, I love Instagram and feel that it’s a great time to grab your audience’s attention. So I’m shifting gears with Rick today so we can help you capitalize on the Insta Opportunity. I want you to dive in...and help me figure out the big question: Emoji or emoticons?

A special Easter Egg for today’s episode:
It turns out you DO need 10,000 followers in order to have the swipe up feature. (And on that same note, follow Rick on Instagram @rickmulready so he can get the followers he needs!) If you want to know what I’m talking about, check out our sidebar conversation on this.[21:00]

And a few great Instagram examples (including that story ad I ran):

Check out these highlights:

  • Let’s start this off with WHO exactly is on Instagram (so you know if you should be there!). [3:20]
  • What are the best days and times to post on Instagram? [5:00]
  • Where and how to set up your ads (on Facebook and Instagram). [10:39]
  • Which ad type would be best for your business and customers—and the parameters for each. [12:03]
  • The big differences between Facebook and Instagram (Here’s a hint: you CAN’T just repurpose one for the other). [13:17]
  • With Insta, do you have the same targeting possibilities as Facebook? [19:22]
  • How to take advantage of story ads (and what happened after I ran my first one for my List Builders Lab promo). [22:10]
  • Why you need to add text and emojis to your InstaStories. [28:16]
  • How to choose the right objectives when creating your Instagram ad campaigns. [28:59]
Nov 16, 2017
#184: How She Did It: From a Webinar False Start to a $30,000 Success Story
42:44

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • I’ve talked extensively about my epic fails with webinars—and I’ve also shared how I picked myself back up, practiced a ton—experimented—and just went for it. It wasn’t any different for my friend, video rockstar Luria Petrucci, who has an incredible webinar success story that you need to hear.
  • I want this episode to inspire you to take action on your own webinars. Because if Luria can do it (and spend only $600 on Facebook ads in the process!), you can too.
  • If you are a student of my Webinars That Convert program, this is the episode for YOU as Luria (a fellow student) highlights exactly which tips and insights worked well for her.
  • And if you don’t have anything to sell yet, you can use the exact strategy Luria used to put an offer out there. 

You may remember Luria from Episode 168 (The Easy Start Guide to Live Video), and I know I don’t usually bring guests back so quickly. But after hearing Luria’s story I knew you had to hear it too! So get ready. I really want you to take everything Luria learned to heart and think about how YOU can stretch yourself with webinars to get to the crazy results she proved weren’t so crazy after all. Also: Make sure you stay until the very end to learn how Luria kept her webinar attendees super engaged!

And one thing I want you to take advantage of...

If you are looking to up your webinar game, I have a must-see training where I take you behind the scenes of my actual webinar creation process: How to Create Your First Wildly Profitable Webinar (Even if You Don’t Have a List). That’s right, I literally open the gates wide open and show you all of my webinar creation secrets, including example after example of my own webinar strategies. I absolutely know this will be incredibly valuable for your own webinar creation process, so make sure to book a time to watch.

Check out these highlights:

  • Why Luria was skittish about doing webinars at first. [2:30]
  • How “stealing” made Luria thousands of dollars on her webinar. [9:05]
  • How to align your content with your offer. [11:14]
  • Get a detailed walk-through of Luria’s amazing results after her webinar strategy overhaul (and a little mix-up with conversion rate numbers!). [17:30]
  • Our big-game changer webinar strategy. [24:58]
  • The best way to get your audience to connect with you on a deeper level and want to take the next step. [29:47]
  • Struggling with your own webinars? Luria has a few final thoughts. [36:50]
Nov 09, 2017
#183: How to Create Your Promotional Calendar
43:34

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Rules of Engagement Upfront:

  • I want you to take an entire day to do this process. I know, I know. No bellyaching. I don’t want you to feel rushed or pressured to get it done.
  • Pick a “special spot” to do this. If you want extra credit, book out a hotel room or a co-working space. If you’re going to do this at home, promise me you’ll send everyone away so you have the space to create, focus and think.
  • Don’t do this alone. Engage your virtual assistant or anyone on your team (either via Skype or fly them out!). I understand that you may be a “one-person show”—I encourage you to then find a friend or a peer that can be your sounding board.
  • Grab a whiteboard or a big sticky board. You’ll need a space to put your notes.

The freebie for this episode is EXACTLY WHAT YOU NEED TO PLAN:

You’ll hear me map out this entire process on the episode. Then, when you are ready to do your own plan, grab the step-by-step cheat sheet so you can work through this process for your own business. With this worksheet, you’ll know exactly how to plan for your 2018.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • Why your “non-negotiables” are crucial to your business success. [9:48]
  • The power of “declaring your number” and why it can drive your entire success for the New Year. [11:54]
  • How to get clarity on the past so you can plan for the future. [13:32]
  • The metrics you should come to the table with. [14:15]
  • What to ask yourself when you calendar your big promotions—a.k.a “the fun stuff.” [18:43]
  • Ways to make money in the next six months (to help get those creative juices flowing!). [19:52]
  • Don’t make this one mistake when planning out your promotions! [27:38]
  • Why you need white space between promotions. [30:45]
  • How to not let FOMO take you down in your planning process. [34:58]
Nov 02, 2017
#182: How to Mega-Batch Your Content
23:05

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

Now if you’re thinking—this seems like too much work, I don’t know if I can handle this. Trust me, I get it. However, as a business owner, I don’t want you to get bogged down on details that don’t serve you. I want you to have the freedom and flexibility to focus on things that will really move the needle in your business. And I promise that mega-batching will help you get there.

Check Out These Highlights:

  • The 5 sessions I use for each batch. [9:35]
  • How I break up the recording of my podcast. [13:38]
  • Some of my favorite aspects of mega-batching. [16:41]
  • Tweaks I want to make for the future with this system. [18:58]
  • What I have planned for the podcast in 2018. [19:43]
  • Two final thoughts to help you start your own mega-batching efforts. [21:17]
Oct 26, 2017
#181: Eliminating Money Blocks with James Wedmore
41:54

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • There’s more to running a business than just steps and strategies. You’ve got to master your inner game: your core beliefs and thoughts.
  • There’s a big (and all-too prevalent) myth when it comes to your time and money: That the secret to success is to work hard and hustle. [6:47]
  • No one is exempt from dealing with money issues. So it’s time to face them.

“We gotta talk about money.” That’s what my dear friend and mindset maven James Wedmore said when I told him I wanted him back on the show to talk entrepreneurial mindset. James and I both think that money is a huge block when it comes to your business. So today I want to chat about some of the beliefs or blind spots that just might be holding you back from finding real success for your business. Do me a favor and just see if they feel true for you…

Check out these highlights:

  • The real 80/20 percent split when it comes to being an entrepreneur. [7:52]
  • We all have a relationship with money just like we all have a relationship with our mom, dad, spouse, friends, etc. [10:08]
  • One of my biggest money (limiting) beliefs, which stems from my childhood. [12:46]
  • Contrary to popular belief, money does not come from effort. [14:22]
  • Why  believing in abundance is an absolute for entrepreneurs like us. [15:48]
  • The easiest way to create new beliefs. [20:02]
  • How to get “passionately curious” and “play the scientist role.” [21:58]
  • This is WHY you really want things in life. [26:17]
  • A few ways to practice the power of gratitude. [30:27]
  • Final money mindset shifts from James. [32:57]
Oct 19, 2017
#180: 7 Ways I’ve Collaborated with Friends & Influencers to Increase Profits
46:44

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • On today’s episode I’m going to walk you through seven collaborations that I’ve done over the years that range from my very first time collaborating, and even feeling a little shy (but learning so much!) all the way to collaborations with some of the biggest names in online marketing.
  • I’m giving you the inside scoop into how those actually came to be, and some of the lessons I learned from each of these amazing experiences.
  • And here’s a BIG note to remember: The key to successful collaborations is found within your relationship with the person – not on what that person can do for you or what you can do for him or her. [13:24]

I know this from experience: Building your business for the long term is much easier when you can find peers and collaborators that you can build amazing relationships with. When you’re first starting out and you may not have much of a list or presence, you want to find collaborations that can help you find an audience for your business. So I hope you enjoy as I walk through my own experiences, and how I cultivated some of the best business relationships I have to this day.

The freebie for this episode is SO GOOD:

I’ve got the Top 10 questions you should ask YOURSELF if you’re considering any collaboration. It’s a checklist of sorts, where I talk about the criteria I personally use when I think about partnering with someone. If you get honest with these questions, you will save yourself a lot of stress and potential “business heartache” - it’s a thing, trust me.

Download it here and run through them the next time you’re thinking about a collaboration.

Check out these highlights:

  • Collaboration #1: My very “first time”: how I went in, what I learned from it and what I wish I’d done differently [4:14]
  • Collaboration #2: When and how I learned the real special ingredient for collaborations (here’s a hint: it’s all about trust) [9:50]
  • Collaboration #3: How I landed a key influencer [15:37]
  • Collaboration #4: The most successful affiliate marketing relationship I’ve ever had. (Spoiler alert: It’s all about B-School with Marie Forleo!) [20:50]
  • Collaboration #5: How I moved things into the real world (think small live event) with a weekend workshop collaboration [24:42]
  • Collaboration #6: I get asked all of the time about adding guest experts inside of your paid course…here’s a full explanation of what I typically do, with Jasmine Star as my shining example [32:24]

Collaboration #7: And I just couldn’t leave this one out… If you’ve ever wondered how Rick Mulready and I started working together, maybe you’d like to hear about the coffee date I didn’t really want to go to. [39:10]

Oct 12, 2017
#179: The Real Truth Why I Hate Video (Hint: It's My Weight)
10:00

I am a firm believer in changing things up, breaking a pattern, switching gears…

Today I’m doing all three.

Because I know it’s time.

The truth is, I’ve been holding back for a while.

I have finally decided that I’ve had enough of the BS, and the fear.

To know me is to know I don’t love being on video. And I have given a lot of excuses around that.

Time to come clean:

I hate video because I’m embarrassed about my weight.

Wow. It felt freeing just typing that.

So this podcast is my very open letter to you, dear listener. Because I owe you this openness—so I can (perhaps) also inspire you to come out and call out what’s been holding you back. And even give it a name.

This episode was a tough one to record. But worth it. 100% worth it.

Here I go.

Amy

Oct 05, 2017
#178: List Building + Social Media (What's Working Now)
48:26

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Right at this moment you should be thinking about your list building efforts. I want you borderline obsessed with list-building! This episode is key to your obsession, as today you’re getting every single one of my tested and tried tips and tricks for list building.
  • List building starts with a great idea for a lead magnet, and a great idea for a lead magnet always starts with your ideal customer avatar. And there is ONE big question I ask when I'm thinking about my ideal customer avatar. [6:14]
  • There’s a new player in the list building game that’s getting off-the-charts results. It’s VIDEO and when done right, it will boost your list growth—it’s all how you use it—and that’s part of today’s episode.

I know I’ve talked about list-building many times before, but here’s the thing: list building—when done right—can dramatically change your business (I should know, since it completely changed mine). So I want you to listen, then take immediate action of one or two of the strategies I mention.

Stay tuned for a NEW, FREE and LIVE webinar with yours truly ;-)

This is a training I’m doing by myself, and LIVE: “The Ultimate List-Building Catch-Up Plan.” If you’ve ever felt behind in your list building, I’m going to show you how to get caught up quickly in terms of what to do inside your business to create a list-building foundation that can run on autopilot.

Check out these highlights:

  • How to come up with a great idea for a lead magnet. [5:08]
  • How to embrace video when it comes to list building. [10:06]
  • Confirmation emails—there’s so much more you can do with them! [17:25]
  • The right strategy for your nurture sequence. [21:33]
  • How calls-to-actions can make all of the difference with your campaigns. [24:45]
  • The tools I use (and how I use them) for my own list building. [27:05]
  • How and why I link my original free content to my list-building efforts. [40:11]

The Ultimate List Building Catch-Up Plan: My Proven 3-Stack System For Leveraging The Most Powerful, “What’s Working Now” List Building Strategies (without the stress, tech confusion, or crazy overwhelm)

Sep 28, 2017
#177: How to Design Your Ideal Week with Michael Hyatt
40:01

Biggest Takeaways You Don’t Want to Miss:

  • Being productive is really not about “getting things done” and MORE about doing what’s inside your desire zone.
  • You’ve got your big “time savers” like productivity software, your smartphone, your hacks—but how is that all working out for you? These “resources” are actually cutting into your time!
  • You can transform your entire routine by defining your Ideal Week [26:39] (I know because I did it!).
  • There are four rituals you need to set yourself up for success. My guess is you are doing maybe one or two of these (at best) right now. So let’s UP your game.

What if you stopped telling yourself you needed to be more productive, and instead, focused on being free—to focus, be presentspontaneous, to do nothing. I know, kind of crazy, right? But that’s EXACTLY what my very special guest, Michael Hyatt, and I tackle today.

A quick bonus for listening:
I wanted you to see how the Ideal Week exercise (listen here to understand the concept of an Ideal Week) is working for me, including my morning and workday rituals. Click play below to watch how I am now planning out my week.

You’ll want to check out Michael’s new training:

So many times you are doing things in the name of “productivity” that are actually making you feel more overwhelmed and discouraged. I want you to start making real progress and feel in control. Michael will talk all about that and more in his free training, “The 7 Deadly Sins of Productivity: The Hidden Habits Undermining Your Performance (And How to Change Them).” Sign up here for free before it’s too late!

Check out these podcast highlights:

  • You want to live your life in ONE out of four zones. [5:42]
  • How to provide a “positive no.” [12:22]
  • Tips to automate tasks (beyond just using technology).  [15:44]
  • How to really structure your morning routine. [16:22]
  • The first step to optimizing delegation that so many miss. [22:22]
  • Your different “stage times” and how to allocate time for each. [26:51]
  • The power of “batching your meetings” to create more white space. [27:22]
Sep 21, 2017
#176: Steal My Podcast Project Plan!
46:21

Why you’ve got to listen to today’s episode:

  • A podcast can dramatically change your business by connecting you with your audience in a new and intimate way, each and every week.
  • Having a comprehensive system (and proven project plan!) can help you streamline your delivery of consistent weekly content.
  • You can truly scale your content efforts—and save a TON of time—if you use a little system called “batching” when planning.
  • There’s one list-building tactic that’s on my MUST list: freebies, or content upgrades. There’s definitely an art and science to implementing these the right way. [26:28]

Today I’m bringing together two of my passions—podcasting and systems—in the ultimate behind-the-scenes of my podcast episodes. And I’ve spared no detail. It’s all here—from how I come up with my topics, to how we publish the finished recording, I walk through it all.

And you’ve got to get today’s freebie:

It’s too good for words: a complete project plan of our process, ready for you to use at any time. I walk you through each of the six stages of podcast production, and even sprinkle in some insider notes. If you want to streamline your content creation, this one is a must for you.

And another quick bonus for today:

I made you a quickie video to walk through my podcasting equipment essentials. I think you’ll be pleasantly surprised by how simple my set-up is! Click play to watch now.

Check out these highlights:

  • My star podcast team members, and the roles you need for your own production [4:44]
  • One of the best and most prepared podcast guests I have ever hosted [9:36]
  • The new strategy I am using to get more content done in concentrated amounts of time [13:37]
  • Why your titles are so crucial in your production timeline [20:43]
  • How and why I am changing up my show notes [23:54]
  • The podcast and social media promotion: How I am experimenting [29:50]
  • The lowdown on all of the imagery I use for the podcast [33:55]
  • The advanced strategy I employ for Instagram [42:37]
Sep 14, 2017
#175: How I Went from Corporate to Consulting to Courses
53:30

You asked, and I’m bringing it: My story. And I mean ALL the details, of how I went from corporate to consulting to where I am today: courses.

My intention here is not to relive the old days—I’m doing this because you likely can relate to one of the three scenarios:

  • You currently are working in a corporate job, with thoughts of starting your own thing.
  • Your dream business is currently your #sidehustle and you’re looking to make it your full-time gig.
  • You no longer are tied to your J.O.B however your business model is not exactly what you’d like it to be. You want to move into online courses sooner than later.

Anyway you approach it, there are opportunities in front of you right now that you may not see as relevant to where you want to go. But that’s not true. Every step counts.

If I hadn’t taken a job at Harley Davidson, I wouldn’t have seen what building a community, or movement, looks like and thought, “That’s what I want.”

If I hadn’t worked for a matchmaking service, I wouldn’t have figured out that I hate sales.

And if I hadn’t said, ‘yes,’ to working on Tony Robbins’ creative team, I’m not sure any of what followed would have happened.

Speaking of working for Tony, I wanted to share the five core lessons I learned while working for Tony, from creating content, to making big decisions as a business owner, to shaping your mindset. I’ve put the lessons all down in my brand new freebie.

So, I’m breaking down my journey for you in five phases. In each one, I’ll tell you what I learned and the turning point that helped me move to the next phase. This is how each one breaks down:

Phase One: Corporate (or being “on the clock”)

Phase Two: Consulting (or really doing the Corporate thing for multiple bosses instead of just the one)

Phase Three: Courses (without a niche—so this was more of an experimental time)

Phase Four: Courses (with a niche nailed down)

Phase Five: Product Suite (or courses that can scale and ultimately put my business in the fast lane)

The biggest thing I want you to take away from my story is you don’t need to have it all figured out. You just need to move forward in any way you can, and from where you are now.

So let’s get into it … I was born on a rainy night in December … Ha! No, we’re not going that far back.

Let's start from my (career) beginning...

P.S Find out more about my live event, The Entrepreneur Experience at amyporterfield.com/events. The dates are October 21st or December 2nd, so don’t delay!

Sep 07, 2017
#174: 3 Hacks to Help You Get More Done in Less Time
43:07

When it comes to working smarter and not harder, you know the conventional wisdom: Manage your time, take breaks, get enough sleep, tackle the big projects when you feel the most focused, and the list goes on.

You know all this stuff, but why is it so hard to act on it? And even if you are applying some of those strategies (which are all good), you still find yourself with more work than you can possibly get done in a single day.

Enter Carey Bentley. She’s a productivity and accountability expert. Along with her husband, Demir, they founded Lifehack Bootcamp, a program designed to get you working more efficiently so you can create the lifestyle you want.

Now, Carey and Demir weren’t always experts at this—in fact, they once were raging workaholics, but they had to figure out another way because the way they were working was literally affecting their health.

Their secret is practice—hard, intentional, sweaty practice. You know, the way pro athletes practice. So think of productivity less like a class where you’re studying to pass an exam and more like a craft that you’re working to get better at all the time.

Here’s what you’ll learn:

  • The four phases of productivity and why you’re ultimately shooting to be like LeBron James. (Check those out at 11:54)
  • The four layers of accountability—with a coach, with a team, with a buddy, with your community—where you are closing off all escape routes by making yourself feel the pressure from all sides. (Carey starts to break down those levels at 16:19)
  • How to create a “Champagne Moment” that literally has you popping open a bottle every week (metaphorically, but you can take that literally too!).

Download this week’s freebie for a step-by-step walkthrough of this process. (You can think about your own moment at 15:18).

You’ll also hear Carey and I talk about the five limiting mindsets (OK that’s just really a nice way to say “excuses”) people adopt to NOT get things done. Have you ever complained about not having enough time or having too much on your plate? Yeah, me too. It’s time to shut that down. Carey and I talk about the first two on the show. You can get all five (and the “Champagne Moment” exercise) by downloading this week’s freebie.

No more procrastinating—time to move forward.

And as if this isn’t enough, Carey grabbed her hubby, Demir, and filmed an extra special video for your eyes only on steps to beat decision fatigue.

Aug 31, 2017
#173: Getting Started with Facebook Ads: The List Building Series (Part 2)
45:57

The deep dive into all things Facebook Ads continues with part two of my mini training with Rick Mulready.

In part one we discussed the importance of mapping out a strategy before you jump into scheduling your ads, as well as knowing how to target your ideal customer and build custom audiences using the Audience Insights tool. (Missed Part 1? It was SO GOOD and you can listen here.)

We’re going a little deeper in today’s second part by telling you how to set up your ads using the Power Editor and how to assess your performance by focusing on a few key metrics.

PART TWO
Getting to know the Power Editor. A Facebook ad consists of three elements— campaign, ad set and ad. The campaign is where you set the objective of the ad, such as page post engagement or website clicks. The ad set is where you select the targeting, budget and schedule for the ad. And the ad is where you have the image and text for your ad.

How to Create a Campaign:

Using metrics to evaluate ad performance. First, don’t look at anything related to how your ads are doing for 72 hours. Then, take a look at these numbers by going to the ads manager, clicking the performance dropdown menu and selecting customized columns to choose the stats you want to review.

These are the metrics to pay attention to:

Cost per lead (or conversion): In general, shoot for $9 and under on a lead. Sound high? You’ve got to be real about what’s happening with Facebook. It’s super competitive and that means it’s getting more expensive—yet it’s still the most cost-effective ad platform.

Landing page conversion rate: Your goal is at least 20% conversion. If you’re not there, look at the consistency between your ad and the landing page. Are you using the same text, color scheme and other graphical elements? Is the messaging consistent?

Click-through rate: If it’s less than 1%, that’s a sign that your ad is not resonating with your audience.

Relevance score: The closer you are to 10, the better. If it’s low, that means your ad isn’t relevant. The problem could be with your ad or with the audience you’re targeting.

Frequency score: If you’re at a 4 or higher, that means people are seeing your ad too many times and won’t look at it anymore. Try changing up the type of ad you’re showing.

If you’re happy with the metrics, start to scale. If not, use the data to figure out your next step. For example, if you’ve got a 2% click-through rate and a decent relevance score, but your cost per lead is high, that might mean something about your landing page isn’t consistent with your ad. Use the data to troubleshoot your campaign.

Remember: Become a student of Facebook ads! Research the strategy that works for you, and don’t be afraid to dive in and take some risks for your list-building efforts. Now is the time.

Aug 24, 2017
#172: Getting Started with Facebook Ads: The List Building Series (Part 1)
42:28

Whether you’re just starting out or you’ve dabbled with running a Facebook ads campaign, I want you locked into this jam-packed two-part episode of the Online Marketing Made Easy podcast.

My good friend Rick Mulready, who knows Facebook ads better than anyone I know, helps me cover everything you need to know to get your Facebook ads off the ground.

PART ONE

Have a strategy. One of the biggest reasons entrepreneurs lose faith is because they put a bunch of money into ads without a plan, and then get disappointed when there are no returns.

Rick has a lot of great advice here, including why working backward from your end goal is the ultimate way to set yourself up for success.

We also explore questions like:

  • How do I convert Facebook fans into email subscribers?
  • What’s the key to attracting paying customers?
  • Can I build my list using Facebook ads, even if I don’t have anything to sell?

Target, target, target. You’ve got to get specific on your audience. This is one of the biggest advantages of using Facebook ads, and I want you to spend some time here. For example, if you’re a personal trainer, go beyond simply targeting people who exercise and target audiences that fit specifically within your areas of expertise or certain specific interests.

You can do so much more to refine your audience by looking at where they shop, what brands they like, how they exercise and more.

One of my favorite tools within Facebook Ads is Audience Insights because it allows you to educate yourself on the characteristics of your audience, based on people who already like your page. By doing this, you can better cater to the needs of existing customers and scale your business by targeting new potential customers with similar characteristics. (Check out my video below on how I use it in my business!)

Also, don’t miss Rick’s breakdown on how Facebook wants you to target. One thing we all know for sure is the more you do things Facebook’s way, the more the social media giant will like and reward you.

In part two, we get into the ins and outs of the Power Editor and what metrics you should be paying attention to. Don’t forget to check out the links below to other podcasts Rick and I have done on Facebook ads.

Let’s get back to basics.

 

Aug 17, 2017
#171: DIYing Your Business: 5 Areas to Focus On When You're Just Starting Out
41:15

I love HGTV. It’s easy to get hooked watching JoJo and Chip Gaines on “Fixer Upper” transform an old ranch home into something SPECTACULAR (with shiplap of course!), and I’m always picking up little tips that I can DIY along the way.

Because sometimes DIY is best.

A professional web designer or developer isn't always the answer.

And neither is a seasoned copywriter or Facebook ad consultant.

Here’s the truth: You’re an entrepreneur.

Which means, by nature, you’re a DIYer.

In fact, you probably started your business because you knew you could do something better yourself. You’re likely great at wearing many hats—owner, marketer, writer, developer, etc. AND, you may have to do things yourself for awhile because you don’t have a big team or a big budget (yet!).

I’m here to say, “You’re on the right track!”

I think there are some things you just have to DIY, especially when you’re a rookie entrepreneur. In the long run, your business and your tribe will be better off for it.

BUT, there aren’t enough hours in the day, week or month for you to do every single thing yourself. So these are the five things I believe are crucial for you to take on in the beginning:

  • Website (Listen in at 4:40)
  • Copywriting (Listen in at 11:05)
  • Marketing (Listen in at 16:25)
  • Facebook Ad Campaigns (Listen in at 21:16)
  • Money (Listen in at 26:55)

None of these might seem like small potatoes—and they’re not—but I’ve got some resources below to help ease the learning curve.

Also, hang out with me until the end and I will answer the question that crosses every entrepreneur’s mind on this topic: How long do I need to keep doing these things myself?

Let’s roll up our sleeves and get to work.

Aug 10, 2017
#170: How to Get the Big Stuff Done When Life Gets in the Way
31:52

It’s so incredibly easy to get caught up in busywork or to let your phone or email start controlling your schedule. Before you know it, a whole day (or several) has gone by and you don’t have anything real to show for it.

Let that happen too much and you lose serious momentum—not to mention not getting tasks done that will actually grow your business.

I don’t want that happening to you. So I’m sharing the five strategies I use to stay or get back in the zone whenever I start drifting off.

Here’s a brief summary:

#1: Set your priorities daily. Sometimes it seems like every action item is crucial, but that’s not true. Responding to emails and recording new videos for your course do not rank the same. I’ll share some advice from my good friend Michael Hyatt, who puts a limit on the number of big tasks he works on every day.

#2: Be clear about WHAT and WHY. You’ll hear me talk about how a lack of clarity kept me from getting one project done.

#3: Power up. I’ll talk about how I get my creative batteries to reach a “full charge.”

#4: Schedule your day for success. Devoting an hour here and there to a big project means you may not be finishing it anytime soon. I’ll share the strategy I use to make sure I have focused time.

#5: Say it out loud. Making a bold, public statement, like I did about  reworking List Builders Lab, forces you to deliver. I’ll go over the best way to make this kind of public commitment.

And then, of course, I’ve got a bonus strategy that I share at the very end of the show. It’s a way to pick yourself up when things get a little tough.  

It’s time to shove those distractions to the side and get focused.

Jul 27, 2017
#169: How to Pitch Yourself to Land Bigger Opportunities Online
47:46

Isn’t running a business like giving one pitch after another? Think about it. You’re an entrepreneur. That means you’re constantly pitching potential and existing customers, students and fans.

So as intimidating as pitching an editor at Forbes or the Huffington Post may sound, you’re already doing it to some extent in other parts of your business.

Landing more media opportunities will do a lot of great things for your business, like help you grow your email list, establish more street cred, and create more demand for your products and services. That’s why it’s more than worth your time to figure out how to pitch yourself successfully to media organizations and outlets.

The question is: what’s the difference between a knockout pitch and the thousand other pitches that find their way into the trash?

I’ll tell you exactly how. And to help me, I’ve got my friend Jennifer Berson joining me on this podcast episode. Jennifer was a lawyer working at a prestigious firm before she decided to follow her inner creative voice and start Jeneration PR, an ultra successful public relations and social media marketing firm.

Jennifer shares all the amazing tips, tricks and tidbits that will get you closer to landing the podcast, blog or social media show you’ve always dreamed about being featured on.

And, don’t forget to download this week’s freebie. It’s a pitch template, based on the formula Jen delivers during the show. All you have to do is fill in the blanks and you’re that much closer to landing your next big media hit.

Today Jennifer is helping me answer questions like:

  • Why is it so important that you know the RIGHT way to pitch
  • Where do you start?
  • How do you position yourself as an expert without a large following or customer base?
  • How should you structure your pitch?
  • What are the biggest pitch mistakes?

Let’s start pitching.

Jul 20, 2017
#168: The Easy Start Guide to Live Video with Luria Petrucci
48:44

Video is where it’s at, folks. That’s why this latest episode is coming from my brand new studio—which, by the way, has taken me FAR outside of my comfort zone. But I wanted to take my video content to a higher level this year and that’s exactly what I’m doing, with help from my good friend Luria Petrucci of Live Streaming Pros.

After Luria (and her partner David Foster) set up my studio, I wanted to hear all about her approach to video, including her recommendations on everything from equipment to tips for preparation and overall content flow.

First, Luria and I break down the four different levels of live streaming, talking about what they entail, along with the pros and cons. (These levels are so insightful, I can’t wait for you to hear about them and decide which level you are operating at currently.)

By the way—don’t forget to download my video gear guide freebie. You’ll find out what I’ve got going on in my new studio, as well as different alternatives if you are just getting started.

You will also learn some tips for being your most natural self on camera along with Luria’s formula for rocking out a mobile live stream.

Luria and I cap it all off with the 3-part strategy for how to create video content that really engages with your audience.

Go listen to this episode about all things video now.

Jul 13, 2017
#167: Your 4x4 Gut Check: Are You Moving Your Biz Forward?
37:44

The one thing nearly every entrepreneur I know, including myself, NEVER does is STOP. You’re in the fast lane practically all of the time because there’s so much to do!

The problem is that because you’re going a million miles an hour, you often sacrifice important parts of the creative process of any endeavor or business: creating the space needed to slow down and imagine what could be for your business.

So this week, I’m going to put aside all the talk about Facebook ads and webinar funnels to pause for a moment and answer a question that’s equally as important.

How are you feeling about your business right now?

Now, I know. You’re saying, “Jeez, Amy. I don’t have time to think about that. I’m too busy actually running my business.”

I totally understand. I don’t check in with myself and answer that question nearly enough either. Today I’m giving myself permission to not only do that on this podcast episode but to also share my answers with you.

As I go through and reveal where I am in my business right now, I want you to be thinking about or writing down where you are at the moment too. I’ve given you a freebie—a quick cheat sheet—to help you do just that.

First, I’m going to do a gut-check on the four major categories that are (hopefully) driving your business forward.

Then, you’re going to do something really fun—IMAGINE WHAT’S POSSIBLE.

I’ll tell you about the big jump I’m making right now (and it’s definitely putting me outside of my comfort zone), as well as some of the smaller things I’m doing to keep things fresh.

Lastly, I’ve got a SUPER important question I ask myself every single quarter (that I want YOU to start asking every three months).

Don’t forget about the freebie; you’ll want it to take stock of how you are doing with six months to go in 2017.

Gut check time. See you there.

Jul 06, 2017
#166: How to Rework Your Struggling Online Course
55:40

I had to eat a big slice of humble pie recently when it came to reworking one of my courses. It was ALL worth it, because today I get to share with you the exact steps I used to rework my List Builder’s Lab (LBL) program.

I love LBL, however I knew it was time for a change when I realized my students weren’t crossing the finish line like I wanted them to. So I had to swallow my pride and get to work.

And I’m sharing the entire process with you today.

This episode is all about figuring out when it’s time for a rework, how extensive it should be, and managing the process so you get it done and roll it out as efficiently as possible. By the end of it you’ll be able to answer:

  • When is it time to re-work my course?
  • Do I need to re-work or update my course? And what’s the difference?
  • How do I start the process? (You’ll learn my 5-step process here.)
  • What’s the timeline? How quickly can I get this done?
  • What about my existing students? Do they get the latest version for free?

As a preview, my first step is to survey my students. Listening to them is the most critical part of this whole process. To make it easier, I’m giving you the survey I used for reworking List Builder’s Lab.

In addition to the questions I asked, I’ve added some extra commentary on why I asked those specific questions.

Let’s go check out those 5 steps.

 

Jun 29, 2017
#165: How to Troubleshoot Your Biggest Webinar Challenges
51:41

There are a ton of moving parts in pulling off a successful webinar. The good news is, with so many variables, there’s a lot you can do to turn your webinar into a hit. You’ve just got to get really good at investigating what may have gone wrong.

I’ve got you covered on how to do that in this week’s podcast. Even better is the freebie that goes along with it.

If you’ve ever wished for a webinar checklist to keep you on track, consider it granted with Your Webinar Problem-Solving Toolkit, a series of checklists, organized by category, to help you zero in on trouble areas.

Along with the deep dive I’m about to do on your toughest webinar challenges, I’m also talking about a strategy I’m using right now in my business. This is the first time I’ve shared it. You don’t want to miss this part because it basically shows you how to identify anything and everything that could go wrong in a webinar campaign or any other kind of marketing effort you’re doing.

But before I get to that, I’m covering:

Challenge #1: My Facebook ads aren’t getting traction! Get ready to hear a lot about targeting and retargeting.

Challenge #2: My webinar registration page isn’t converting! You may need to refresh the look and feel with something simpler. Here’s an example of one of my reg pages that I talk about in the episode here.

Challenge #3: My webinar isn’t converting! You don’t want to miss this part because this is where I share the thing I’ve never talked about before and it’s been a game-changer for my business.

Here’s a bit of advice as you listen.  Do NOT try and implement all of the things I tell you to right away. Just focus on ONE. Whether it’s tweaking an image in a Facebook ad or redesigning your registration page, you’re taking baby steps.

Don’t forget to download the freebie, either after you’ve listened or before.

OK, let’s go troubleshoot.

 

Jun 22, 2017
#164: Free Content vs. Paid Content (What’s the Difference?)
27:48

Nothing will grow your business faster than sharing your expertise through blogs, podcast episodes, Facebook Live broadcasts, freebies, and more. All of that is content gold that you give away for free.

The key question here is how do you know where to draw the line between free and paid content? AND, is it possible to give away too much for free? I answer those questions and more in this episode of the podcast.

By the end of the show, you’ll know:

  • My three core differences between free and paid content
  • The key principles I use for free vs. paid content
  • Examples of how I do this in my business with my courses, using my podcast, and other kinds of content

And if you are feeling like your creative pipeline is beginning to dry up, you’re really going to enjoy this week’s freebie. It’s my new and improved “10 Free Content Triggers” guide for developing cheat sheets, blueprints, checklists and more. I’ve reworked this into something that’s pretty hot and trust me, you don’t want to miss it.

Ready to learn how to differentiate your free and paid content? Get all of the goods here.

Jun 15, 2017
#163: Demystifying the Facebook Pixel
01:01:31

Do you know who’s visited your website in the last 24 hours? What about who visited your most recent blog post but while visiting your site did not sign up to get your latest freebie? Do you know who’s watching just for the first few minutes of your latest Facebook video but then moving on to something else?

Welcome to Facebook Pixel Optimization. Don’t be nervous! We’re going to ease into all you need to know with my Facebook ad guru Rick Mulready, who can break down the Power Editor like Stephen Hawking does the universe.

These are the questions Rick and I tackle in this episode:

  • What is the Facebook pixel? What does it do?  (Yes, a few fundamentals just in case you are new to this environment!)
  • How do I set it up?
  • When do I use it?
  • What are event codes?
  • How does it measure efficiency? Where can I see the data?
  • What’s the difference between a Facebook account pixel and a conversion pixel?
  • Why do I have to put the pixel on specific web pages when it’s already on my website?
  • How is the pixel related to retargeting?
  • Why do my Facebook conversion stats differ a lot from my LeadPages notifications for the same campaign?
  • What are the essentials for running an effective retargeting ad campaign?
  • How can I use retargeting for people who watch my Facebook Live videos?
  • After someone views a blog post with the pixel, how long do I have to retarget them?

Phew. That’s a lot, right? And that’s not all! Download Rick’s article, “The Complete Guide to the Facebook Ads Pixel,” and you will become a pixel master in no time.

Jun 08, 2017
#162: The New Rules of Facebook Marketing
51:32

As quickly as Facebook changes, there are some things that are as true today as they were a few years ago:

  • Facebook cares more about its users vs. the marketers.
  • Likes, comments, shares, views, and clicks are gold—the more, the better.
  • The more personal you are and the more you do to generate real and valuable interaction, the more your fans will engage (by liking, sharing, etc.).

Now, HOW you accomplish those three points has changed A LOT. Why? Well, there are few reasons.

You’ve heard me talk about the infamous Facebook algorithm, and while I’m not going to nerd out on all of its particulars (there are hundreds), it does have everything to do with how many of your fans are actually seeing your posts.

If you start to understand just a little bit about how it works, you can get smarter about the kind of content you’re creating. Feel me?

I’m going to tell you how to do that by sharing my:

Along the way, you’ll hear me talk about how I’m implementing some of these new rules in real time, like video. Creating more video is a HUGE priority for me this year (so much so that I’m even building a studio in my house—pics to come on Facebook and Instagram soon!).

Starting this week I’m doing weekly Facebook Live videos (go to facebook.com/amyporterfield to find out when) where we’ll talk about some of the content on the podcast and more. And I’m going to be incorporating more video into my posts.

You already know that video is huge with Facebook. What kind of video to create is also critical—and an important part of this episode—because the more you make viewers stop, watch and unmute your video, the more Facebook will reward you by pushing your videos out to larger segments of your community.

For examples of what types of videos to model, make sure to download my 2017 Ultimate Guide to What’s Working Now on Facebook. It’s loaded with examples of video you can use to start reimagining your Facebook engagement strategy right NOW.

 

Jun 01, 2017
#161: Love & Business: How to Make it Work
49:53

If you think being an entrepreneur is tough, try being married to one.

Just ask Hobie Porterfield (as I do in this episode).

You’ve heard me talk about my hunky husband from time to time, and just how important he is to the success of my business. But I’ve never really talked about what that means exactly.

In isolation, running a business and keeping a marriage together are tough. Together?

It’s an entirely different beast. The fact is, entrepreneurship brings a very different dimension to a marriage.

People with 9-to-5 jobs usually work in organizations that provide support, training and resources. Entrepreneurship can be isolating, which is one reason we often turn to our spouses or significant others for support.

So today, Hobie and I are talking about what the road has been like for us.

In this episode we reveal:

  • Why Hobie thinks the significant other is 40% of your business success
  • My recent ‘aha’ moment about what it means to REALLY spend time together
  • How we give each other what we need, EVEN during the most stressful times
  • The five most important things we do to make our marriage work

We’re in a pretty awesome place now, but it wasn’t always that way, and we figure out something new every day, including us coming up with a trigger word (it’s a celebrity name - can you guess which one?) to bring me back to him when my iPhone has got me sucked in!

This is every bit as important (probably more) as planning your next big launch or creating a new marketing funnel. You’ve got to nurture your personal relationships with the same care, intensity and passion as you do your business.

Go listen here now, your main squeeze will thank you for it, I promise ;-)

May 25, 2017
#160: Behind the Scenes of My Website Redesign
52:54

Here’s the thing: businesses evolve and grow. Mine has (and so will yours). And what worked a few years ago for my website is no longer reflective of where I am today.

If you know it’s time for a website revamp, let this serve as your roadmap of sorts. While you may make different decisions than I did, the overall message you should take away is the same: You need to be intentional and strategic about every part of your site.

For example, deciding what to feature on the homepage will influence so many other things like navigation, the sitemap, overall user experience, and ultimately, conversions.

(If you simply don’t have the bandwidth to take on this kind of project right now, listen to this episode as a resource you can use when you’re ready (make sure to download the freebie and save it to your computer!).

Here’s how the episode breaks down:

Part 1—Planning: Learn some of the questions you MUST have answers to before you even think about development.

Part 2—The Map: Why you have to plot out every page (and I walk you through why my homepage is laid out the way it is).

Part 3—The Miscues: My five biggest flops, like not including my team in the process. Yeah. Smooth move, Amy.

Part 4—Your Decision: Find out the elements my designer, Jessica, says you must have for success.

PLUS, don’t forget to download the 10 Essential Elements for Your Website freebie. It’ll save you some headaches, I promise!

One last thing—if you can, go to my website’s homepage (amyporterfield.com) as you listen so you can see some of the elements I talk about during the episode.

 

May 18, 2017
#159: How I Found, Hired and Work With My Project Manager
53:47

When you’re just starting out, you can manage everything on your own. And you probably have to—until you’re generating revenue. As soon as that happens, things change. Priorities shift. To-do lists grow. New ideas, projects and opportunities pop up every day, all of which are left for you to juggle with.

What if you had the right support to help keep you and your business not only in check, but growing?

Imagine that new email campaign copy you’ve avoided writing for days has been broken down, researched and organized in such a way that it almost feels like you’re just filling in the blanks.

Imagine you’re no longer prioritizing and checking off each box of your to-do list, rather it’s a document that lives with someone else, somewhere else—far, far away from you.

Imagine you’re no longer the gatekeeper of every new project, launch, contractor or task. Your project manager (or PM) is handling it all for you.

On this podcast episode I start the conversation about why this role is (or will be) essential for your business.

By the end of the episode you’ll know:

  • What a PM could do for your business (immediately and long term)
  • Where to find a PM
  • When you’re ready for a PM (and how much one costs)
  • Why “TEA time” with your PM is crucial for success

Plus, I’m lifting the curtain to show you how I found, hired, trained and integrated my crazy awesome PM, Chloe, into my business.

Do me one quick favor before you start listening: Download this week’s freebie, and get your Project Manager Hiring Toolkit. Job description? Check. New hire survey? Check. Even if you are not ready to hire just yet, GET IT NOW to have when you need it!

 

May 11, 2017
#158: Saving Sales & Rescuing Refunds
01:04:36

You know how intense launches are from start to finish, right? You’ve heard me say here repeatedly that you’ve got to think through every part of it. And in so many ways, once that cart opens, you’ve got to double your efforts to save sales. Then once those carts close, you have to get scrappy to keep those new customers happy, and rescue any potential refunds.

There are going to be so many people who just can’t make a decision about you. Even after you’ve given everything by building a superior course or program, with every bell and whistle an online student could wish for.

However, the doubt surfaces because most folks are just looking for a way out (revisit Episode #156 with my good friend Russell Brunson later for more).

Your job is to not let them find a way out, and the best, most effective way to do that is to meaningfully connect with your customers as much as possible. This episode is loaded with strategies on how to save potential sales during your next promo and ensure you don’t get a bunch of refunds, including:

  • How to hone your refund policy. (Ever wondered why mine is so strict? I talk about it in this episode.)
  • Why your webinar Q&As are critical to your promotion success.
  • How you can empower and engage new students with your onboarding emails.

Because I’m covering A LOT of ground with this episode, I want you to download the freebie so you have a handy list of the 5 Strategies to Save Your Sales and 7 Ways to Rescue Potential RefundsI’m also giving you the exact phone script I used when I offered a 1-800 number during a launch. That’s TWO great reasons to download, so make sure you secure that freebie and put it in a safe place for your next launch.

Also: Stay on until the end because I’m going through the pros and cons of whether you should drip the content in your program and how that decision can impact your refund rate.

 

May 04, 2017
#157: The Bonus Brainstorm: How to Create a Bonus Package for Your Next Course Offer (Rebroadcast)
48:25

I don’t know about you, but I’m the type of person who loves to pick up a book I’ve read a bunch of times already, read it again, and find new takeaways.

I love doing that, because I know every time I’m reading that book I’m in a different place in my life, making me see the insights in a new light.

In that same spirit: There was such an overwhelming response to the original episode I recorded on creating compelling bonuses, that I wanted to rebroadcast this episode, with a new take.

So not only am I teaching you the bonus strategies that have worked for me and my business, but I’ve got an all-new insight that I wanted to share that’s made a BIG difference in my launch results.

Here’s a little of what I’ll cover in this mini-workshop all about creating bonuses:

  • Strategies that have worked to drive sales for me over and over again
  • How to incentivize buyers to buy on cart open day (instead of waiting!)
  • The best bonuses to offer for an affiliate launch

Then I want you to implement what you’ve learned in this workshop and download my worksheet—I give the five steps for creating extraordinary bonuses for your product EVERY TIME. This is a must have exercise to help you create bonuses that convert.

I also give you a new full-pay bonus strategy that worked for me recently. As promised in the episode, here is how I positioned the three group coaching calls:

And since I do not explain the live small group coaching calls on the webinar, I made sure to include some details about the bonus on the sales page:

So whether you are offering a full-pay, fast-action or 48-hour bonus, if you want to position your program or product to demand higher prices, get more customers into your program, and have a compelling way to get potential buyers off the fence, make sure to walk through this mini-training.

 

Apr 27, 2017
#156: Expert Secrets & Online Strategies with Russell Brunson
47:21

In online marketing, no one knows how to build a movement better than super entrepreneur Russell Brunson. You’ve probably heard me talk about his very popular software company ClickFunnels, but he’s also got a coaching company, a supplements company and he’s a best-selling author with a new book out called Expert Secrets (get your free copy at amyporterfield.com/secrets).

In this episode of the podcast, Russell shares some of the book’s juiciest concepts, including:

  • Why 1,000 true fans are all you need to build a movement through your business.
  • How to create a sweet spot in the market you serve and how to find new opportunities in it (because that’s where all the gold is).
  • The rules you must live by to play like a boss.

You’ll find an amazing amount of practical strategies; from identifying your ideal market niche and leading them to create new opportunities, all the way to understanding the REAL reasons why people buy your stuff and why charging what you’re worth actually shows you care more than anything else. Through it all, Russell is soooo good at breaking down the consumer psyche and giving you the confidence needed to build the business of your wildest dreams.

I loved this book so much and I know you will too—that’s why I’m giving it to you for free. All you have to pay for is the shipping and handling. So make sure you go to amyporterfield.com/secrets to get your copy now. This offer won’t last long so make sure you do it NOW.

 

Apr 20, 2017
#155: The New 'FB Messenger Ads' with Rick Mulready
37:54

Facebook ad expert, Rick Mulready, is back to talk about a tremendous new Ad tool that he’s already leveraging to drive major results in his business.

If you’re starting to hear more about Facebook Messenger Ads, it’s for good reason. You’re probably one of the billion people who use the Messenger app to chat with family and friends instantaneously every day.

But what if an ad popped up from your favorite clothing store and just by clicking it you could ask about one of their new products? Better yet, what if a rep from that store gets back to you immediately.

BAM. That’s the beauty of Facebook Messenger ads for your customers. (It’s the first ad type that gets your ideal customer avatar talking with you instantly.)

Now for you, this means being able to answer questions or address objections to your programs and courses in real time, like during a launch when you’re trying to close more sales.

Today Rick and I go inside why this new format is climbing the charts and how you can take advantage of it right now.

In the episode, Rick talks about his experience using Messenger Ads for the first time. Make sure to listen to get all the details about how this ad below performed for him!

I’ve also included some screenshots of what the interface looks like when you’re creating the ad inside of The Power Editor. It’s super easy. You can check it out step by step below.

Step 1: Go to ads creation in Ads Manager or Power Editor.

Step 2: Choose the Traffic objective and complete your Campaign name, adset name, and ad name.

Step 3: Under the adset level, select website or messenger. Continue by Choosing your audience, budget and placement.

Step 4: At the ad level, Choose the Page you want to connect

Step 5: At the ad level, select your image/video and copy. Choose a welcome message. When people click on your ad, they will automatically be directed to Messenger and receive a copy of your ad and the welcome message.

*You can select any call-to-action button, in addition to ‘Send Message’. A Messenger icon will appear next to this call-to-action button in the ad.

*NOTE: Your ad to open conversations in Messenger won’t appear to people on mobile who don’t have the Messenger app.

So ready to tackle a new world of Facebook Messenger ads? Get all the starter details here—and don’t forget to sign up for Rick’s brand new webinar, “How to Create an Automated Facebook Ads System That Gets Leads & Sales Every Day.” I think we all need a bit of that magic!

Apr 13, 2017
#154: 7 Content Creation Ideas to Use When You’re Feeling Uninspired
36:41

Don’t you wish for a button you could push to get your creative brain synapses firing when it seems like they’ve gone on vacation?

While we’re waiting on that magic, I’ve got something to bring you back into the light because we’re all human, right? You may be the most creative person EVER, but for whatever reason, there are times when content inspiration is elusive and it is a battle to come up with something new.

This is especially true when you’ve been in the game for a while and feel like you’ve covered every angle of your industry. The good news is there are always more directions you can explore.

Here’s a quick tease of the strategies I talk about on today’s show to help you create new content when you feel less than gung-ho:

  • I’ll tell you about how I just dusted off some old content and gave it a new fresh spin (and how you can do the same thing with your own pieces!).
  • The sure-fire way I ALWAYS am inspired to create new content (it involves me first and foremost stepping away from my laptop…).
  • You’re not alone in creating your content. In fact, you have a HUGE resource for new content that you may not have thought of...

Make sure you stay on until the end when I reveal the process I use to ensure I am always delivering top-notch content. If an idea doesn’t make it past one of these phases, I don’t do it. Period.

And check out my ‘10 Days of Inspiration’ one-pager freebie because, unfortunately, you can’t always wait for inspiration to hit you. You have deadlines. Sometimes, you have to hunt that inspiration thing down yourself. This will help get the ideas flowing, I promise!

 

Apr 06, 2017
#153: 3 Ways to Get More Mileage Out of Your Course (Especially If You Have a Small List)
47:53

You know that feeling after you’ve just poured blood, sweat and so many tears into building something, like, say, an online course?

There is nothing like the feeling of accomplishment that comes with building a course! So of course you want to make sure you are marketing it effectively.

Enter Victoria Gibson, online business coach and mentor extraordinaire. She’s all about helping entrepreneurs get BIG results with their online courses and coaching programs. One of her clients built a 7-figure business in two years following the principles she is going to talk to us about on this episode.

Here’s a quick preview:

  • Is your program loaded with videos, downloadable audio and PDF worksheets? What about actual one-on-one time with you? That’s right. Your course may need more of YOU. Don’t worry, that doesn’t mean endless hours spent Facetiming.

  • If you’re just starting out, you may be thinking, “Well, how could I possibly charge more than $97 for my course?” When the REAL question may be how could you not charge MORE?

  • Feeling repetitive? You’re doing it right. Your customers need to hear your core message a lot. Plus, being consistent and clear is what will later allow you to expand once you’ve nailed your message and built a mighty (no matter what size) community that loves what you’re giving them.

Get ready to hear all of the crucial course-selling knowledge Victoria is dropping.

*Correction: Stay tuned for my next amazing interview with Rick Mulready in Episode 155

Mar 30, 2017
#152: How to Avoid FOMO in Your Biz & Make Better Decisions
31:11

When a new opportunity comes along, do you immediately jump for joy to be a part of something new and exciting, or are you cautiously weighing your options?

The thing is: Are you choosing things that are really driving your business forward or do you have a case of FOMO (fear of missing out)?

And trust me, I’m your girl when it comes to all the various ways FOMO can creep into how you’re operating and end up costing you in the long run.

After a few expensive missteps (one to the tune of $20,000; more about that here), I’ve gotten really good at saying, “No,” to the things that don’t fit the stage of growth I’m in with my business right now. Did you read that last part?

I said, “RIGHT NOW.”

And that’s important because we’re not talking about how to say, “No,” on this week’s show. We are talking about how to intelligently evaluate those shiny, fun, killer sounding opportunities that come your way and make everything inside of you shout, “Hell, yeah!”

But is it really “Hell, yeah!”, or is it more of a “maybe later”?

To help you figure it out, we’re talking about the 3 critical questions I ask myself every time a new or unexpected opportunity comes my way.

Listen to the show and then download my new One Page Evaluator freebie. It helps you figure out how to answer those questions, and includes a few extras that will really help you drill down the next time you have a big decision to make.

Mar 23, 2017
#151: 38,000+ Members in 2 Years: Tips to Building a Highly Engaged Facebook Group with Jill & Josh Stanton
49:48

Let’s rewind for a sec. Back in episode #146, I dished on Facebook groups. This is one of the bold moves I want you to consider making in 2017, because if you take the time to do it thoughtfully, it could be a tremendous game-changer for your business.

No one knows that more than Jill and Josh Stanton. In just two years the Facebook group they built for their ‘Screw the Nine to Five’ business has skyrocketed from less than 7,000 members to nearly 40,000.

You’re going to hear us talking about a lot of wicked smart strategies they are using to maximize the impact of the group on their business—list-building, selling, cross-promoting, sexy funnels and more.

BUT, pay attention to me here because I don’t want you getting overwhelmed. Keep your eyes on the prize as you listen to the podcast (and lose your mind over all the cool things that Jill shares).

The point of a Facebook group is engagement. The more you do that, by asking questions, listening and showing up in general, the more you’re going to know about what your audience wants and needs.

That’s the magic fairy dust your group will sprinkle so you really can see, hear and feel your audience, as well as show them mad love by delivering content that will make a difference in their lives.

Some of the topics explored include:

  • Cracking the code on how to find out what your group members truly WANT. (Hint: Polls are everything.)
  • Using the group to build your email list and cross-promote your other programs. (For example, the Stantons market their membership site inside the group, which serves as an entry point for their sales funnels.)
  • Striking a harmonious balance between free content shared in the group with paid content in a membership site or whatever you’re selling.
  • Keeping content organized inside of the group.
  • Managing the group, especially the bigger it gets. The kind of support needed, as well as how often you need to get involved.
  • The role Facebook Live can play in the group. (You’ll love the unique way Jill and Josh are using it OUTSIDE of their group too!)

This episode is LOADED. Listen up.

Oh, and one more very exciting thing. I did my first ever ‘after show’ with Jill and Josh. There was just so much to cover. Download it here and listen to more of our chat on their Facebook group do’s and don’ts, why the group should be about YOU and the value of connecting your members.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Click Here to Get the After Show with Jill and Josh Stanton

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Mar 16, 2017
#150: [Case Study] How to Turn a Pre-Launch Strategy Into a Wildly Profitable Online Launch with Terri Cole and David Vox
01:17:22

You know how I feel about having a pre-launch strategy—it’s crucial for success. Last week’s episode was all about the nuts and bolts of creating a successful pre-launch strategy.

Today’s episode makes that plan truly actionable, as I deliver a case study of what that blueprint looks like in the real world.

I talk to my good friends Terri Cole and David Vox who implemented a pre-launch strategy well in advance of their launch . . . and guess what followed?

A wildly successful 6-figure launch they can now implement over and over again, and expect amazing results.

Just a little background: Terri is a New York-based psychotherapist and founder of the Real Love Revolution, which has helped thousands of women transform their lives. David, Terri’s business partner, is a marketing and branding expert who’s produced over 150 transformational coaching programs.

Get your notebook (or laptop) ready because not only are we talking about the seven specific steps they followed, we geek out on numbers—email open rates, webinar sign-ups, sales conversions, total revenue, social media and email list growth, Facebook ad spend (which will blow your freakin’ mind), and more.

Take notes. AND stay on until the end because that’s when we talk about some of the things they won’t ever do again and what they’re planning to do next time around.

Also: If you haven’t downloaded my 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint freebie, you might just want to grab that while you listen along to this week’s episode.

These are the key steps they followed:

Step 1: Launch a pilot program.

Step 2: Survey your list.

Step 3: Built a main platform (Terri and David chose YouTube).

Step 4: Create a launch freebie.

Step 5: Create a free, closed community inside of Facebook.

Step 6: Create a 21-day challenge for that private Facebook community.

Step 7: Cart opens—launch with a multi-webinar strategy.

*NOTE: Steps 1 through 6 are all PRE-LAUNCH SPECIFICS.

Let’s dive in!

Once you’ve listened to this episode, go back and listen to last week’s and make sure you download my 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint freebie. These are some next-level goods. Get moving!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Mar 09, 2017
#149: Your 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint
57:31

Here’s the truth: Planning your pre-launch is JUST as important as preparing your actual launch strategy.

And the right pre-launch ramp-up will help you set the stage for a successful launch.

While there are many ways to execute a pre-launch strategy, sometimes it’s nice when you can cut through all of the noise and follow a single, no-nonsense, proven blueprint that’ll get you where you want to go.

That’s what I have for you today: A 90-day pre-launch roadmap that you can follow to create the momentum you need for an effective launch.

Today’s plan is broken up into three months of specific strategies that build on each other.

There are three key concepts:

  • CREATE and post original content weekly
  • CONNECT with your audience with a Facebook community
  • COMMIT with a 21-day Challenge

I also have a comprehensive guide to the 3 Cs to help you execute your plan. You can get that here.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 90-Day Pre-Launch Blueprint

FREE DOWNLOAD

Over the next 90 days of this plan you will learn:

  • How to get into the habit of creating consistent content every week (and how to get the most leads out of that content!)
  • The best place to set up your opt-in
  • How to segment your audience
  • How to run a Facebook group that truly engages and conditions your audience to hear from you

Check out that step-by-step blueprint now!

Mar 02, 2017
#148: 3 Tips to Fix Your Facebook Ad Targeting
38:14

Facebook ad targeting is the trickiest thing!

I hear this in my private groups everyday. There are so many targeting combinations available for you on Facebook, it’s hard to know where to start to get out of the weeds.

I’m walking you through it all with the help of my go-to Facebook ads expert, Rick Mulready.

By the end you will be able to answer:

  • Am I sure the problem is my targeting?
  • What’s new that I’m not yet doing?
  • Are my targeting groups set up correctly?

Facebook ads are changing constantly, and by changing they are evolving — think about how much Facebook Live has grown in the last year and then consider all the ways that retargeting might be possible in those avenues…

If you’re feeling confused, you’re in the right place. Rick and I are breaking it all down for you.

We are going to walk you through 3 ways to fix your Facebook ad targeting—and the first way will surprise you.

We are going in deep on ad copy, relevance scores, new audiences to retarget, and of course the basics.

Rick and I break down how you can leverage many different custom audiences and groups. You will be confident about where you should be putting your time and energy after you listen.

We even walk you through how to set yourself up to tackle your changes one step at a time so you can understand what’s working and what’s not working.

By the end you’ll know exactly how to apply these 3 tips to work for you.

Start listening here!

Once you’ve heard this episode, click back to this page. The images below will be helpful to get a snapshot of the new-ish Facebook Page engagement targeting. It’s a cool feature you will likely want to check out once you get the details here.

Feb 16, 2017
#147: How to Ask Better Questions and Get Better Business Results with Marie Forleo
52:48

Today I’m talking about the ONE THING that could be holding you back in your business.

This is a real obstacle that can STALL your business growth.

I know this because it stunted my own growth.

Today I’m talking about the low-value bullsh*t questions you ask yourself that make you feel stuck. These are the questions that suck the soul out of you and can make you feel that you are not cut out for this entrepreneurial life.

The scary thing is that you likely don’t even know you’re doing it! But if you feel discouraged by your progress and “not enough” in your business, you are for sure doing it.

It’s time to find some new, alternative questions, don’t you think?

To help me tackle this very important topic, I’ve asked my own mentor and former business coach (and one of my favorite guests!), Marie Forleo, to help me make this into something extremely tangible and actionable for you.

I put five “low-value” questions—the kind that make your heart sink—in front of Marie and I asked her to turn them into questions that will lead you down the road to bigger results and successes. And boy, did she deliver. We also have some fun in the process, so take a listen here.

Before we dive into those 5 crucial low-value questions and their empowered high-value counterparts, one last note: Marie has released a free video training series—and it’s exceptional.

It answers the question I hear ALL THE TIME: “How do I know I’m working on the right strategies and focusing on the right things to make my business work?”

So this has become a must-watch for me, and my students.

Here are the five questions Marie is making over in today’s podcast:

LOW VALUE QUESTION #1:

What if no one buys what I'm selling?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #2:

What if they think I'm a fraud?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #3:

I don’t have enough __________ (experience/time/money/know-how/exposure) so how can I possibly compete against X?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #4:

I’m too far behind! Why didn't I get into this online marketing game earlier?

LOW VALUE QUESTION #5:

This is taking too long. Why am I not finding success more quickly?

Check out the NEW high-value questions here—and then starting USING them to shift your mindset to get bigger results in all you do.

Let’s get rid of the limiting beliefs and negative self-talk that may be holding you back—time to get inspired and raise your business game, for good.

Feb 09, 2017
#146: 3 Types of Facebook Groups: How to Use Them to Strengthen Your Impact, Leadership and Profits (Part 1)
51:28

You might of heard me say that one of the bold moves you can make in 2017 is to build your very own, private Facebook Group to include with your course package. But, there’s one thing I haven’t told you yet...

How to do it!

Today, I’m breaking down how to not only set up your group, but how to make it grow for the long-term.

This week’s mini training is all about what it takes to create a successful private Facebook Group to support the students inside of your paid programs.

I’ve been doing these groups for a long time and today I’m sharing the behind the scenes details about what works—and what doesn’t.

Also, make sure to grab my step-by-step how to guide for setting up for your first private Facebook group. It includes REAL LIFE EXAMPLES of others doing great things in their own groups and I’ve also included directions for how to set up your own private group. Download here.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Facebook Course Group Primer

FREE DOWNLOAD

Get ready to strengthen your impact, leadership and profits with specialty Facebook Groups - I’ll give you the entire scoop here.

Feb 02, 2017
#145: 13 Questions to Nail Down Your Winning Webinar Topic and Title
44:41

Launching your first webinar is a pretty exciting feeling. You’re running on adrenaline and diving into slide decks, email copy, webinar platforms, and so much more.

And because I know you’re likely juggling a million things right now (that’s normal, right?!), I’m here to help you take the first BIG step in webinar planning: Identifying a perfect webinar TOPIC and then crafting it into an irresistible TITLE.

Now once you nail that title (as I know you will!), I also give 13 questions that will help you REALLY KNOW if you’ve nailed it.

But what happens if you listen to my latest mini-training, come up with your topic and title and then realize you totally missed the mark and it’s just not working for you?

In my freebie of the week, I’ve not only included those 13 CRUCIAL QUESTIONS, but also some solid troubleshooting tips to get you through any challenges you might come up against. Just grab it below.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 13 Questions That Will Reveal If You Have a Winning Webinar Topic and Title

FREE DOWNLOAD

Your webinar topic and title needs to be irresistible and actionable. It needs to instantly grab your audience’s attention, while focusing on just one thing.

Let me walk you through how to get it done, so you can get to the finish line a heck of a lot quicker.

Jan 26, 2017
#144: How to Prepare, Plan & Execute a Profitable 5-Day Challenge
58:37

Have you been seeing the ultra-successful challenges that many smart marketers have been implementing in their business? Are you curious about how it all works?

Then this powerhouse mini-training is for you.

Online challenges are a fantastic tool for building your email list. However, there’s actually an incredible benefit that most marketers hosting challenges don’t take advantage of.

My guest today is revealing his action-packed plan that shows you how you can actually make money from your first challenge — in addition to growing your email list.

Zach Spuckler is no ordinary business guy. He’s 22 years old and already an online business expert with a long list of tried and true success stories to show for it, including a $22K+ 5-Day Challenge strategy he is sharing on my podcast today.

Click to learn Zach’s flawless plan that you can leverage to execute your own 5-day Challenge.

Like anything, when it comes to Challenges, you need a system. A plan that will get you started.

That is what I’m giving you today. A detailed, exact plan for conquering your first challenge. You can use this plan again and again.

Zach is also giving you a free resource guide where you will find all the specifics of his well-executed challenge so that you can take action immediately. Listen now.

Add depth to your 2017 online business plan by not only hosting a challenge, but conquering it! Get started here.

Jan 19, 2017
#143: How Do I Know If I’m Delivering Enough Value in My Course (for the Price I Want to Charge)?
43:24

You are a rock star, a risk-taker, and your course content is awesome. You know this because you’ve put your blood, sweat and tears into making it great. Yet . . . .

You’re finding yourself wondering, does my course content justify my price?

You’re not alone.

Course creation is one of my favorite topics, but it can be incredibly tricky to lay it all out there — especially for your first course.

I’ve not only created multiple courses, but I’ve helped so many entrepreneurs who are struggling with their online courses turn them around and enable them to sell confidently.

This week I’m sharing with you how to know if you’re offering enough value for the price point you’ve set.

I’m also sharing 7 WAYS TO SAVE YOUR ONLINE COURSE. If you created your course outline and feel that something’s missing OR maybe you’ve completed your entire course and something just feels off, I’ve got the FIX for you.

In this episode, I give you 7 detailed strategies that you can use to actively save your course and see success with selling it at the price point you’ve set. Get my free detailed checklist that outlines exactly what you can do to save your course and make it even better. Download it now.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 7 Ways to Save Your Online Course

FREE DOWNLOAD

The question I am answering in this week’s episode, is: Do you have enough value to justify your price point?

Maybe you’ve seen courses similar to yours offered at a lower cost or you’re having second thoughts about your higher price. This is gut check time and this week’s episode will bolster your confidence around your price.

Does the value you’re offering in your course justify the price? Click here to find out.

There are several strategies for knowing if you’re offering enough value for the price point you’re charging.

I’m giving you my sure-fire tip for the best way to outline your course in a way that continuously keeps it fresh — and why this is so important to the overall success of your course.

Then, I give you a list of 12 questions to ask yourself that will help you confidently determine the quality in your course content.

These questions will help you be the risk-taker you are, examine your offer as a whole, and lay it all out there for your students.

You will want to use these strategies not only to identify what pieces of content you may want to change (or add), but to ensure that you feel confident in your product and have added all the value you can (without overwhelming your students!).

Boost your confidence, find out how your course value rates. Click here!

Jan 12, 2017
#142: 7 Bold Moves to Shake Up Your Business NOW
54:27

Forget your resolutions. Instead, let’s focus on making ONE BOLD MOVE in your business in 2017.

I have seven ways for you to put a stake in the ground and inject new life into your business starting NOW. Most of these seven I have done myself, so I know they can boost your business, give you a shot of confidence and be a massive game changer.

For a little extra push and motivation, I want you to also check out my freebie: my must read list to build momentum in 2017. I can’t think of anything better than a great book to help bring me new perspectives and ideas. Also, when I need inspiration, I turn to books. So for me, diving into some good books is CRUCIAL if you want to propel your business forward.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Must Read List to Build Momentum in 2017

FREE DOWNLOAD

As for the 7 bold moves, I carefully picked each of them because I know they will help drive growth for your business, and can be implemented with little cost on your part. In fact, I’ve include how you can take action for each move.

Amongst those seven, I have ways to revolutionize your content, launch a new community, find a group of mentors, help you drill down on your business, and more. I think there is a little something for everyone—check it out and pick your bold move for the New Year now.

Jan 05, 2017
#141: Where Should I Spend My Money As I Build My Online Business?
50:44

Of the hundreds of online tools and resources out there— and there are hundreds—it’s tough to know where to spend money and where to save.

My team and I have used many and have found the ‘tried and true’ tools that will assist you for the long run and give you the resources you need to navigate your online business through the three stages of launching.

Today it’s all about growing a profitable business with the right resources, while also keeping it lean.

To get you started, click here for this value-packed tools guide (it’s FREE!), which details the specific tools and resources I mention (and more) and how you can leverage them right away. Get my detailed list here!

This detailed, tested, proven list of online resources will keep you organized, increase your profits and make you look like the pro that you are.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's 2017 Online Business Tool Must-Haves

FREE DOWNLOAD

Also, in this episode, I break down three crucial stages to building a strong online business and specifically share with you:

  •      How to gauge what stage you’re in
  •      The signs that you’re ready to graduate to the next level
  •      The specific tools that will get your business built for long-term profits

What stage are you in? Click here to find out!

Dec 29, 2016
#140: How to Create a 5-Day Social Media Video Series for Rapid List Growth
39:54

Today we’re talking about doing LIVE with purpose—specifically Facebook Live, Periscope, Snapchat and Instagram Stories.

In fact, my guest, Nicole Walters, a sought-after online influencer, left her corporate job (she even gave her resignation live on Periscope!) to help entrepreneurs learn how their small wins can lead to big results. She is here diving into her 5-step process for creating a multi-day video series that will help you rapidly grow your email list.

Regardless of your platform, this step-by-step process for creating your own video series will work for you.

Get the step-by-step details here.

Despite the amazing results you can get from video, some entrepreneurs (new and experienced alike) let their fears and anxieties psyche them out of using it. If you’re ready to focus on building your list, this is where you want to be focusing.

These 5 steps will break down how to create your list building video series.

  • What should your video series be about? We’ll cover that.
  • How long should each video be? Yep, that one too.
  • How do you grow your email list with each video? Check!
  • and so much more

After listening, you will understand how to do social video the right way while building up your email list.

In addition to the 5 steps, this episode gives you best practices for using live video. I’m talking crucial dos and don’ts that are truly valuable for newbies and experts alike. In fact there’s one mistake that so many of us make. After hearing what it is and how to avoid it, you won’t make the same mistake!

This episode might be the most fun I’ve had all year! Send your fears and nerves packing and create videos with confidence and conviction now! Get started here!

Dec 15, 2016
#139: The 10 Most Powerful Episodes to Help Move Your Business Forward
07:15

So here we are: The Best of 2016 List.

I have to admit, compiling this special list for you was the highlight of my week! Not only because I got to look back and remember all of the cool episodes we tackled together, but also because I had the chance to think about the impact the lessons hopefully had on your business too.

My team and I chose this Top 10 List based on a few factors, including the download stats, the feedback and stories from our listeners and my own personal favorites. So although this list is not solely based on analytics, each episode that made the list was chosen with the intention to offer powerful insights and strategies to your marketing plan as you move into the new year.

So if you missed one of these episodes, make sure to listen to it before we ring in the new year! Also make sure to download the freebie for this episode on my top business lessons for the year—I compiled these for you to make sure you can learn from my mistakes AND my wins. Get all of those a-has at amyporterfield.com/139download.

One last note: Of course NONE of this would be possible without you and your support. So I want to THANK YOU for a fantastic year!

So (drumroll please…..) here they are: My 10 Most Powerful Podcasts for 2016

#10: “Media, Meditation and a Little Motivation” with Gabby Bernstein (Episode 129)

The gist: Gabby Bernstein, best-selling author and next-generation thought leader, shows you how you can burst through the resistance and actually create those new opportunities for your business. Her techniques of choice have included meditation and manifestation – two things I’ve never personally explored in my own business until now.

Why it made the list:

I know the question some of you may be asking: Am I still meditating?

The answer is YES! I have made it a 10-minute morning habit to meditate. Gabby’s urging to do so was definitely a jumping off point for me. And I feel that it has given me so much more clarity of the projects that I want to work on and where I want to spend my time.

And another really cool factor: It’s allowed me to worry less. I’m a worrier by nature and that 10 minutes in the morning has lessened me from unnecessary worrying and replaced it with more clarity . . . which has lead to more confidence in my daily decisions.

#9: “Preparing for Future Traffic Declines: What Content Creators Need to Know” with Mike Stelzner (Episode 134)

The gist: I give you the latest trends in social media marketing with the man who knows best: my early mentor, friend, and founder of Social Media Examiner, Michael Stelzner.

Why it made the list:

I have to admit that I was a bit scared to share this episode because it has an undertone of doom and gloom when it comes to social media and the online landscape.

However, the insights and the suggested strategies that Mike shares in this episode are so incredibly valuable that this was a discussion that needed to be had. I also felt that there’s nobody better than Mike (as founder of Social Media Examiner) to share some of the findings. And I think that you will find it very actionable for your business!


#8: 
“How to Grow a Profitable Facebook Group” with Josh and Jill Stanton (Episode 97)

The gist: My guests on the podcast, the irrepressible Josh and Jill Stanton from Screw the Nine to Five, share their secret strategies for using private Facebook Groups to build a community of affinity and trust around your brand.

Why it made the list:

Facebook’s landscape has changed considerably over the last year. And where I used to say that you want to put all of your efforts into your Facebook Page and build engagement, I am now convinced that you will get a bigger bang for your buck if you create your own private Facebook Groups around a specific topic and build your community that way.

Ultimately I think this strategy is more niche focused and intimate, and the conversations are richer and more valuable. I also like that in this episode, Jill and Josh go beyond list building and talk about how to sell your online courses through these private Groups.

Plus, Jill and Josh are hilarious—so it’s an entertaining one!


#7: 
“How Do I Price My Online Course?” (Episode 107)

The gist: I want you to price your course with confidence. So I’ve got your seven-step pricing strategy to help you determine what you should really charge for your course—and feel “whole” about the entire process.

Why it made the list:

I love this episode because it takes all of the guesswork out of pricing.

When people are creating online courses, they often get stuck in the pricing war in their head. They want to charge one price but they’re not sure if their product is valuable enough to charge that price. And they’re not really sure what determines the price of a product.

In this episode, I literally broke down all of the factors that go into making a pricing decision. Once you go through the different reasons as to why you’re coming up with the price, you as the creator of that course can be incredibly confident that the price you are charging is definitely worth it (because of the value you are delivering).


#6: 
“Are You Repelling or Attracting Your Potential Customers?” with Jasmine Star (Episode 106)

The gist: My special guest, marketing and branding strategist Jasmine Star, paints a vivid and thought-provoking picture of her avatar, Elle, and gives you tons of other great social media advice.

Why it made the list:

First of all, this episode was the beginning of a beautiful friendship! I now talk to Jasmine every single week. So this chat started something that I am so fortunate to have today.

Secondly, this year I was onstage three times to talk about social media (at the Business Boutique event via the Dave Ramsey team) and each time I told the story of Jasmine’s “Elle” and it was always a huge hit. People would tell me, “After hearing about Jasmine’s Elle, I totally get it now—I’m going to find my own Elle!”

I got so excited about that because when you take what you learned in this episode and you create your own Elle, every time you post on social media, you are going to do so with confidence, knowing you are attracting the perfect person for your programs, products and services. This episode will raise your game to a new level.


#5: 
“Where Do I Start?” (Episode 105)

The gist: I tackle the two phases you need to know to build your business. I describe a path for how to build a business that will thrive in the long term, and really fulfill the lifestyle you are looking for.

Why it made the list:

This episode is perfect for you if you are still in a 9-to-5 job and working on a side hustle, or in the first year of business.

I live and die by the idea that the way your business looks today, will be dramatically different a year from now. This is because you’re learning, you’re experimenting, you’re figuring things out. So you don’t have set anything in stone!

And going through the two phases of your business allows you a little bit of breathing room for experimentation and testing out new content, ideas and platforms. So again, a must for all newbies.


#4: 
“How to Create Content Rituals to Get More Done” (Episode 102)

The gist: I share my own personal Tiger Time rituals and show you how I give myself the time and space to create my BEST content. The rules are strict, but the rewards are HUGE. I’ll also clue you in on a few musts for planning out my week—including what helps me prepare for the week ahead, and an old, yet trusty planning tool that I’ve dusted off from the past.

Why it made the list:

My favorite thing to hear is when someone comes up to me and says, “Amy, I just adopted Tiger Time in my business and I love it.” One of my listeners gushed about it when I was with my husband, Hobie.  The look on his face when he heard “Tiger Time” was priceless. ;-) But I was beaming because I know, firsthand, that creating rituals in your business is literally the secret sauce to making things actually work like no matter what.

With Tiger Time, the whole premise is to be fierce about your time and how you’re spending it, and making sure there’s always time to create. And because I believe that content creation is the foundation of a business, I think having this Tiger Time really has proven to be incredibly valuable in my own business—and hopefully the same for you.


#3: 
“Five New Launch Lessons From My Most Successful Launch to Date” (Episode 116)

The gist: I not only debrief a recent course launch (the good and the bad), but I also have five new lessons that will help you launch your next course profitably.

Why it made the list:

Whenever I do launches in review, I always get such great feedback, because listeners tell me that they feel like I’m taking them behind the scenes with me and giving them secrets that they normally wouldn’t get from other marketers they’re learning from.

I’m often told “I love your honesty about where you got stuck along the way and what you did to fix it.” The launch in review is a really good look at some concrete strategies that we applied, and an honest gut check about what worked, and what didn’t.


#2: 
“How Much Money Should I Spend on Facebook Ads to Be Successful on My Webinar?” with Rick Mulready (Episode 123)

The gist: My friend and Facebook Ad Expert, Rick Mulready, answers the number one question we both get asked all of the time: How much should I spend on Facebook ads to ensure a successful webinar?

Why it made the list:

The great news is it’s a complete numbers game. If you know the formula, you can get an exact answer to that question.

I also really like this episode because of the freebies that go along with it:

  • Facebook ads online calculator that you can use to determine your exact Facebook ads budget for your next webinar.
  • Cheat sheet detailing the the info you need to plug into the Facebook ad spend calculator.

The great thing is you’ll never again wonder how much to spend on Facebook ads to fill up your webinars! So this is a must to check out…


#1: 
“When is the Right Time to Add Another Product to Your Business?” (Episode 100)

The gist: This hot topic is focused on the big question: When do I know if it’s time to add another product to my business? To help answer, I talk about the two paths for your business; Horizontal and Vertical.

Why it made the list:

First of all, this is a question I get asked ALL OF THE TIME. When it comes to this idea of introducing a new product, I’m very passionate about the fact that you do not need a lot of courses in your business to be profitable. Quality over quantity is always my motto.

I think sometimes people create something and move away from it too quickly in their business, causing more stress, overwhelm, and more work than they need to. If you would just stick with one product a little bit longer, promote it in different ways, learn how to launch at different levels, then you would see that the program could even more profitable.

The challenge is you might give it one or two little launches and think, “I’m moving on to the next thing” because maybe it wasn’t as profitable as you had hoped or, because you got distracted by another big idea.

Here’s what I think: What you’ve created initially could always become bigger and better and more valuable, but it needs time to mature. I also think that online courses definitely mature as you, as an entrepreneur, grow and get better at content creation and launching. So why not give yourself the time for that growth?

I hope you’ve enjoyed the rundown of my 10 most powerful episodes for growing your business.  Are you ready to dive even deeper with me?  I’ve compiled my biggest business lessons and insights from 2016 —some of them were doozies, and others were more like subtle “a-has” that made a big impact in how I have shaped my business. These are 10 business lessons that have truly impacted me for the better—and I hope they have the same effect for you! Click here now to get them for free!

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Amy's Top 10 Business Building Lessons From 2016

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Dec 08, 2016
#138: How to Plan Your Promotional Calendar Like a Boss
43:29

If I ever did a list of Amy’s Favorite Things (in honor of the one and only Oprah), today’s topic would be number one.

We are talking about PLANNING. Specifically, planning for the new year.

The best part is that thanks to my guest today, you can be a pro at calendaring no matter who you are. Anne Samoilov is a launch expert and when I say she knows how to plan...I mean it!

Get ready to hear her amazing, no-fail-formula for planning an entire new year of promotions, partnerships, and personal business goals.

I’m giving you a solid plan for completing your 2017 promotional calendar from start to finish, and here’s what’s great: it won’t take much time at all.

Even better, you don’t need to take any notes, because I have everything detailed in this incredible freebie! It is a quick guide to everything I share with you in this episode, including a list of questions you must ask yourself before you add anything to your calendar for the year ahead.

Start planning your 2017 promotional calendar like a boss here!

In order to plan you will need to reflect on the prior year and drill down on what worked and didn’t work for you. Then, adjust for the year ahead. Anne and I give you the questions you will want to ask yourself before you calendar anything.

This mini-training session will give you a solid approach that you can use for years to come!

And, another great thing about today’s episode is the way Anne approaches time off. While it isn’t exactly what you think it might be, you absolutely must include it on your calendar.

There are five categories total that you will want to “calendar” first and foremost — time off being the first one.

So stop whatever it is you are working on for your year ahead and listen to these steps first.

Let’s map out your year.

If your calendar for next year is swirling in your head or only partially laid out in a Google doc, this episode is for you. This approach makes planning your 2017 promotional calendar easy — even when you aren’t sure of all of your specifics yet.

Accept this episode and freebie as my gift to you this holiday season ;-)

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get Your Promotional Calendar Quick Guide

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Dec 01, 2016
#136: How to Use 'Content Gold' to Fuel Your Next Launch
32:07

When it comes to your next course promotion, breaking down your content is as simple as 1-2-3:

  • What’s the best content to start a conversation with your audience?
  • What content will help you drive customers to your core marketing message?
  • Which pieces should you use to expand and deepen your audience’s knowledge of your subject?

Today I’m breaking down the 3 stages of launching content. These 3 stages will be your Bible, regardless of your business or your future programs. You can apply these stages to your specific online program or course and use them for all of your future launches as well. (I passionately use this method for all of my launches!)

This is the content that will not only keep your potential clients engaged, but will attract the right people before, during and after your launch.

And, not only am I walking you through the stages, but I’m SHOWING you precisely how you can apply them in my freebie: 3-stage content marketing launch plan here.

I’ve created a sample 3-stage content marketing launch plan using one of my students as an example. You will easily be able to use this freebie as a model for your own online program— over and over again. Get ready to see a specific example for every stage here. Download now!

You’ll learn precisely what content to market before your cart opens (and you’ll definitely want to start this 30 days before!), what to do while your cart is open, and what to communicate to your audience once your cart is closed.

EPISODE FREEBIE

Get The 3 Stages for Planning Your Content Marketing Plan for Your Launch

FREE DOWNLOAD

 

Nov 17, 2016
#135: 5 Common Facebook Ad Mistakes (and How to Fix Them)
31:53

Facebook’s super stealth ad targeting can zero-in on entrepreneurs over 30, who shop online at West Elm, don’t have children, love sushi, visited your website in the last 60 days and vacationed in Napa’s wine country last year — BUT it can’t seem to help you fix your Facebook ad missteps . . .

That’s where I can step in and help with an extra special episode in which I’m sharing 5 common Facebook ad mistakes, and how you can fix them.

My go-to-Facebook-ads expert Rick Mulready is here with suggestions, insight and feedback to help you bounce back from — and steer clear of — Facebook ad missteps.

Side step these 5 common mistakes most of us make with Facebook ads. Click here!

For example, how often and when specifically should you test your Facebook ads? Or, what is the best way to edit an ad — without messing up your metrics?

Rick and I are breaking that all down for you.

What’s more important: selling or getting conversions? And, how important are video views? The answers might surprise you.

We systematically review each of the 5 Facebook ad missteps and provide ways to self correct.

You know your target audience better than anybody, you know their pain points and challenges. You are more prepared than you might think to experiment with a few of these fixes and get better results from your Facebook ads.

Now is your chance to learn what to look out for and avoid these missteps in the future. Click here to get the 5 common Facebook ad mistakes!

Nov 10, 2016
#134: Preparing for Future Traffic Declines: What Content Creators Need to Know
44:56

How are you responding to the shifts happening NOW in social media marketing?

I have you covered because today I’m talking about the latest trends in social media marketing with the man who knows best: my mentor, friend, and founder of Social Media Examiner, Michael Stelzner.

Click here to learn what updates to make to your social media marketing plan today.

You may be noticing that organic social reach is declining. It’s scary, but don’t be afraid because while it sounds all doom and gloom, it’s not. There’s actually a lot of quality opportunities out there and the best ones are explained in this episode.

Are you noticing that even the Facebook social media marketing rules are shifting? Michael tells you what you should no longer be doing on Facebook — and he also touches on you where your focus should be on Facebook.

Learn what you can do to pivot your approach.

The strategies that Michael gives you are ones that I am using too. You will hear MUST-DO tips for email marketing (including how to ensure your emails are delivered and opened), conversion rate optimization, how you can best use podcasts to drive traffic, as well as tracking and analytics. Listen in now.

AND, Michael has an early-sign-up announcement about Social Media Marketing World 2017. I’m going to be speaking and I hope to see you there! Get registered now at the link at the bottom. Details here.

Nov 03, 2016
#133: How to Get Unstuck in Your Course Creation Process
40:21

Are you having a love/hate relationship with your course creation?

Creating your first online course can be a challenge. How do you decide which content to keep and which to leave out.

I have been there. It’s awful, you have such passion for your topic, but for a plethora of reasons it’s not coming through when you put pen to paper (or fingers to keyboard).

I’ve built FIVE blockbuster courses over the last six years AND I’ve been in the very same struggle you may be feeling right now.

Nearly 40,000-enrolled-students later, I’m going to walk you through how to break through the obstacles that can stall your product creation process.

I am dedicating this entire special episode to demystifying the product creation process.

I’m giving you the you exact steps to take when you feel stuck. (And, what the most common reasons are for getting stuck, so you know what to look for next time around.)

There are three questions you should ask yourself before you create any course. These questions will help you find FOCUS. Once you have that, your creative energy will flow.

I will also help you decide what content makes the most sense for your business and your audience right now. For example, do you know if you want to create an Introductory Course or a Signature Course? I’m breaking down both of these for you.

Listen in to hear how you can get unstuck and create the course you’ve desperately wanted to complete. (The finish line is closer than you think.)

Oct 24, 2016
#132: How to Cultivate an “Opportunity Knocks Every Time” Mindset with Patrick Bet-David
41:46

Your first webinar didn't convert.

You wanted to launch your course two weeks ago, but you just can’t get your content outline together.

Your Facebook ads are seeing clicks, but not getting quality leads.

What do you do when setbacks show up in your business? Bury your head in the sand? Or, pick yourself up and move forward, more determined than ever?

Having an online business can be challenging at times, and part of being an entrepreneur is knowing how to bounce back from the tough times. It’s about having the right perspective.

That’s why I wanted to chat with Patrick Bet-David. For Patrick, a setback is an opportunity waiting to happen. And his rags to riches story is inspiring for ANY business owner.

Make sure you stay tuned to the end, because in addition to Patrick’s fascinating story, I wanted to give you a little bonus: A mini-training on how you can stand out from the competition and get results.

First, you’ll learn what you need to instill in every potential buyer.

Second, you’ll discover the most important thing to deliver on.

Lastly, you will learn what you need to develop and stick to as much as you can. It’s so, so important.

The last one is incredibly powerful and can make all the difference in your new business.

Also, learn the one mistake that Patrick says ALL entrepreneurs make, so you can avoid it.

Get started on this mini-training now!

Oct 20, 2016
#131: How to Get Overwhelm to Eat Your Dust
28:49

You’ve got this!

Today, I have three incredibly DOABLE solutions to rid yourself of the feeling that may be overtaking your life – OVERWHELM.

Ugh. I don’t even like saying the word, because I know how awful it can feel when it’s overtaking your life. And, I’m here to help.

For me, overwhelm shows itself when I feel like I’ve gotten behind or everything feels disorganized, and I know things could go in a really bad direction.

It’s in those moments that I use one of my personal stress strategies that I’ve been fine tuning ever since I started my own business.

In this episode I share a very personal struggle that I’ve been facing in my business. Some of my overwhelm has been coming from my issue with doing VIDEO. Ugh! Click here to hear my story - you might be able to relate.

I’m certain that you will find that one of the three solutions I share with you in my recent episode will come naturally for you. The other two you may have to work at more, but I promise you, if you put the work in, it will be SO WORTH IT.

The first one tells you the exact process you can do to wrap your head around what is really causing overwhelm for you.

The second solution tells you the steps you can take to lessen the stress in your life.

And, the third and final fix helps you get clear on the fear that might be getting in your way.

Like I said, you’ve totally got this! Use my Triple S to squash your overwhelm. Click here!

Oct 10, 2016
#130: How to Sell on a Webinar (Without Being Overly Salesy)